Home

Juniper Networks J6350 User's Manual

1. Sia e is T Il Midplane N pa H bd ooooo000 o oo o anne L H oo d A ama 8 d Se m 8 2 D Physical Interface Front Module PIM Table 11 on page 30 summarizes the physical specifications for the router chassis Table 11 J4350 and J6350 Physical Specifications Description Value Chassis dimensions m 3 44 in 8 74 cm high 17 44 in 44 3 cm wide 19 44 in 48 38 cm wide with mounting brackets attached m 21 13 in 55 67 cm deep plus 0 5 in 1 27 cm of hardware that protrudes from the chassis front Router weight m j4550Services Router m Minimum no PIMS 23 Ib 10 4 kg a Maximum six PIMs 25 3 lb 11 5 kg m J6350 Services Router m Minimum no PIMs and one power supply 25 5 lb 11 6 kg m Maximum six PIMs and two power supplies 50 7 lb 13 9 kg 30 HN J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview J4350 and J6350 Midplane The midplane is located in the center of the chassis and forms the rear of the PIM card cage see Figure 18 on page 30 You install the PIMs into the midplane from the front of the chassis Data packets are transferred across the midplane from the PIM to the Routing Eng
2. 9003838 To replace the compact flash lg 2 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off Remove the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle Remove the screws from the sides and top of the chassis that secure the cover to the chassis Slide the cover off the chassis A WARNING If the fans are still rotating wait until they stop before proceeding with the next step especially if your compact flash is in the horizontal position flat against the system board T Slide the compact flash out of its slot as shown in Figure 83 on page 183 Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Figure 83 Removing the J4350 or J6350 Compact Flash 9003835 8 Place the compact flash on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag 9 Slide the new compact flash in
3. 9004105 DRAM 2 pairs Crypto External Power Accelerator compact supply Module flash Rear Table 6 on page 17 summarizes the physical specifications for the router chassis Table 6 J2320 and J2350 Physical Specifications Description Value Chassis dimensions m J2320 Services Router m 1 75 in 4 45 cm high m 17 51 in 44 48 cm wide 18 9 in 48 01 cm wide with mounting brackets attached m 15 1 in 38 35 cm deep plus 0 78 in 1 98 cm of hardware that protrudes from the chassis front m J2350 Services Router u 2 61 in 6 65 cm high m 17 51 in 44 48 cm wide 18 9 in 48 01 cm wide with mounting brackets attached m 15 1 in 58 55 cm deep plus 0 78 in 1 98 cm of hardware that protrudes from the chassis front Router weight m J2320 Services Router E Minimum no PIMs 14 8 lbs 6 7 kg E Maximum three PIMs 15 9 lbs 7 2 kg m J2350 Services Router E Minimum no PIMs 16 3 lbs 7 4 kg 8 Maximum five PIMs 18 2 lbs 8 3 kg J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features m 17 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide J2320 and J2350 Midplane The J2320 and J2350 midplane is located in the center of the chassis and forms the rear of the PIM card cage see Figure 6 on p
4. Crypto Accelerator Module 9004113 To remove or install a Crypto Accelerator Module use the following procedures m Removing a J2320 or J2550 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 199 m Installing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 200 198 Mm Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Removing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module Se NOTE If you are installing a Crypto Accelerator Module into a J2320 or J2350 Services Router for the first time proceed directly to Installing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 200 To remove the Crypto Accelerator Module 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface to receive the Crypto Module 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 3 Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off 4 Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle 5 Remove the chassis cover See Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Router
5. LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 18 to 17 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinout Table 73 RS 232 DCE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Frame Ground 1 2 Transmit Data 60 5 Receive Data 57 4 Request to Send 48 5 Clear to Send 33 6 Data Set Ready 57 7 Signal Ground 15 8 Data Carrier Detect 56 15 Transmit Clock 52 17 Receive Clock 45 18 Local Loopback 9 20 Data Terminal Ready 5 24 Terminal Clock 22 to 21 z z RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinout Table 74 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pin DC 37 DB 37 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground 60 4 59 Send Data A 56 5 55 Send Timing A Serial PIM Cable Specifications m 225 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 74 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinout continued LFH 60 Pin DC 37 DB 37 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 1 6 2 Receive Data A 48 7 47 Request to Send A 5 8 6 Receive Timing A 37 9 38 Clear to Send A 41 0 Local Loopback 9 1 10 Data Mode A 33 2 34 Terminal Ready A 13 3 14 Receive Ready A 52 7 51 Terminal Timing A 36 9 Signal Ground 4 20 Receive Common 59 22 60 Send Data B 55 25 56 Send Timing B 2 24 1 Receive Data B 47 25 48 Request to Send B 6 26 5 Receive Timing B 58 27 5
6. 255 electrical eer ed e ette mei us 252 generalis ed e p pl m es 249 grounded eguipment nra eean 260 in case of electrical accident 261 iristallatiQri a cett te es 266 jewelry removal morieris rose ttt oe elation les 277 lasersrand LEDS a ise pereo erp e 271 IS 247 lightning activity tate og nee abe 278 maintenance and operatlon 275 multiple power supplies ono 262 operating teMPperature eee 279 power discOnrnectiorisn ete eoe t eee 265 product disposal 5 uiae eb p ds 281 rick Mounting uiis eroe ERA Lbs op p Rs 267 elen GE 271 Index mM 305 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide read installation instructions telecommunications cord TN power system safety standards x fire Safety en eod Akasa ellie ies sample configuration for Dasic CONMECHVIEY 2 2 attt teer ate te 150 fOPSECULESACCESS sos vedo ede ee ed dd 160 for SSL certificates ced deu 159 saving licenses CL isses ceat hee te uta eg de 166 sereenilensth GEL setting oes drene eenas tbe tern 98 screen width CLI Setting tegere ee rr et s 99 secure access generating SSL Certiftcates eee 155 HTTPS access configuration editor 158 HTTPS access Quick Conftguraton 155 HIETPS recomrmiended eene fri 154 installing SSL certificates configuration GIE P 158 installing SSL certificates Quick EISES euer euer etim deer ves e 15
7. 1 Empty Not Usable 2 Online CPU less FPC 3 Empty 4 Empty 5 Online CPU less FPC 6 Empty In this example J series power management has placed the PIM in slot 5 in an offline state to prevent damage If brought online the PIM would cause the combination of PIMs to exceed the maximum limit of 85 high power tokens for the J2350 router user host gt show chassis power ratings Device Low High Heat Ratings Power Power Total Tokens 83 83 83 FPC 1 6 27 21 OK FPC 2 3 27 18 OK FPC 3 3 27 18 OK FPC 4 0 0 0 OK FPC 5 2 27 2 Exceeded Tokens Used 14 108 59 eS NOTE In the show chassis power ratings command output the PIM slot number is reported as an FPC number The offline PIM is not powered off and continues to draw minimal power 2 To bring the PIM online you have the following options m Remove one or more PIMs from the chassis This option requires that you power off the router For more information about removing PIMs see Removing a PIM on page 172 m Bring the PIM online without powering off the router To do so use the set chassis fpc offline command to set another PIM slot in the chassis to the offline state For example Troubleshooting Power Management WM 211 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide userGhost set chassis fpc 2 offl
8. WARNING Waarschuwing Er is ontploffingsgevaar als de batterij verkeerd vervangen wordt Vervang de batterij slechts met hetzelfde of een equivalent type dat door de fabrikant aanbevolen is Gebruikte batterijen dienen overeenkomstig fabrieksvoorschriften weggeworpen te worden WARNING Varoitus R j hdyksen vaara jos akku on vaihdettu v r n akkuun K yt vaihtamiseen ainoastaan saman tai vastaavantyyppist akkua joka on valmistajan suosittelema H vit k ytetyt akut valmistajan ohjeiden mukaan WARNING Attention Danger d explosion si la pile n est pas remplac e correctement Ne la remplacer que par une pile de type semblable ou quivalent recommand e par le fabricant Jeter les piles usag es conform ment aux instructions du fabricant WARNING Warnung Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr Ersetzen Sie die Batterie nur durch den gleichen oder vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach den Anweisungen des Herstellers WARNING Advarsel Det kan v re fare for eksplosjon hvis batteriet skiftes p feil m te Skift kun med samme eller tilsvarende type som er anbefalt av produsenten Kasser brukte batterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner WARNING Avvertenza Pericolo di esplosione se la batteria non installata correttamente Sostituire solo con una di tipo uguale o equivalente consigliata dal produttore Eliminare l
9. checking CPU emperature 25 38 checking DRAM amount 18 51 verifying DRAM installation and configura aceite lid ae 191 show cli command eie teet eb ederet ehe 97 show system license commande 166 explanada 166 show system license keys Commande 167 show system license usage Commande 167 EE e le EE 167 shutdown ge EE Me Met der Mae 129 au 129 temperature See shutdown temperature shutdown temperature NEBS compliant routers 25 38 non NEBS compliant routers 38 side Panes DE EE 86 SIG LED eI ntt bata ted ne ete EE etf 75 Signaling Imitattong eeren rreren 108 site preparation Checklist euet t E dope eee et A electrical wiring guidelines fire Safetys ove vette oope for rack installation guidelines dde e dete operating Grvirormment eects power requirements ouch restent size pep CT 17 ELE 17 ELE 30 16350 o qut deest ge CORP EE 50 requirements for rack installation 104 105 slot numbers PIM chassis diagram 20 32 displayed as FPC number in command EIERE 176 small form factor pluggable transceivers See SFP SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol no Gigabit Ethernet support 51 53 SONWALE orars erini sic Sg iia NEEESE RAENT ee Sec 39 E EE E EE EN 39 licenses See licenses See also JUNOS software specifications AG electrical COririe ctor eet etta 109 AC Power Cords oum dte 110 DC electrical connection edd DC poWer cables toe SE
10. 58 1H Field Replaceable PIMs T3 or E3 PIM Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide The T3 also known as DS5 PIM Figure 32 on page 59 and E3 PIM Figure 55 on page 59 provide a physical connection to T5 or E5 network media types The T5 and E3 PIMs include one physical T3 or E3 port with an integrated data service unit DSU Figure 32 T3 PIM 9002327 9002334 The T5 and E3 PIMs provide the following key features Onboard network processor Integrated DSU Eliminates the need for a separate external device Subrate and scrambling options with support for major DSU vendors Independent internal and external clocking system Loopback payload supported only on T5 PIM local and remote bit error rate test BERT and T5 far end alarm and control FEAC diagnostics For pinouts of cable connectors for T5 and E3 PIMs see E3 and T3 BNC Connector Pinout on page 258 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 172 Status LEDs indicate port status Table 28 on page 60 describes the meaning of the LED states Field Replaceable PIMs m 59 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 28 Status LEDs for T3 and E3 Ports Color State Description Green On steadily Online with no alarms or failures Red On steadily Active with a local alarm
11. A WARNING Aviso A descartagem final deste produto dever ser efectuada de acordo com os regulamentos e a legislac o nacional A WARNING jAtenci n El desecho final de este producto debe realizarse seg n todas me las leyes y regulaciones nacionales A WARNING Varning Slutlig kassering av denna produkt b r sk tas i enlighet med landets alla lagar och foreskrifter Agency Approvals The Services Router complies with the following standards 282 1H Agency Approvals Safety CAN CSA 22 2 No 60950 1 05 UL 60950 1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment EN 60950 1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment EN 60825 1 Safety of Laser Products Part 1 Equipment Classification Requirements and User s Guide EMC J2320 and J2350 AS NZS 3548 Class A Australia New Zealand EN 55022 Class A Emissions Europe FCC Part 15 Class A USA VCCI Class A Japan FCC Part 68 Industry Canada CS 03 EMC J4320 and J6350 AS NZS 3548 Class B Australia New Zealand EN 55022 Class B Emissions Europe FCC Part 15 Class B USA VCCI Class B Japan FCC Part 68 Industry Canada CS 03 Immunity Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information EN 61000 3 2 Power Line Harmonics EN 61000 3 3 Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker EN 61000 4 2 ESD EN 61000 4 3 Radiated Immunity EN 61000 4 4 EFT EN 61000 4 5 Surge EN 61000 4 6 Low Frequency Common Immunity EN 61000 4 11 Voltage Dips and
12. Common Criteria Immttatons ee 133 defining configuration dito 148 defining Quick Configuration 145 required to commit a configuration 155 route reflectors BGP Cense ieii icies 162 router See Services Router Routing Engine IA A S HS d Pr Hawes 25 58 fan failure dette te TCU eet n tegens 210 J2320 functions and Componenmts occnncccinicicnnno 18 J2350 functions and Componenmts cincccinicicnnno 18 J4350 functions and components 51 J6350 functions and components 51 Reload ansiada 40 major red alar t 210 midplaneito BIMS en eie trees 18 51 minor yellow aam 210 r ad r WELE GEPOE se pese p EEUU 210 Software component eed EENS eos 40 LOO WAT Mis scd ote tette toten d PR PIER Fred 210 routing protocol software process 40 rpa DrOCess italia 40 RS 252 DCE cable pinouts i Aeaee iata ai 225 RS 232 DTE cable piriouts tii its 224 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE cable pinouts 227 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE cable pinouts 225 S S T port See ISDN BRI ports safety guidelines and warnings AC ODOWEBIa aere en EO ES IRSO SONO D DNE 255 battery Handlings scott epo eaae 276 DG power generalidad 254 DC power dsconpectlon 255 DC power wiring sequence warning 257 DC power wiring terminations warning 259 DC power grounding requirements and WAI ate Ee E 257 DC power redundant power supplies
13. The external compact flash is installed in a slot on the rear of the J2320 or J2350 chassis To replace the external compact flash 1 Verify the device that the router used to boot by running the show system storage command from the CLI For example user host gt show system storage Filesystem 512 blocks Used Avail Capacity Mounted on dev ad0s1a 218254 175546 40526 81 The boot device is mounted on The internal compact flash is located at adO The external compact flash is located at ad2 The USB storage device is located at daO This example shows that the router booted from the internal compact flash If the show system storage output indicates that the router booted from the external compact flash you need to power off the router before replacing the compact flash 2 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 5 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 4 Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off before you remove the compact flash Replacing External Compact Flashes Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Skip this step if the router did not boot from the external
14. Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 269 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 270 nm m Ved montering av denne enheten i et kabinett som er delvis fylt skal kabinettet lastes fra bunnen og opp med den tyngste komponenten nederst i kabinettet m Hvis kabinettet er utstyrt med stabiliseringsutstyr skal stabilisatorene installeres for montering eller utforing av reparasjonsarbeid pa enheten i kabinettet A WARNING Aviso Para se prevenir contra danos corporais ao montar ou reparar esta unidade numa estante dever tomar precau es especiais para se certificar de que o sistema possui um suporte est vel As seguintes directrizes ajud lo o a efectuar o seu trabalho com seguranca O Juniper Networks router dever ser instalado numa prateleira fixa estrutura do edificio m Esta unidade dever ser montada na parte inferior da estante caso seja esta a nica unidade a ser montada m Ao montar esta unidade numa estante parcialmente ocupada coloque os itens mais pesados na parte inferior da estante arrumando os de baixo para cima m Sea estante possuir um dispositivo de estabiliza o instale o antes de montar ou reparar a unidade A WARNING Atenci n Para evitar lesiones durante el montaje de este equipo sobre un bastidor o posteriormente durante su mantenimiento se debe poner mucho cuidado en que el sistema quede bien estable Para garantizar su seguridad proceda seg n las s
15. m Other countries International Electromechanical Commission IEC 60364 Part 1 through Part 7 Evaluated to the TN power system Locate the emergency power off switch for the room in which you are working so that if an electrical accident occurs you can quickly turn off the power Make sure that grounding surfaces are cleaned and brought to a bright finish before grounding connections can be made Do not work alone if potentially hazardous conditions exist anywhere in your workspace Never assume that power is disconnected from a circuit Always check the circuit before starting to work Carefully look for possible hazards in your work area such as moist floors ungrounded power extension cords and missing safety grounds Operate the Services Router within marked electrical ratings and product usage instructions For the Services Router and peripheral equipment to function safely and correctly use the cables and connectors specified for the attached peripheral equipment and make certain they are in good condition Many Services Router components can be removed and replaced without powering down or disconnecting power to the Services Router as detailed in elsewhere in this manual Never install equipment if it appears damaged AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines CAUTION For routers with AC power supplies an external surge protective device SPD must be used at the AC power source The following electri
16. Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 99 TIM518 Connector Pinout continued Pin Signal 29 Tip 30 Tip 31 Tip 32 Tip 53 42 Tip 45 Tip 44 45 Tip 46 T p 47 T p 48 T p 49 T p TIM521 Connector Pinout The TIM521 Telephony Interface Module uses an RJ 45 cable Table 100 on page 245 describes the TIM521 RJ 45 connector pinout Table 100 TIM521 RJ 45 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 No connection 2 No connection 5 Transmit pair 4 Receive pair 5 Receive pair 6 Transmit pair 7 No connection 8 No connection Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules W 245 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 246 HW Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information To install and use the Services Router safely follow proper safety procedures This chapter discusses the following safety and regulatory compliance information m Definition of Safety Warning Levels on page 247 m Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 249 m Agency Approvals on page 282 m Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements on page 285 m Compliance Statements for NEBS on page 285 m Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements on page 285 Definition of Safety Warning Levels This manual uses the following three levels of safety warnings a N
17. Console Port You can use the console port on the chassis front panel to connect to the Routing Engine through an RJ 45 serial cable From the chassis console port you can use the CLI to configure the router The console port is configured as data terminal equipment DTE and supports the RS 252 EIA 252 standard For information about securing the chassis console port see the J series Services Router Administration Guide For pinout information see Chassis Console Port Pinouts on page 254 AUX Port The port labeled AUX on the front panel of the J series Services Router is for future use and is not activated J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features WM 23 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide USB Port The USB ports on the front panel of the router see Figure 8 on page 19 and Figure 9 on page 19 accept a USB storage device or USB storage device adapter with a compact flash installed as defined in the CompactFlash Specification published by the CompactFlash Association When a USB storage device is installed and configured it automatically acts as a secondary boot device if the internal compact flash fails on startup Depending on the size of the USB storage device you can also configure it to receive any core files generated during a failure For information about configuring a USB storage device see the J series Services Router Administration Guide NOTE For a list of supported U
18. Figure 73 Removing a PIM Captive screws To remove a PIM see Figure 75 on page 175 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface to receive the PIM Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the Services Router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 Press and release the power button to power off the router Verify that the POWER LED blinks and then turns off Label the cables connected to the PIM so that you can later reconnect each cable to the correct PIM Disconnect the cables from the PIM If necessary arrange the cables to prevent them from dislodging or developing stress points m Secure each cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor m Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop m Use fasteners to maintain the shape of cable loops Loosen the captive screws on each side of the PIM faceplate Grasp the handles on each side of the PIM faceplate and slide the PIM out of the router Place it in the electrostatic bag or on the antistatic mat If you are not reinstalling a PIM into the emptied slot install a blank PIM panel over the slot to maintain proper airflow Replacing a PIM M 173 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 S
19. General Laser Safety Guidelines When working around PIMs observe the following safety guidelines to prevent eye injury m Donot look into unterminated ports or at fibers that connect to unknown sources m Do not examine unterminated optical ports with optical instruments m Avoid direct exposure to the beam A WARNING Unterminated optical connectors can emit invisible laser radiation The lens in the human eye focuses all the laser power on the retina so focusing the eye directly on a laser source even a low power laser could permanently damage the eye Class 1 Laser Product Warning A WARNING Class 1 laser product Waarschuwing Klasse 1 laser produkt Varoitus Luokan 1 lasertuote Attention Produit laser de classe I Warnung Laserprodukt der Klasse 1 A WARNING Avvertenza Prodotto laser di Classe 1 Advarsel Laserprodukt av klasse 1 Aviso Produto laser de classe 1 jAtenci n Producto l ser Clase I Varning Laserprodukt av klass 1 272 1H Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Class 1 LED Product Warning WARNING Class 1 LED product Waarschuwing Klasse 1 LED product Varoitus Luokan 1 valodiodituote Attention Alarme de produit LED Class I Warnung Class 1 LED Produktwarnung WARNING Avvertenza Avvertenza prodotto LED di Classe 1 Advarsel LED produkt i klasse 1 Aviso Produto de classe 1 com LED jAtenci n Aviso sobre pro
20. Processes packets applies filters routing policies and other features and forwards packets to the next hop along the route to their final destination For information about Routing Engine hardware see J2320 and J2350 Routing Engine Hardware on page 18 and J4350 and J6350 Routing Engine Hardware on page 51 Kernel and Microkernel The Routing Engine kernel provides the underlying infrastructure for all JUNOS software processes by doing the following m Linking the routing tables maintained by the routing protocol process with the forwarding table maintained by the Routing Engine m Coordinating communication with the Packet Forwarding Engine primarily by synchronizing the Packet Forwarding Engine s forwarding table with the master forwarding table maintained by the Routing Engine The microkernel contains device drivers and processes that the Packet Forwarding Engine uses to govern the flow of packets through the Services Router JUNOS Software Processes 40 m Software Overview The JUNOS software running on the Routing Engine and Packet Forwarding Engine consists of multiple processes that are responsible for individual Services Router functions The separation of functions provides operational stability because each process accesses its own protected memory space In addition because each process is a separate software package you can selectively upgrade all or part of the JUNOS software for added flexibility
21. Configure the machine s domain name edit root set system domain name domain name Plain text like this Represents names of configuration statements commands files and directories IP addresses configuration hierarchy levels or labels on routing platform components m To configure a stub area include the stub statement at the edit protocols ospf area area id hierarchy level m The console port is labeled CONSOLE angle brackets Enclose optional keywords or variables stub default metric metric pipe symbol Indicates a choice between the mutually exclusive keywords or variables on either side of the symbol The set of choices is often enclosed in parentheses for clarity broadcast multicast string1 string2 string3 pound sign Indicates a comment specified on the same line as the configuration statement to which it applies rsvp Required for dynamic MPLS only square brackets Enclose a variable for which you can substitute one or more values community name members community ids Indention and braces Identify a level in the configuration hierarchy semicolon Identifies a leaf statement at a configuration hierarchy level edit routing options static route default nexthop address retain J Web GUI Conventions Bold text like this Represents J Web graphical user inter
22. E3 and T3 BNC Connector Pinout The E5 and T5 PIMs each use two BNC connectors one for transmitting data TX and one for receiving data RX ADSL and G SHDSL RJ 11 Connector Pinout The 1 port ADSL 2 2 Annex A and Annex B PIMs use an RJ 11 cable which is not supplied with the PIMs The 2 port G SHDSL Annex A and Annex B PIM also uses an RJ 11 cable which is not supplied with the PIM Table 91 on page 258 describes the RJ 11 connector pinout Table 91 ADSL and G SHDSL RJ 11 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 o connect 2 o connect 5 RJ P Tip 4 RJ N Ring 5 o connect 6 o connect 238 Mm E3 and T3 BNC Connector Pinout ISDN RJ 45 Connector Pinout Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts The 1 port and 4 port ISDN PIMs use an RJ 45 cable which is not supplied with the PIMs Table 92 on page 239 describes the RJ 45 connector pinout Table 92 ISDN RJ 45 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 No connect 2 No connect 3 RJ_SX_P 4 RJ_SR_P 5 RJ_SR_N 6 RJ_SX_N 7 No connect 8 No connect 9 Shielded 10 Shielded 2 Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules The Avaya VoIP modules supported on the Services Router accept different kinds of network cables TGM550 Console Port Pinouts on page 239 TGM550 RJ 1 1 Connector Pinout for Analog Ports on page 240 TIM508 Conn ector Pinout TIM510 RJ 45 Connector TIM514 Conn TIM516 Conn TIM518
23. Field Replaceable PIMs M 55 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Dual Port T1 or E1 PIM 56 m The Dual Port T1 PIM Figure 29 on page 56 and Dual Port EI PIM Figure 50 on page 56 provide a physical connection to T1 or El network media types Each PIM has two physical T1 or E1 ports with an integrated channel service unit CSU or data service unit DSU Figure 29 Dual Port T1 PIM 9002331 9002330 3 GC ema STATUS The Dual Port T1 and El PIMs provides the following key features m Onboard network processor m Integrated CSU DSU Eliminates the need for a separate external device m 56 Kbps and 64 Kbps modes m ANSIT1 102 T1 107 and T1 403 standards compliance m G 703 G 704 and G 706 El standards compliance a ndependent internal and external clocking system m Loopback bit error rate test BERT T1 facilities data link FDL and long buildout diagnostics For pinouts of cable connectors for T1 and El PIMs see El and T1 RJ 48 Cable Pinouts on page 235 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 172 Status LEDs indicate port status Table 26 on page 57 describes the meaning of the LED states Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Table 26 Status LEDs for T1 and E1 Ports Color State Description Green On steadily Online with no alarms or failures Red On steadily Active with a
24. Figure 108 Location of the Agency Labels Models OOOO AAA EII J 4350 JB DC N Serial III 0156012006000098 MAC MII 0010dbd38580 Juniper ID Bo va 0070 INPUT AC 100 240V A 50 60 Hz INPUT DC 48V t0 60V MAX 208 Mado in Malaysia cw 003832 Serial ID label Locating Component Serial Numbers m 215 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide PIM Serial Number Label PIMs are field replaceable Each PIM has a unique serial number The serial number label is located on the right side of the PIM when the PIM is horizontally oriented as it would be installed in the router The exact location might be slightly different on different PIMs depending on the placement of components on the PIM board Power Supply Serial Number Labels The power supplies installed in the J6350 Services Router are field replaceable Each power supply has a unique serial number The serial number label is located on the top of the power supply Contacting Customer Support After you have located the serial numbers of the components you need to return contact Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC in one of the following ways You can contact JTAC 24 hours a day seven days a week m On the Web using the Case Manager link at http www juniper net support m By telephone From the US and Canada 1 888 314 JTAC From all other locations 1 408 745 950
25. m Maximum MTU value of 4500 bytes for channelized T1 or El interface and 4098 bytes for ISDN PRI services e NOTE For a clear channel T1 or El interface the maximum MTU is 9150 bytes m 56 Kbps and 64 Kbps modes m ANSI TI 102 T1 107 and T1 403 standards compliance m G 703 G 704 and G 706 El standards compliance m Independent internal and external clocking system m Loopback bit error rate test BERT T1 facilities data link FDL and long buildout diagnostics For pinouts of cable connectors for channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIMs see ISDN RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 239 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 172 Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI LEDs indicate PIM and port status Table 27 on page 58 describes the meaning of the LED states D NOTE The STATUS LED displays channelized T1 or E1 port activity and alarms only It does not display ISDN PRI B channel or D channel status Table 27 LEDs for Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIMs Label Color State Description ONLINE Green On steadily PIM is online and operational Unlit Off PIM is not online STATUS Green On steadily Port is online with no alarms or failures and he physical layer is active Red Online Port is active with a ocal alarm The router has detected a failure and the physical layer is inactive Yellow Online Port is online with alarms for remote failures Unlit Offline Port is disabled
26. st llningen Ramp Warning A WARNING When installing the router do not use a ramp inclined at more than 10 degrees Waarschuwing Gebruik een oprijplaat niet onder een hoek van meer dan 10 graden Varoitus Ala k yt sellaista kaltevaa pintaa jonka kaltevuus ylitt 10 astetta Attention Ne pas utiliser une rampe dont l inclinaison est sup rieure 10 degr s Warnung Keine Rampen mit einer Neigung von mehr als 10 Grad verwenden A WARNING Avvertenza Non usare una rampa con pendenza superiore a 10 gradi Advarsel Bruk aldri en rampe som heller mer enn 10 grader Aviso Nao utilize uma rampa com uma inclinac o superior a 10 graus jAtenci n No usar una rampa inclinada m s de 10 grados Varning Anvand inte ramp med en lutning pa mer an 10 grader Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings Single mode Physical Interface Modules PIMs are equipped with laser transmitters which are considered a Class 1 Laser Product by the U S Food and Drug Administration and are evaluated as a Class 1 Laser Product per EN 60825 1 requirements Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 271 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Observe the following guidelines and warnings m General Laser Safety Guidelines on page 272 m Class 1 Laser Product Warning on page 272 m Class 1 LED Product Warning on page 273 m Laser Beam Warning on page 275 m Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning on page 274
27. Always secure the rack to the structure of the building If your geographical area is subject to earthquakes bolt the rack to the floor For maximum stability also secure the rack to ceiling brackets For more information see Rack Mounting Requirements and Warnings on page 267 Rack Requirements m 105 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Router Environmental Tolerances Table 53 on page 106 specifies the environmental conditions required for normal Services Router operation In addition the site must be as dust free as possible Dust can clog air intake vents reducing cooling system efficiency Check vents frequently cleaning them as necessary Table 53 Router Environmental Tolerances Description Value Altitude o performance degradation to 10 000 ft 3048 m Relative humidity ormal operation ensured in relative humidity range of 5 to 90 noncondensing Temperature ormal operation ensured in temperature range of 0 C 32 F to 40 C 104 F on operating storage temperature in shipping carton 40 C 40 F to 70 C 158 F Seismic Designed to meet Telcordia Technologies Zone 4 earthquake requirements Maximum thermal output J2320 chassis 1091 BTU hour 520 W J2350 chassis 1195 BTU hour 550 W J4350 chassis 1092 BTU hour 520 W J6350 chassis 1126 BTU hour 330 W Fire Safety Requirements Fire Suppression In the event of a fire emergency involvi
28. CONSENT TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT OR CANNOT AGREE TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN THEN A DO NOT DOWNLOAD INSTALL OR USE THE SOFTWARE AND B YOU MAY CONTACT JUNIPER NETWORKS REGARDING LICENSE TERMS 1 The Parties The parties to this Agreement are Juniper Networks Inc and its subsidiaries collectively Juniper and the person or organization that originally purchased from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller the applicable license s for use of the Software Customer collectively the Parties 2 The Software In this Agreement Software means the program modules and features of the Juniper or Juniper supplied software and updates and releases of such software for which Customer has paid the applicable license or support fees to Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller Embedded Software means Software which Juniper has embedded in the Juniper equipment 5 License Grant Subject to payment of the applicable fees and the limitations and restrictions set forth herein Juniper grants to Customer a non exclusive and non transferable license without right to sublicense to use the Software in executable form only subject to the following use restrictions a Customer shall use the Embedded Software solely as embedded in and for execution on Juniper equipment originally purchased by Customer from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller b Customer shall use the Software on a single hardware chas
29. Default Gateway Loopback Address 10 157 89 183 32 gt ge 0 0 0 0 Address 10 157 90 183 19 Time Time Zone Americe Los_Angeles Di NTP Servers 17217285 777 Add Delete Current System Time 06 05 2007 18 21 Set time now via NTP Settime now manually Management Access The following access methods are considered insecure as any information sent over them will be sent without encryption and could possibly be intercepted during transmission Allow Telnet Access Y Allow JUNOScript over Clear Text Access Y The following access method is considered secure as any information sent over it will be encrypted before transmission Allow SSH Access v In order to enable HTTPS or JUNOScript over SSL you will need to visit the SSL configuration page to configure certificates and associations Before you configure the router gather the information described in Before You Begin on page 156 To configure basic settings with J Web Quick Configuration 1 Ifyou have not already done so connect a management device to the ge 0 0 0 interface on port 0 0 For instructions see Connecting to the J Web Interface on page 157 2 Ifthe Set Up Quick Configuration page is not displayed select Configuration Quick Configuration Set Up 5 Enter information into the Set Up Quick Configuration page as described in Table 61 on page 145 4 Click one of the following buttons m To apply the c
30. Figure 56 Hanging a J2320 Router in a Rack oo 1 ooo 1 KK o coloo ooo 8 lt asa es ee scoobpooee a Figure 57 Hanging a J2350 Router in a Rack D 1 1 oo oo Y ooo 1 oe beooooosoopoooooooo ooo 1 dg oals 1 o0 o 9004136 4 Have a second person install a mounting screw into each of the two aligned holes With a number 2 Phillips screwdriver tighten the screws 5 Verify that the mounting screw on one side of the rack is aligned with the mounting screw on the opposite side and that the router is level 6 Install the second screw in each mounting bracket Installing J4350 and J6350 Routers A WARNING DC powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a restricted access location 120 1 installing J4350 and J6350 Routers Chapter 6 Installing and Connecting a Services Router You can center mount or front mount the J4350 and J6350 Services Routers in a rack In general a center mount rack is preferable to a front mount rack because the more even distribution of weight in the center mount rack provides greater stability Many types of racks are acceptable including four post telco racks enclosed cabinets and open frame racks For more information about the type of rack or cabinet the J series router can be installed into see Rack
31. ONLINE Green Blinking Call setup is successful on either the B1 or B2 channel Green On steadily ISDN Layer 2 is active Amber On steadily m ISDN Layer 1 is active m ISDN Layer 2 is unavailable Red Disconnected m BRI interface port is not connected m ISDN Layer 1 is unavailable Unlit Off BRI interface is offline STATUS Green On steadily PIM is online and operational Red Disconnected PIM is not operational and needs replacement Unlit Off PIM is offline Field Replaceable PIMs mM 63 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide ADSL PIM 64 For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide The ADSL PIM provides a single physical interface to asymmetric digital subscriber line ADSL network media types The ADSL PIM one supporting Annex A Figure 58 on page 64 over plain old telephone service POTS and the other Annex B Figure 59 on page 64 over ISDN includes one physical ADSL port for an ATM over ADSL connection Figure 38 ADSL 2 24 Annex A PIM 9002333 9002332 The ADSL PIM provides the following key features m Onboard network processor m ADSL ADSL2 and ADSL2 protocols on the same PIM m Dying gasp notification m Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 encapsulation For pinouts of cable connectors for ADSL PIMs see ADSL and G SHDSL RJ 1 1 Connector Pinout on page 238 To
32. Table 17 on page 41 describes the primary JUNOS software processes Chapter 2 System Overview Table 17 JUNOS Software Processes Process Name Description Management mgd Manages the Services Router system as follows process m Provides communication between the other processes and an interface to the configuration database m Populates the configuration database with configuration information and retrieves he information when queried by other processes to ensure that the system operates as configured m Interacts with the other processes when commands are issued through one of he user interfaces on the router Chassis chassisd Controls a Services Router chassis and its components as follows rocess e F P m Detects hardware on the system that is used to configure network interfaces m Monitors the physical status of hardware components and field replaceable units FRUS detecting when environment sensors such as temperature sensors are riggered m Relays signals and interrupts for example when devices are taken offline so hat the system can close sessions and shut down gracefully Routing rpd Defines how routing protocols such as RIP OSPF and BGP operate on the router protocol including selecting routes and maintaining fowarding tables process Interface dcd Supplies the programs that configure and monitor network interfaces by defining process also physical characteristics such as link encapsulatio
33. Troubleshooting Hardware Components 209 Chassis AlarmConditiOFls ooi to etr ep MR EHE ER b Mer ERU QUE 209 Troubleshooting Power Management 210 Contacting the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center 212 Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware 213 Locating Component Serial Numbers sssssssss nan n nc nnnnnnns 215 J2320 and J2350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels 214 J4350 and J6550 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels 215 PIM Serna Number tabel vs ata tt ege Pre duse eri ineo aes 216 Power Supply Serial Number Labele 216 Contacting Customer Support eee eect een 216 Information You Might Need to Supply ona 216 REUL Proce que ta te e hs SEE m 216 Packing a Router or Component for Shipment sss 217 Tools and Parts Required et Et entire de e pete 217 Packing the Services Router for Shipment sssssssse 218 Packing Components for Sbpment ee 218 Part 4 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Table of Contents J series Requirements and Specifications Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts 223 Serial PIM Cable Specifications ssssssssssssss e 223 Baas DTE Cable Pintar 224 Rs 252 DCE Cable PInQUE it NEE ere EN 225 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE Cable Pinout se e 225 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinout sss 227 EIA 530A DTE Cable PINOUT rencanan aie e tea ed 228 EIA 530A DCE Cabl PiriQUU s oc i eret
34. and with national leg lementing these directives Low Voltage Directive 73 23 E EC EMC Directive 89 336 EEC gt following harmonizod standards have been applied EN 60950 1 2001 A11 EN 60825 1 1994 41 A2 EN 300 386 V 1 3 1 2001 EN 55024 1998 EN 5022 1998 A1 A2 N 61000 4 2 EN 61000 4 3 EN 61000 4 4 EN 61000 4 5 EN 61000 4 6 EN 61000 4 11 0 09 2006 Japan OME num ERE BEAR VCCI oz WES TIARA CT CORE keck i zt RAMEE LCWETA OHBBSIVARCT LEY a Y EN Uc ISL VSHABSe EMIT LILBHSVETF RRS ABI gt TELOR REELT The preceding translates as follows This is a Class B product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference by Information Technology Equipment VCCI If this product is used near a radio or television receiver in a domestic environment it may cause radio interference Install and use the equipment according to the instruction manual 286 Mm Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements United States Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information The Services Router has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the ins
35. racks enclosed cabinets and open frame racks For more information about the type of rack or cabinet the J series router can be installed into see Rack Requirements on page 104 WARNING If you are installing multiple routers in one rack install the lowest one first and proceed upward in the rack Install heavier routers in the lower part of the rack The router must be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack WARNING The J2320 or J2350 chassis weighs between 14 8 lb 6 7 kg and 18 2 Ib 8 3 kg Read and follow the lifting guidelines in Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 266 To install the J2320 or J2350 router into a rack 1 Ifnecessary reposition the mounting brackets You can position the brackets in either the center or the front Positioning the brackets in the center offers greater stability 12320 and J2350 Services Routers come with mounting brackets installed on them see Figure 55 on page 119 Figure 55 Mounting Brackets on J2320 and J2350 Routers Mounting brackets 9004143 2 Have one person grasp the sides of the router lift the router and position it in the rack Installing J2320 and J2350 Routers m 119 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 3 Align the top hole in each mounting bracket with a hole in each rack rail as shown in Figure 56 on page 120 and Figure 57 on page 120 making sure the chassis is level
36. services The cryptographic algorithms supported include Advanced Encryption Standard AES Data Encryption Standard DES triple DES GDES Hashed Message Authentication Code Message Digest 5 HMAC MD5 and HMAC Secure Hash Algorithm 1 SHA 1 The Crypto Module is an optional feature of J2320 and J2350 Services Routers To determine whether there is a Crypto Accelerator Module installed on your router issue the show chassis hardware command m Compact flash Provides primary storage for software images configuration files and microcode J series routers have a primary or internal compact flash located on the system board For information about replacing the internal compact flash see Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 178 J2320 and J2350 Services Routers also provide a slot in the rear of the chassis into which you can insert an additional external compact flash For information about external compact flashes see J2320 and J2350 External Compact Flashes on page 24 J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview J2320 and J2350 Boot Devices J2320 and J2350 Services Routers can boot from three devices m Internal compact flash m External compact flash also known as the removable compact flash m USB storage device Normally a J2320 or J2350 Services Router boots from the internal compact flash If the internal compact flash fails the router at
37. 0 and later Slots 1 through 6 at 2 0 0 Port 0 G SHDSL PIM JUNOS 8 0 and later Slots 1 through 6 at 1 0 0 Ports 0 and 1 1 Port 6 Port 8 Port and 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs are supported on J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Routers Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs are available in four versions The 1 port and 6 port SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIM shown in Figure 22 on page 49 and Figure 23 on page 50 have small form factor pluggable SFP transceivers to allow you to use different connectors The optical SFP transceivers supported by these uPIMs are described in Table 22 on page 52 Figure 22 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIM 9003864 Field Replaceable PIMs m 49 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 50 m Figure 23 6 Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIM Sn LS 9002381 The 8 port and 16 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs shown in Figure 24 on page 50 and Figure 25 on page 50 have RJ 45 connectors Figure 24 8 Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIM 9002383 Features Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs provide the following key features m The multiport uPIMs can be used as switches in the access layer for connections to workstations and desktops For more information see the series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide m Link speed for 8 port and 16 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs is configurable to 10 100 or 1000 Mbps and t
38. 190 iritial A eene ee Rep eere 117 licenses CLI inks 5o e e ees 165 licenses Web iet sesh el eese 164 PIM blei bee et bates 175 PIM colt ea e eo eed 174 Prepatation sil b Ae Helper 105 EE DUGER antec root pee EN Co ee 117 restricted access J23 50i eat 119 restricted access J4350 and JOS SO venti 25 37 38 120 safety guidelines and wamings 266 site checkliste irse teg eye Sleigh USB storage device Integrated Services Digital Network See ISDN interface software process 40 interfaces ES 4 J2320 types supported terres 46 BESSE 5 12350 types SUDported o ier mte on rs 46 JASSO TEE 6 14350 types S pported coe emtnges 47 16550 ONE Werner He d e de dea 7 16350 types supported ceti 47 Internet Explorer modifying for worldwide version of JUNGS SOft Ware e eelef ee ree Rd 85 ISDN BRI ports BRI SI Tec edite p HER pte rU tee Rd tei 62 BRISU S c eeneg 62 for TIM521 See TIM521 LED States turistico ii lada a 63 CASA teer rt stet treten te 115 RJ 45 connector PINQUES ieie 239 ISDN EREPIM cue Cette e ea ISDN provisioning See also ISDN BRI ports J Elle license oder E 162 J series Avaya VoIP modules 66 establishing secure Web accesg 155 establishing software connectivity 151 298 m Index feature star sace co sete e P e dete 7 hardwdadLbet ou o C EENE EOAR IASA e I Es 15 hardware replacement nica 171 hardware return 213 EI Uh Web acces
39. 48 V RTN a RTN moeu ent o para moer Anote que o fio terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por ltimo Anote que o fio terra deve sempre ser conectado primeiramente e desconectado por ltimo Varning Korrekt kopplingssekvens ar jord till jord RTN till RTN 48 V till 48 V Korrekt kopplas kopplingssekvens ar 48 V till 48 V RTN till RTN jord till jord DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning WARNING When stranded wiring is required use approved wiring terminations such as closed loop or spade type with upturned lugs These terminations should be the appropriate size for the wires and should clamp both the insulation and conductor WARNING Waarschuwing Wanneer geslagen bedrading vereist is dient u bedrading te gebruiken die voorzien is van goedgekeurde aansluitingspunten zoals het gesloten lus type of het grijperschop type waarbij de aansluitpunten omhoog wijzen Deze aansluitpunten dienen de juiste maat voor de draden te hebben en dienen zowel de isolatie als de geleider vast te klemmen WARNING Varoitus Jos s ikeellinen johdin on tarpeen k yt hyv ksytty johdinliit nt esimerkiksi suljettua silmukkaa tai kourumaista liit nt jossa on yl sp in k nnetyt kiinnityskorvat T llaisten liit nt jen tulee olla kooltaan johtimiin sopivia ja niiden tulee puristaa yhteen sek eristeen ett johdinosan WARNING Attention Quand des fils torsad s so
40. 75 on page 227 DCE Serial PIM Cable Spec m 223 ifications J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 71 2 Port Serial PIM Cables and Connectors continued End to End Name Connector Connector Hardware Conductors Pinouts EIA 530A DTE DB 25 male 4 40 threaded 23 Table 76 on page 228 jackscrews EIA 530A DCE DB 25 female 4 40 threaded jacknuts 22 Table 77 on page 229 V 35 DTE M 34 male Standard Normally 18 Table 78 on page 230 included with M 34 connector shell V 35 DCE M 34 female Standard Normally 18 Table 79 on page 231 included with M 34 connector shell X 21 DTE DB 15 male M3 threaded jackscrews 13 Table 80 on page 231 X 21 DCE DB 15 female M3 threaded jacknuts 13 Table 81 on page 232 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinout Table 72 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Frame Ground 60 2 Transmit Data 1 3 Receive Data 48 4 Request to Send 57 5 Clear to Send 9 6 Data Set Ready 57 7 Signal Ground 15 8 Data Carrier Detect 56 15 Transmit Clock 5 17 Receive Clock 41 18 Local Loopback 55 20 Data Terminal Ready 52 24 Terminal Clock 22 to 21 224 Serial PIM Cable Specifications Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 72 RS 232 DTE Cable Pinout continued
41. ALM Red On steadily Alarm A TIM508 failure requires monitoring or maintenance ACT Yellow Blinking Active A device connected to the TIM508 is in use This situation can include a telephone that is off the hook For more information about the TIM508 see the Avaya manual Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager TIM510 E1 T1 Telephony Interface Module The TIM510 E1 T1 Telephony Interface Module Figure 45 on page 74 also known as the TIM510 E1 T1 media module terminates an El or T1 trunk The TIM510 T1 E1 media module has a built in channel service unit CSU so an external CSU is not necessary The CSU is used for a T1 circuit only Up to two TIM510s can be installed in any of the slots on the Services Router Figure 43 TIM510 E1 T1 Telephony Interface Module 9003856 The TIM510 provides the following key features m 1 El orl trunk port with up to 50 channels on an El port and 24 channels on a TI port m DSl1 level support for a variety of El and T1 trunk types mw Trunk signaling to support U S and international central office CO or tie trunks m Echo cancellation in either direction incoming or outgoing For pinouts of cable connectors for the TIM510 see TIM510 RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 241 74 W Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview To install or remove an Avaya VoIP module see Replacing a PIM on page 172 TIM510 LEDs indicate link status
42. Autonegotiation through medium dependent interface MDI and MDI crossover MDI X support m Link speeds for the Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM are configurable to 10 100 or 1000 Mbps and transmission mode is configurable to half or full duplex The SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM cannot be manually configured it is set at 1000 Mbps and full duplex m The SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM uses SFPs to allow different connectors to be used on the ePIM ports The ePIM supports 1000Base SX 1000Base LX and 1000Base T copper SFPs It does not support 1000Base LH SFPs 1000Base SX and 1000Base LX SFP transceivers have the following characteristics m Duplex LC PC connector Rx and Tx m Optical interface support See Table 24 on page 54 m Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM and 1000Base T SFP transceivers have the following characteristics m Connector Four pair category 5 unshielded twisted pair cable through an RJ 45 connector m Pinout MDI crossover m Maximum distance 100 m 528 ft For pinouts of cable connectors for Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs see Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 254 Limitations The Gigabit Ethernet ePIM has the following limitations m Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs do not support SNMP m Configure Gigabit Ethernet ePIM interfaces up to a maximum MTU size of 9018 bytes Installation You can install Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs in any high speed slot as follows m j4550 Install up to two Gigabit Etherne
43. Avail Capacity Mounted on dev ad0s1a 218254 175546 40526 81 The boot device is mounted on The internal compact flash is located at adO The external compact flash is located at ad2 The USB storage device is located at daO This example shows that the router booted from the internal compact flash If the show system storage output indicates that the router booted from the external compact flash you need to power off the router before replacing the compact flash 2 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface 5 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 4 Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off before you remove the compact flash Skip this step if the router did not boot from the external compact flash see Step 1 5 Gently grasp the USB storage device and slide it out of the USB port 6 Place the USB storage device on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag Installing the USB Storage Device To install the USB storage device es NOTE For a list of supported USB storage devices see the J series Services Router Release Notes at http www juniper net 1 Attach an
44. Conn TIM521 Conn TGM550 Console Port Pinouts ector Pinout ector Pinout ector Pinout ector Pinout on page 241 Pinout on page 241 on page 242 on page 242 on page 244 on page 245 The console port on a TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module has an RJ 45 connector Table 93 on page 240 provides TGM550 RJ 45 console connector pinout information An RJ 45 cable is supplied with the TGM550 ISDN RJ 45 Connector Pinout M 239 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide oe NOTE Two different RJ 45 cables and RJ 45 to DB 9 adapters are provided Do not use the RJ 45 cable and adapter for the Services Router console port to connect to the TGM550 console port To connect the console port to an external management device you need an RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter which is also supplied with the TGM550 Table 93 TGM550 RJ 45 Console Connector Pinouts TGM550 RJ 45 Pin Signal Terminal DB 9 Pins 1 For future use NC 2 TXD TGM550 input 5 3 RXD TGM550 output 2 4 CD 4 5 GND 5 6 DTR 1 7 RTS 8 8 CTS 7 TGM550 RJ 11 Connector Pinout for Analog Ports The two analog telephone ports and two analog trunk ports on the TGM550 use an RJ 11 cable Table 94 on page 240 describes the TGM550 RJ 11 connector pinout Table 94 TGM550 RJ 11 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 No connection 2 No connection 3 Ring 4 Tip 5 No connectio
45. EMI electrostatic bag for storing components 251 electrostatic discharge preventing 251 elements EWeD tr rt vtta sete ERI 84 EMC electromagnetic compatibility compliance With reguitrements 285 preventing problems with 108 Standards sc Na T E 282 EMI electromagnetic interference compliance with reguitrementg 283 Standards acierta deefe 282 Elle 108 encrypted access through HTTPS through SSEL e cirein through SSL is ees echter environment CLI el ele 97 SOUND oa ode ii da 97 environmental requirements for operation 106 ePIMs 4 Pott Fast ELSE tipa 61 Copper Gigabit Ethernet ose ttu 52 SEP Gigabit Ethernet ope ie eei 52 slot locationis sick eegen Sege pee eg qd 55 EPROM sengsoro tee nre o von ated Regis 18 51 ESD electrostatic discharge preventing 251 ESD wrist strap verifying resistance for aalen 251 wearing during installation ees 27 Ethernet cable chassis console DB 9 connector pinouts 255 chassis console RJ 45 connector pinouts 254 connecting the Services Router to a management CEVICE E 157 159 connecting the Services Router to a modem 142 replace 172 TGM550 console DB 9 connector pinouts TGM550 console RJ 45 connector pinouts Ethernet ports See Fast Ethernet ports See Gigabit Ethernet ports BREET ee 72 European Union compliance st tement 285 external compact flash S
46. Entry 3 Inthe Authorized key box type the RSA password for example ssh rsa AAAAB3Nza D9Y2gXF9ac root routera lab router net 4 Click OK 5 Click OK a second time to return to the System level in the configuration editor hierarchy Set the root password For example set root authentication ssh rsa ssh rsa AAAAB3Nza D9Y2gXF9ac root routera lab router net Define the time zone the router is located in In the Time zone list select the time zone for your router for example America Los_Angeles Set the time zone For example set time zone America Los_Angeles 148 m Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity Table 63 Configuring Basic Settings continued Task J Web Configuration Editor CLI Configuration Editor Define the NTP server that NTP requests can be sent to 1 In the Nested configuration section next to Ntp click Configure or Edit Set the address of the NTP server For example 2 Next to Server click Add New Entry set ntp server 10 148 2 21 3 Inthe Address box type the NTP server s IP address for example 10 148 2 21 4 Click OK 5 Click OK a second time to return to the System level in the configuration editor hierarchy Define the DNS server that 1 Next to Name server click Add New Entry Set the address of the DNS server receives DNS requests For example 3 2 Inthe Addre
47. Environment You can configure the CLI environment for your current login session Your settings are not retained when you exit the CLI To display the current CLI settings enter the show cli command user host gt show cli CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI complete on space set to on idle timeout disabled restart on upgrade set to on screen length set to 49 screen width set to 132 terminal is vt100 is operating in enhanced mode working directory is cf var home remote To change the CLI environment use the set cli operational mode command Using the Command Line Interface m 97 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide user host gt set cli Possible completions complete on space Set whether typing space completes current word maximum idle time before login session ends directory Set working directory idle timeout Set prompt Set CLI command prompt string restart on upgrade Set screen length screen width Set Set whether CLI prompts to restart after software upgrade number of lines on screen number of characters on a line terminal Set terminal type Table 52 on page 98 shows how you can change the CLI environment features Table 52 Configuring the CLI Environment Environment CLI Command Default Setting Options Feature Command set cli on Pressing Tab or Spacebar m Setoffto allow only Tab for completion complete on space completes a comma
48. J6350 Crypto Accelerator Module Remove Install Release clips 9003816 9 Slide the Crypto Module out of its socket 10 Remove the standoff washer that was under the Crypto Module 11 Place the Crypto Module on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers m 203 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Installing a J4350 or j6350 Crypto Accelerator Module 204 m To install a Crypto Accelerator Module M al A kee 10 Take the following steps if you have not already done so a Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 b Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off c Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle d Remove the screws from the sides and the top of the chassis and slide the cover off the chassis Locate the Crypto Module socket on the system board see Figure 98 on page 202 The socket is tipped up at an angle when empty If a screw and standoff washer are already in place see Figure 99 on page 203 remove them Remove the Crypto Module from its electrosta
49. J6550 router 16 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs are two slots high Because the connector on the PIM is on the lower half the PIM occupies the slot that it is plugged into and the slot above it Thus you cannot install a 16 port uPIM in the top slots of a router For example on a 4550 router you cannot install a 16 port uPIM in slots 1 and 4 If you install the PIM in slot 2 it occupies both slots 2 and 1 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 172 Interface LEDs For 8 port and 16 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs the activity LED is located on the left side of each port and the link LED is located on the right side of each port For the 6 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIM the LEDs are located to the right of each port with the link LED above the activity LED LEDs on the 1 port uPIM are clearly labeled Table 21 on page 51 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 21 Gigabit Ethernet Port LEDs Function Color State Description Link Green On steadily Port is online Unlit Off Port is offline Activity Green Blinking Port is transmitting or receiving traffic TX RX Unlit Off Port might be online but it is not receiving traffic Field Replaceable PIMs WM 51 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide Optical Interface Support Table 22 on page 52 describes th
50. Juniper will make such source code portions including Juniper modifications as appropriate available upon request for a period of up to three years from the date of distribution Such request can be made in writing to Juniper Networks Inc 1194 N Mathilda Ave Sunnyvale CA 94089 ATTN General Counsel You may obtain a copy of the GPL at http www gnu org licenses gpl html and a copy of the LGPL at http www gnu org licenses Igpl html 15 Miscellaneous This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California without reference to its conflicts of laws principles The provisions of the U N Convention for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this Agreement For any disputes arising under this Agreement the Parties hereby consent to the personal and exclusive jurisdiction of and venue in the state and federal courts within Santa Clara County California This Agreement constitutes the entire and sole agreement between Juniper and the Customer with respect to the Software and supersedes all prior and contemporaneous agreements relating to the Software whether oral or written including any inconsistent terms contained in a purchase order except that the terms of a separate written agreement executed by an authorized Juniper representative and Customer shall govern to the extent such terms are inconsistent or conflict with terms contained herein No modification to this Agreement nor any waiver of any rights
51. Loop start or ground start central office trunk with a loop current of 18 milliamperes mA to 120 mA Analog tip ring devices such as single line telephones Two wire analog outgoing centralized automatic message accounting with or without LED message waiting indication CAMA emergency E911 trunk for connectivity to the PSTN Multifrequency MF signaling is supported for CAMA ports The TIM514 also provides the following features m Three ringer loads the ringer equivalency number for up to 2 000 ft 610 m for all eight ports m Up to four simultaneously ringing ports m Type 1 caller ID and Type 2 caller ID m Ring voltage generation for a variety of international frequencies and cadences For pinouts of cable connectors for the TIM514 see TIM514 Connector Pinout on page 242 To install or remove an Avaya VoIP module see Replacing a PIM on page 172 TIM514 LEDs indicate link status and activity Table 42 on page 76 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 42 LEDs for TIM514 Label Color State Description ALM Red On steadily Alarm A TIM514 failure requires monitoring or maintenance ACT Yellow Blinking Active A device connected to the TIM514 is in use This situation can include a telephone that is off the hook For more information about the TIM514 see the Avaya manual Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager TIM516 Analog Telephony Interface Module The
52. Mode 1 P 2 Transmit Data A 60 R 59 Receive Data A 2 S 1 Transmit Data B 59 T 60 Receive Data B 5 U 6 Terminal Timing A 52 V 51 Receive Timing A 6 W 5 Terminal Timing B 51 X 52 Receive Timing B 56 M 55 Transmit Timing A 55 AA 56 Transmit Timing B 22 to 21 26 to 25 E X 21 DTE Cable Pinout Table 80 X 21 DTE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pin DB 15 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground Serial PIM Cable Specifications m 231 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 80 X 21 DTE Cable Pinout continued LFH 60 Pin DB 15 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 60 2 59 Transmit Data A 48 3 47 Control A 1 4 2 Receive A 37 5 38 Indicate A 5 6 6 Signal Element Timing A 57 8 Signal Ground 59 9 60 Transmit Data B 47 10 48 Control B 2 11 1 Receive B 38 12 37 Indicate B 6 15 5 Signal Element Timing B 30 to 29 18 to 17 E X 21 DCE Cable Pinout Table 81 X 21 DCE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pin DB 15 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground 1 2 2 Transmit Data A 37 3 38 Control A 60 4 59 Receive A 48 5 47 Indicate A 52 6 51 Signal Element Timing A 57 8 Signal Ground 2 9 1 Transmit Data B 38 10 37 Control B 59 11 60 Receive B 232 Mm Serial PIM Cable Specifications Chapter 13 Network Cabl
53. NOTE Use only DRAM modules purchased through Juniper Networks specifically for your model Figure 88 J2320 and J2350 DRAM Location Front 9004111 DRAM 2 pairs 188 1H Replacing DRAM Modules Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Figure 89 J4350 and J6350 DRAM Location Slot 1 Slot2 Slot3 Slot 4 L p Es D a Uf oo an swosow buno Of WWW o 0 B zn O El zu p IIl 9 X a a 3290 SS og oo a CH 0 o B i Q 5 BBC O pm o o a 2 Ls SA z gt z l CEPA 3 i e DRAM 2 pairs 3 IS Rear To modify the DRAM configuration use the following procedures Removing a DRAM Module on page 189 Installing a DRAM Module on page 190 Removing a DRAM Module To remove a DRAM module 1 2 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is
54. PIM JUNOS 8 4 and later Ports 0 1 2 and 5 br 1 0 2 ADSL PIM JUNOS 8 4 and later Port O at 2 0 0 G SHDSL PIM JUNOS 8 4 and later Ports 0 and 1 at 1 0 0 J4350 and J6350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary Table 20 on page 48 provides software release information slot and port numbers and sample interface names for the field replaceable PIMs supported on J4350 and J6350 Services Routers A CAUTION Do not install a combination of PIMs in a single chassis that exceeds the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis If J series power management is enabled PIMs that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis is powered on To verify that the combination of PIMs to be installed in a chassis does not exceed the power and heat capacities for the J4350 or J6350 router see Planning for Power Management on page 112 Field Replaceable PIMs M 47 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 20 J4350 and J6350 Field Replaceable PIM and Module Summary Supported Software Releases Sample Interface Name PIM for This PIM Slot and Port Numbering type pim 0 port 1 Port SFP Gigabit JUNOS 8 4 and later Slots 1 through 6 ge 2 0 0 Ethernet uPIM Port 0 6 Port SFP Gigabit JUNOS 8 3 and later Slots 1 through 6 ge 2 0 5 Ethernet uPIM Ports 0 through 5 8 Port Gigabit Ethernet JUNOS 8 3 and later Slots 1 through 6 ge 2 0
55. Place the new filter in the opening Replace the filter cover by pressing it until it clicks into place Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers m 207 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 208 1H Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Hardware Components This chapter contains the following topics m Chassis Alarm Conditions on page 209 m Troubleshooting Power Management on page 210 m Contacting the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center on page 212 Chassis Alarm Conditions Table 70 Chassis Alarm You can monitor alarms to troubleshoot hardware problems on a Services Router Alarms alert you to conditions on the router chassis or in the system software that might prevent the router from operating normally You can monitor active alarms from the J Web interface or the CLI Services Router alarms warn you about conditions that can prevent the router from operating normally Chassis and system alarm conditions are preset When the Routing Engine detects an alarm condition it lights the ALARM LED on the front panel When the condition is corrected the light turns off To view a more detailed description of the alarm cause issue the show chassis alarms CLI command user host gt show chassis alarms Table 70 on page 209 describes alarms that can occur for a chassis component such as the Routing Engine or a Physical Interface Module PIM
56. Repeat keyboard sequences Specify the number of times to execute a keyboard sequence Replace number with a number from 1 through 9 and replace sequence with a keyboard sequence in this table Esc number sequence Command Completion You do not always have to remember or type the full command or option name for the CLI to recognize it To display all possible command or option completions type the partial command followed immediately by a question mark Using the Command Line Interface m 95 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 96 m To complete a command or option that you have partially typed press Tab or Spacebar If the partially typed letters uniquely identify a command the complete command name appears Otherwise a message indicates that your entry is ambiguous or invalid Possible command completions are displayed if your entry is ambiguous You can also use command completion on filenames and usernames To display all possible values type one or more characters followed immediately by a question mark To complete these partial entries press Tab only Pressing Spacebar does not work Online Help The CLI provides context sensitive help at every level of the command hierarchy The help information tells you which commands are available at the current level in the hierarchy and provides a brief description of each To get help while in the CLI type a question mark in one of t
57. Router Related Topics For more information about the format of a configuration file see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations m 151 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 152 Mm Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations Chapter 8 Configuring Secure Web Access You can manage a Services Router remotely through the J Web interface To communicate with the router the J Web interface uses Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP HTTP allows easy Web access but no encryption The data that is transmitted between the Web browser and the router by means of HTTP is vulnerable to interception and attack To enable secure Web access a router supports Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Sockets Layer HTTPS You can enable HTTP or HTTPS access on specific interfaces and ports as needed You can use J Web Quick Configuration the J Web configuration editor or the CLI configuration editor to configure secure Web access This chapter contains the following topics For more information about the J Web interface see the J Web Interface User Guide m Secure Web Access Terms on page 153 m Secure Web Access Overview on page 154 m Before You Begin on page 154 m Configuring Secure Web Access on page 155 m Configuring Secure Web Access with a Configuration Editor on page 158 m Verifying Secure Web Access on page 159 Secure Web
58. Sags m ETSI ETSI EN 300386 2 Telecommunication Network Equipment Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements Lithium Battery Batteries in this product are not based on mercury lead or cadmium substances The batteries used in this product are in compliance with EU Directives 91 157 EEC 93 86 EEC and 98 101 EEC The product documentation includes instructional information about the proper method of reclamation and recycling Compliance Statements for NEBS This product complies with the following Network Equipment Building System NEBS standards m The equipment is suitable for installation as part of the Common Bonding Network CBN m The equipment is suitable for installation in locations where the National Electrical Code NEC applies m The battery return connection is to be treated as a Common DC return DC C as defined in GR 1089 CORE m The minimum steady state operating voltage is 52 V Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements m Canada on page 284 m European Community on page 285 m Japan on page 286 m United States on page 287 Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements m 283 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Canada 284 m This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES 005 Cet appareil num rique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB 005 du Canada The Industry Canada la
59. Services Router Administration Guide This chapter contains the following topics For more information about basic connectivity see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide m Basic Connectivity Terms on page 131 m Basic Connectivity Overview on page 132 m Before You Begin on page 136 m Connecting to a Services Router on page 157 m Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration on page 143 m Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor on page 147 m Verifying Basic Connectivity on page 150 Basic Connectivity Terms Before configuring basic connectivity become familiar with the terms defined in Table 60 on page 151 Table 60 Basic Connectivity Terms Term Definition domain name Name that identifies the network or subnetwork of a router Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP Protocol for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network Basic Connectivity Terms mM 131 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 60 Basic Connectivity Terms continued Term Definition gateway Packets destined for IP addresses not identified in the routing table are sent to the default gateway hostname Unique name that identifies a router on the network loopback address IP address of a Services Router on logical interface 100 0 that is always active and available to external hosts and as the source address for outgoing packets Network Time Pr
60. Sie den Schaltergriff des Unterbrechers mit Klebeband in der AUS Stellung fest Avvertenza Prima di svolgere una qualsiasi delle procedure seguenti verificare che il circuito CC non sia alimentato Per verificare che tutta l alimentazione sia scollegata OFF individuare l interruttore automatico sul quadro strumenti che alimenta il circuito CC mettere l interruttore in posizione OFF e fissarlo con nastro adesivo in tale posizione WARNING Advarsel For noen av disse prosedyrene utf res kontroller at str mmen er frakoblet likestr mkretsen S rg for at all str m er sl tt AV Dette gj res ved lokalisere str mbryteren p brytertavlen som betjener likestr mkretsen sl str mbryteren AV og teipe bryterhandtaket p str mbryteren i AV stilling Aviso Antes de executar um dos seguintes procedimentos certifique se que desligou a fonte de alimenta o de energia do circuito de corrente continua Para se assegurar que toda a corrente foi DESLIGADA localize o disjuntor no painel que serve o circuito de corrente continua e coloque o na posi o OFF Desligado segurando nessa posi o a manivela do interruptor do disjuntor com fita isoladora jAtenci n Antes de proceder con los siguientes pasos comprobar que la alimentaci n del circuito de corriente continua CC est cortada OFF Para asegurarse de que toda la alimentaci n est cortada OFF localizar el interruptor autom tico en el panel que alimenta al circuito de c
61. Software Feature Licenses Each feature license is tied to exactly one software feature and that license is valid for exactly one Services Router Table 67 on page 162 lists the Services Router software features that require licenses Table 67 J series Services Router Software Feature Licenses Licensed Software Feature License Name Traffic Analysis J Flow traffic analysis all configuration statements within the edit forwarding options sampling and edit forwarding options accounting hierarchies J series Services Router Software License for J Flow Traffic Analysis BGP Route Reflectors Advanced Border Gateway Protocol BGP features that enable route reflectors all configuration statements within the edit protocols bgp cluster hierarchy BGP clusters allow routers to act as route reflectors by enabling the readvertising of BGP routes to internal peers J series Services Router Software License for Advanced Border Router Protocol Support License Key Components A license key consists of two parts m License ID Alphanumeric string that uniquely identifies the license key When a license is generated it is given a license ID m License data Block of binary data that defines and stores all license key objects For example in the following typical license key the string 1129183743 is the license ID and the trailing block of data is the license data 1129183743 4ky27y acasck 82fsj6 jzsn
62. TIM516 Analog Telephony Interface Module Figure 45 on page 77 also known as the TIM516 analog media module has 16 analog telephone lines 76 W Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Figure 45 TIM516 Analog Telephony Interface Module You can configure TIM516 lines as described in Table 43 on page 77 Table 43 TIM516 Possible Port Configurations Possible Analog Telephone LINE Line Configurations Analog tip ring devices such as single line telephones with or without LED message waiting indication The TIM516 also provides the following features m Three ringer loads the ringer equivalency number for up to 2 000 ft 610 m for all 16 lines Up to 16 simultaneously ringing lines m Type 1 caller ID and Type 2 caller ID for line lines m Ring voltage generation for a variety of international frequencies and cadences For pinouts of cable connectors for the TIM516 see TIM516 Connector Pinout on page 242 To install or remove an Avaya VoIP module see Replacing a PIM on page 172 TIM516 LEDs indicate link status and activity Table 44 on page 77 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 44 LEDs for TIM516 Label Color State Description ALM Red On steadily Alarm A TIM516 failure requires monitoring or maintenance ACT Yellow Blinking Active A device connected to the TIM516 is in use This situation can include a telephone that is off the hook Avaya VoIP Modules
63. and activity Table 40 on page 75 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 40 LEDs for TIM510 Label Color State Description ALM Red On steadily Alarm A TIM510 failure requires monitoring or maintenance ACT Green On steadily Active The TIM510 is online with network traffic TST Yellow On steadily Test A test is being performed on the TIM510 through the Media Gateway Controller MGC SIG Green On steadily Signal The link to the central office CO is active For more information about the TIM510 see the Avaya manual Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module The TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module Figure 44 on page 75 also known as the TIM514 analog media module has four analog telephone ports and four analog trunk ports Figure 44 TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module 9003857 Li NOTE For analog direct inward dialing DID trunks you must use the four analog telephone LINE ports You cannot use the four analog trunk TRUNK ports for analog DID trunks You can configure TIM514 ports as described in Table 41 on page 76 Avaya VoIP Modules M 75 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 41 TIM514 Possible Port Configurations Possible Analog Telephone LINE Port Possible Analog Trunk TRUNK Port Configurations Configurations Wink start or immediate start DID trunk
64. are acceptable including front mount racks four post telco racks and center mount racks The following sections describe rack requirements m Rack Size and Strength for J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 104 m Rack Size and Strength for J4350 and J6550 Routers on page 105 m Connection to Building Structure on page 105 Rack Size and Strength for J2320 and J2350 Routers 104 m The J2320 and j2550 Services Routers are designed for installation in a rack that complies with either of the following standards m A 19 in rack as defined in Cabinets Racks Panels and Associated Equipment document number EIA 510 D published by the Electronics Industry Association http www eia org m A600 mm rack as defined in the four part Equipment Engineering EE European telecommunications standard for equipment practice document numbers ETS 500 119 1 through 119 4 published by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute http www etsi org The horizontal spacing between the rails in a rack that complies with this standard is usually wider than the router s mounting ears which measure 19 in 48 2 cm from outer edge to outer edge Use approved wing devices to narrow the opening between the rails as required The rack rails must be spaced widely enough to accommodate the router chassis s external dimensions m J2320 chassis 1 75 in 4 45 cm high 17 51 in 44 48 cm wide and 15 1 in 58 55 cm deep m J2350 chassis 2
65. as follows Bits per second 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None 9 Power on the router by pressing the power button on the front panel Verify that the POWER LED on the front panel turns green The terminal emulation screen on your management device displays the boot sequence When the router has finished booting a login prompt appears 10 Log in as the user root No password is required at initial connection but you must assign a root password before committing any configuration settings Figure 69 Connecting to the Console Port on J2320 and J2350 Routers Serial port Connecting to a Services Router Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity Figure 70 Connecting to the Console Port on J4350 and J6350 Routers Serial port RJ 45 rollover cable Connecting to the CLI Remotely You can connect to the CLI from a remote location through two dial up modems a modem that is connected to the console port on the Services Router and a second modem connected to a remote management device The modem connection allows you to remotely perform the same console operations you can perform locally This section contains the following topics m Configuring the Modem at the Router End on page 141 m Connecting the Modem to the Console Port on page 142 m Connecting to the CLI at the User End on page 145 Configuring the Modem at the Router End D NOTE
66. cable lug to the 48 VDC terminal Tighten the screw until snug Do not overtighten Apply between 8 lb in 0 9 Nm and 9 Ib in 1 02 Nm of torque to the screw NOTE Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated DC power feed For information about connecting to DC power sources see Connecting Power on page 124 9 Dress the power cables appropriately Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal block Verify that the power cord does not block access to router components or drape where people might trip on it Press and release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Replacing Power System Components m 197 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 94 Installing a DC Power Supply AAN IFIED EE KS E X SEE Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers The Crypto Accelerator Module is a processor card that enhances performance of cryptographic algorithms used in IP security IPSec services The Crypto Module is an optional feature on J2320 and J2350 Services Routers Figure 95 on page 198 shows the location of the Crypto Accelerator Module on J2320 and J2350 routers Figure 95 Crypto Accelerator Module Location on J2320 and J2350 Routers Front
67. can be inserted only in high speed slots slots 3 and 6 on a J4350 Services Router or slots 2 3 5 and 6 on a J6350 Services Router floating static route Route with an administrative distance greater than the administrative distance of the dynamically learned versions of the same route The static route is used only when the dynamic routes are no longer available When a floating static route is configured on an interface with a dialer filter the interface can be used for backup ISDN S T interface Interface between an ISDN network and a network termination device consisting of two twisted pairs one each for transmitting and receiving The S T interface usually resides in the customer premises and operates at 192 Kbps of which ISDN traffic accounts for 144 Kbps ISDN U interface Single twisted pair interface line connecting the customer premises unit in an ISDN network to the central office A U interface runs at 144 Kbps 128 Kbps for two B channels and 16 Kbps for the D channel plain old telephone service POTS Standard telephone service that allows limited speed and bandwidth of 52 Kbps which is also know as public switched telephone network PSTN Primary Rate Interface PRI ISDN service intended for higher bandwidth applications than ISDN BRI ISDN PRI consists of a single D channel for control and signaling plus a number of 64 Kbps B channels either 25 B channels on a T1 line or 50 B channels o
68. configured on an interface has riggered a critical warning Yellow On steadily Minor alarm condition requires monitoring or maintenance m ndicates a noncritical condition on the router that if eft unchecked might cause an interruption in service or degradation in performance m A missing rescue configuration or software license generates a yellow system alarm Unlit Off No alarms For information about alarm conditions and corrective actions see Chassis Alarm Conditions on page 209 For additional information see the J series Services Router Administration Guide HA LED The HA high availability LED is for future use The LED lights when the router starts but otherwise remains unlit 34 W J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview RESET CONFIG Button Use the RESET CONFIG button to return the router to either the rescue configuration or the factory default configuration The button is recessed to prevent it from being pressed accidentally To press this button insert a small probe such as a straightened paper clip into the pinhole on the front panel see Figure 19 on page 32 For example if someone inadvertently commits a configuration that denies management access to a Services Router you can delete the invalid configuration and replace it with a rescue configuration by pressing the RESET CONFIG button You must have previously set the rescue configuration through the J Web in
69. console access over an RJ 45 connector cable es NOTE The RJ 45 console cable and DB 9 adapter supplied with the TGM550 are different from the RJ 45 cable and DB 9 adapter supplied with the Services Router for console connections to the Services Router You cannot use the RJ 45 cable and DB 9 adapter supplied with the Services Router for console connections to the TGM550 Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Table 36 on page 71 lists the maximum number of media servers telephones and so on that are supported by the TGM550 installed on a J4350 or J6350 or J2320 or J2350 Services Router Table 36 TGM550 Maximum Media Gateway Capacities Hardware or Feature TGM550 Maximum Capacity Additional Information TGM550s that can be controlled by an Avaya S8500 or S8700 Media Server 250 This number also applies if a combination of Avaya G700 Media Gateways G250 Media Gateways and G350 Media Gateways are controlled by the same media server TGM550s that can be controlled by an Avaya S8400 Media Server This number also applies if a combination of Avaya G700 Media Gateways G250 Media Gateways and G350 Media Gateways are controlled by the same media server TGM550s that can be controlled by an Avaya S8300 Media Server 49 This capacity is 50 if a combination of Avaya G700 Media Gateways G250 Media Gateways and G550 Media Gateways are controlled by the same media server T
70. dee en e A P E aede n 271 Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings cecce 271 General Laser Safety Guidelines 2 0 0 0 irai erroe ii 272 Glass 1 Laser Product Warning scada Bee 272 Class 1 LED Product Warning osteitis i i e 273 Laser Bear EU EE 273 Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning 0 0 00 274 Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings 275 Battery Handling Warning eere dee NENNEN 276 Jewelry Removal Warning ispeci nran iane ee 277 Lightning Activity Wating iii eue eta dee o eve EE 278 Operating Temperature Warning oo ene 279 Product Disposal Warning sssssssss rr ncnnnn eE 281 ABENCY ADPIOVAlS TEE ettet es 282 Compliance Statements for Environmental Requirements cinco 285 Be Ein BEE 283 Compliance Statements for NEBS ssssssssssssss eee 285 Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements sainessreseiiaririeetiasii 285 Caridd c scc A vet Rata pibe eh IO 284 European COMMUNITY e cores see dcn ERE e ERE tae ehe 285 Eet 286 United SLATES citm oso tete te e bicis aid Seri aeu 287 PCC Part LorStatemMent ss acies cecinere Pea pee eder Ye eg 287 FCG Part 68 Statement uices oe e Rie I EES 287 Part 5 Index lato PEDEM 291 xiv NW Table of Contents About This Guide Objectives Audience This preface provides the following guidelines for using the 2320 2350 J4350 and 46350 Services Router Getting Started Guide m Objectives on page xv m Audience on page
71. disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see the Getting Started Guide for your router Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle Remove the screws from the sides and top of the chassis that secure the cover to the chassis Slide the cover off the chassis For J2320 and J2350 routers see Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 176 To release the DRAM module press the plastic ejectors on both sides of the module see Figure 90 on page 190 Grasp the DRAM module being careful not to touch any electrical components on the module and firmly pull it out of the slot on the system board Place the DRAM module on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag Replacing DRAM Modules M 189 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 90 Installing or Replacing DRAM Modules Remove Chassis rear Installing a DRAM Module 190 m Install Chassis rear 004112 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Routers support 256 MB and 512 MB DRAM modules Use only DRAM modules purchased from Juniper Networks specifically for your model CS NOTE If you are installing a second DRAM module do not install it in a slot adjacent to the first module For example if the first DRAM module is installed
72. dts et urs 94 Command Completiori 221 reete e or e d erae td 95 Onlifie Help nitate eoa biet S 96 Configuring the CLI Environment 97 Installing a Services Router Preparing for Router Installation 103 General Site Guidelines d d e e re E ree ta 105 Rack RequireriertSs xu xe cones shal ER ote et te emi E en dee 104 Rack Size and Strength for J2320 and J2350 Routers s c 104 Rack Size and Strength for J4350 and J6350 Routers s e 105 Connection to Building Structure sssssssssss nan n nr nnccnnns 105 Router Environmental Tolerances irritada 106 Fire salen Requireretits ia at 106 Fire SUPPLESSION espia tte Ae 106 Fire Suppression Equipment ssssssss nn nani nicas 107 Table of Contents W ix J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Chapter 6 Chapter 7 x Table of Contents Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications sssssssssssss 107 Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines steer ege ete 108 Signaling ant e 108 Radio Frequency Interference onrada e ENEE NENNEN 108 Electromagnetic Compatibilltys i eet hee t Ph ted ette 108 Router Power Requirements ano oeri i rE e REAN Eia eme eere 109 AC Power Connection and Power Cord Specifications sssss 109 DC Power Connection and Power Cable Specifications ss 111 Planning for Power Management 112 Network Cable Specifications sssssssssssssssseeen 115 ISDN
73. electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 2 Orient the USB storage device with the USB port on the front panel of the router Replacing USB Storage Devices m 187 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 3 Insert the USB storage device into the USB port If the USB storage device does not easily slide into the port it might not be oriented correctly Turn the USB storage device upside down and try again 4 Toconfigure the USB storage device with the request system snapshot command see the J series Services Router Administration Guide Replacing DRAM Modules The DRAM installed on the Routing Engine provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other Routing Engine processes The design of the Routing Engine allows you to modify the DRAM configuration by adding DRAM modules to the system board or removing DRAM modules from the board The DRAM modules are located on the top of the system board as shown in Figure 88 on page 188 and Figure 89 on page 189 Two pairs of slots are available for installing DRAM modules Installing DRAM modules in slots away from each other provides better performance than installing them in two adjacent slots C
74. entry mode Go on to Verifying J series License Management on page 166 Deleting a License with the CLI To delete a license key from the Services Router with the CLI A 2 Enter operational mode in the CLI Enter the following command for each license specifying the license ID You can delete only one license at a time request system license delete icense id Go on to Verifying J series License Management on page 166 Managing J series Licenses with the CU Mm 165 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Saving License Keys with the CLI To save the licenses installed on the Services Router to a file with the CLI 1 Enter operational mode in the CLI 2 To save the installed license keys to a file or URL enter the following command request system license save filename url For example the following command saves the installed license keys to a file named license config request system license save ftp user host license conf 3 Goon to Verifying J series License Management on page 166 Verifying J series License Management To verify J series license management perform the tasks explained in these sections m Displaying Installed Licenses on page 166 m Displaying License Usage on page 167 m Displaying Installed License Keys on page 167 Displaying Installed Licenses Purpose Verify that the expected licenses are installed and active on the Services Router Acti
75. epe pte 19 partc 15 chassis cover replacing 176 compact flash Jocatton 179 compact flash replachng 179 COOMBES EE 25 electrical specfications euis o e n 109 external compact last iaiia ieaS a 24 EE 25 Iro nt panels eph ed e Be p E SR 19 J2350 HAGA EE 13 26 iristallatiotis sine MM seta ess 119 interfaces supported 46 mounting Dracherts 119 ONEVIEW eiren ed Sel ed I gd or esed 5 physical speclfications eerren 17 PIMS SUDDOEPLed ua satt oa dette Mesi 46 ports SUPPO EA Niran cte odd edere end epa 46 power management eerren a teet o 112 Routing Engine hardware 18 TEM55 EE 69 TIM SO 8 ee ee Eee ERN Fein 75 IMS da der le b Rx a dls edad See 74 TIMST4 Leia da eds 75 TIMES DeL eub ts A S eee ete 76 RI EN 78 SA A EE 79 USB POT as 24 air filter repldeihguas ars Avaya VOIP MOGUIES musicos teet rete BOOT deVIGeSuC O tete cub deest er ep testet boot SEQUENCE eee Chassis EE chassis cover replachng compact flash Jocatton compact flash replacing a cooling systelti iu dio edad dete i ee p ERES electrical specflcations external compact flash arise Seebeck hee tud de ee e o Tes Ete Takes Fone PAE ouo nite tear a e e NARA WATS rss ete dui ates es tent imita iristallatiQns eet dp epe interfaces supported ue eh dept o eque mountine DFaCRets ccce cas NT A Ee physical speclfications eeren PIMS S ppOrted Stee e Maca A Ee donated ports SUPPOFle de wise trote iia emery p
76. ettet RR PR PE REB 40 G G SHDSL PIM deScripLiOTE s ce eem tb ibt P lee 65 PIMONLINE LED cosita 66 G SHDSL ports See SHDSL ports Gateway Module See TGM550 gateway default sspears eoe ed dE 134 ge 0 0 0 connecting through Lwen 157 defining address configuration editor 150 defining address Quick Configuration 146 for autoinstallation management interface Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs ALARMS o tates tens endo cpus e ee 54 descripta iu se de pet aa eet 52 high speed slot Jocations 55 install i das ect tete tae ette iae s 55 LEDS i tts rap Putas vagus pulida 54 limitations noscit et ettet atte t sts 55 link speeds and transmission modes 53 SFP optical interface support 54 Gigabit Ethernet ports DUI La da dido ba a 23 35 COPPER a Gee 52 LEDISTAES EE 23 35 51 54 POLLO oe tee ade 134 RJ 45 connector pinouts ePIM ooo 234 RJ 45 connector pinouts uPIMs ssssss 255 SEP Optical esee o dinge 50 55 Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs SSES dea lee eot aig m tica 52 CESCHP HON Anere ETE 49 installation ES tul ete tr ufu Meca derunt Jirr tations oreet rtt pes o link speeds and transmission modes 2 90 SFP optical interface support 52 glossary basic COIInectivity i sitet rites gedu 151 PIM Set Ant oon be ld cS 45 secure Web ACCESS an ctfi ttt reti T ce ttes 155 graceful SHULGOWN sin meses irt b rn etre ire 129 graphical user interface
77. fans draw air through vents along the left side of the chassis and exhaust it through vents on the right side of the chassis The airflow produced by these fans keeps router components within the acceptable temperature range see Figure 11 on page 26 and Figure 12 on page 26 The speed of the fans is adjusted automatically according to the current temperature On J2350 routers that comply with Network Equipment Building System NEBS criteria an air filter protects the air intake opening at the front of the chassis and must be replaced periodically To verify that the system is a NEBS compliant system run the show chassis hardware command A NEBS compliant system displays the term NEBS in the output For instructions on how to replace air filters see Replacing Air Filters on J2350 Routers on page 205 The Routing Engine monitors the temperature of the router components If the maximum temperature specification as measured at the CPU junction is exceeded and the router cannot be adequately cooled the Routing Engine shuts down the hardware components J2320 and J2350 routers shut down when the CPU temperature reaches 80 C 1769F There is no alarm for temperature You can view the CPU junction temperature using the show chassis routing engine command The CPU temperature runs a few degrees higher than the routing engine temperature displayed on the Monitor gt Chassis page of the J Web interface An additional fan is part of each p
78. hangs to the floor b Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop c Place fasteners on the loop to help maintain its shape Chassis Grounding To meet safety and electromagnetic interference EMI requirements and to ensure proper operation the Services Router must be adequately grounded before power is connected In addition to the grounding pin on the AC power plug cord a threaded insert PEM nut screw and washer are provided on the rear of the chassis to connect the router to earth ground A CAUTION Before router installation begins a licensed electrician must attach a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the router for example by causing a short circuit Connecting Interface Cables to Services Routers M 123 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Connecting Power m For J2320 and J2550 Services Routers The grounding cables must be at minimum 14 AWG single strand wire cable The grounding lug must be a ring type vinyl insulated TV14 8R lug as shown in Figure 62 on page 125 and Figure 63 on page 126 m For J4350 and J6550 Services Routers The grounding cables must be at minimum 12 AWG single strand wire cable The grounding lug must be a two hole lug as shown in Figure 64 on page 126 To ground the router before connecting power you connect the grounding cable to earth ground and the
79. have installed a certificate on the Services Router and enabled HTTPS When you attempt to log in through the J Web interface the Services Router authenticates your username with the same methods used for Telnet and SSH The Services Router can support multiple J Web sessions for a single user who logs in to each session However if a single user attempts to launch multiple J Web windows for example by right clicking a link to launch another instance of a Web browser the session can have unpredictable results If the Services Router does not detect any activity through the J Web interface for 15 minutes the session times out and is terminated You must log in again to begin a new session To explicitly terminate a J Web session at any time click Logout in the top pane 90 HN Using the J Web Interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview Using the Command Line Interface This section contains the following topics m CLI Command Hierarchy on page 91 m Starting the CLI on page 92 m CLI Operational Mode on page 92 m CLI Configuration Mode on page 95 m CLI Basics on page 94 For more information about the CLI see the JUNOS CLI User Guide CLI Command Hierarchy The CLI commands are organized hierarchically with commands that perform a similar function grouped together under the same level For example all commands that display information about the Services Router system and system software are grouped und
80. hereunder shall be effective unless expressly assented to in writing by the party to be charged If any portion of this Agreement is held invalid the Parties agree that such invalidity shall not affect the validity of the remainder of this Agreement This Agreement and associated documentation has been written in the English language and the Parties agree that the English version will govern For Canada Les parties aux pr sent s confirment leur volont que cette convention de m me que tous les documents y compris tout avis qui s y rattach soient redig s en langue anglaise Translation The parties confirm that this Agreement and all related documentation is and will be in the English language Abbreviated Table of Contents Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 5 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 About This Guide J series Overview Overview of Services Routers System Overview PIM and VoIP Module Overview Services Router User Interface Overview Installing a Services Router Preparing for Router Installation Installing and Connecting a Services Router Establishing Basic Connectivity Configuring Secure Web Access Installing and Managing J series Licenses Maintaining Services Router Hardware Replacing Hardware Components Troubleshooting Hardware Components Contacting Customer Suppo
81. how to use this guide tee rre ree xvi HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol enabling Web access configuration editor 158 enabling Web access Quick Configuration 155 on built in management interfaces 154 verifying configuration isis castae eds 159 HTTPS Hypertext Transfer Protocol over SSL enabling secure access configuration editot s testes mte vt ee eit a 158 enabling secure access Quick Configuration i sos eee do Ee res 155 Quick Configutation eerte t 155 recommended for secure aCCess 154 verifying secure access configuration 159 humidity e EE 106 Hyperterminal for terminal emulation local CET CONNECtHON aee deterret 139 modem connection at router for remote CLI teg 142 modem connection for remote CLI access 145 Hypertext Transfer Protocol See HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol over SSL See HTTPS l idle time setting for a CLlsession 98 geet eier EE 40 1G550 Integrated Gateway See Avaya VoIP modules Index m 297 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide immunity standards initial configuration requirements injury steps to Lake installation AC power supplies J6550 sss 195 AIT MLC necs itu sede e sedes 206 Compact flash sett clase on d bets 178 181 console port cable Chassis 172 Crypto Accelerator Module 200 204 DC power supplies en 196 DRAM MOGUICS ss onsen aa atout eta
82. in slot 1 install the second module in slot 3 see Figure 88 on page 188 and Figure 89 on page 189 To install a DRAM module 1 Take the following steps if you have not already done so a Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see the Getting Started Guide for your router Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle Remove the screws from the sides and top of the chassis that secure the cover to the chassis Slide the cover off the chassis For J2320 and J2350 routers see Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 176 2 Remove the DRAM module from its electrostatic bag 5 Press the plastic ejectors on both sides of the DRAM slot to open it see Figure 90 on page 190 4 Grasp the DRAM module by the edges being careful not to touch any electrical components Replacing DRAM Modules Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components 5 Pressing firmly on both ends push the module into the slot until the ejectors click into the closed position see Figure 90 on page 190 6 Slide the cover onto the chassis 7 Replace and tighten the screws on the sides and top of the ch
83. install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 172 The ADSL PIMs have two LEDs to indicate the status of the PIM and its port Table 32 on page 65 describes the meaning of the LED states Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Table 32 LEDs for ADSL PIMs Label Color State Description ONLINE Green On steadily PIM passed the self test and is online and operational Unlit Off PIM is offline STATUS Green On steadily Online with no alarms or failures Red On steadily Active with local or remote alarms The router has detected a failure G SHDSL PIM For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide The G SHDSL PIM Figure 40 on page 65 provides symmetric high speed digital subscriber line SHDSL physical interfaces to ATM network media types The G SHDSL PIM has two ports for ATM over SHDSL connections Figure 40 G SHDSL PIM 9002328 The G SHDSL PIM supports the following key features Onboard network processor 2 port two wire mode and 1 port four wire mode Programmable line rates in both modes m 2 porttwo wire mode supports autodetection of line rate and fixed line rates from 192 Kbps to 2 504 Mbps in 64 Kbps increments m l port four wire mode supports fixed line rates from 584 Kbps to 4 608 Mbps in 128 Kbps increments 32 virtual channels per PIM ATM over G SHDSL framing Dying
84. is hanging from the two screws see Figure 60 on page 122 Figure 60 Hanging the Router in the Rack Front view Ral Front mounting bracket lt Center o screw Elliptical hanger cutout el 9003862 4 Verify that the mounting screws on one side of the rack are aligned with the mounting screws on the opposite side and that the router is level 5 Install at least two mounting screws into each mounting bracket in addition to the center screws from which the router hangs see Figure 61 on page 125 Use a number 2 Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws 122 Mm Installing J4350 and J6350 Routers Chapter 6 Installing and Connecting a Services Router Figure 61 Completing the Installation Connecting Interface Cables to Services Routers You connect the interfaces installed in the Services Router to various network media For more information about the network interfaces supported on the router see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide 1 Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the interface as specified in Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 223 2 Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the interface faceplate 3 Arrange the cable as follows to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points a Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it
85. it 6 OnJ2320 and J2350 routers use the power cable tie as follows to relieve strain on the cable see Figure 62 on page 125 and Figure 65 on page 126 a Wrap the loose end of the tie around the cable and insert it into the opening on the tie b Pullthe end to tighten the tie To release the tie from the cable press down the tab on the tie and loosen it Figure 62 Connecting AC Power to the J2320 Services Router Grounding lug Screw with captive washer Protective earthing point on chassis Connecting Power m 125 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 63 Connecting AC Power to the J2350 Services Router Grounding lug Screw with Protective earthing captive washer point on chassis Washer Grounding lug Connecting DC Power A CAUTION If your J6350 Services Router includes an optional redundant DC power supply connect each of the two power supplies to different input power sources Failure to do so makes the router susceptible to total power failure if one of the power supplies fails The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation The protective earthing terminal on the rear of the chassis is provided to connect the router to ground For DC cable requirements see DC Power Connection and Power Cable Specifications on page 111 To connect DC power to the router 126 HN Connecting Power Chapter 6 Installing and Connectin
86. length for the loopback interface for example 172 16 1 24 32 Click OK 1 From the edit hierarchy level enter edit interfaces 2 Delete the existing IP address delete loO unit O family inet address 5 Setthe IP address and prefix length of Jop D For example set loO unit O family inet address 172 16 1 24 32 Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor m 149 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 63 Configuring Basic Settings continued Task J Web Configuration Editor CLI Configuration Editor Define the IP address for 1 ge 0 0 0 In the configuration editor hierarchy next to Interfaces click Configure or Edit In the Interface table locate the ge 0 0 0 row and click Unit In the Unit table click 0 and in the Family section next to Inet click Configure or Edit To delete the existing IP address click the Discard button Select the Delete Configuration Below This Point option button from the next display Next to Address click Add new entry In the Source box type the address and prefix length for the management interface for example 192 168 1 1 24 Click OK 1 Delete the existing IP address delete ge 0 0 0 unit O family inet address Set the IP address and prefix length of ge 0 0 0 For example set ge 0 0 0 unit O family inet address 192 168 1 1 24 Verifying Basic Connectivity To verify that
87. metal brackets can be mounted at the front or center of the chassis Use the brackets for mounting the chassis in a rack or cabinet m Earthing terminals Two protective earthing terminals PEM nuts at the rear of the chassis ensure safe dissipation of static electricity in all situations m ESD point One electrostatic discharge ESD point a banana plug receptacle at the front of the chassis minimizes the risk of electrical discharge in potentially hazardous environments A CAUTION Before removing or installing components of a functioning router attach an ESD strap to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around your bare wrist Failure to use an ESD strap could result in damage to the router The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation The protective earthing terminals on the rear of the chassis are provided to connect the router to ground see Figure 1 4 on page 28 Additional grounding is provided to an AC powered router when you plug its power supply into a grounded AC power receptacle For additional safety information see Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information on page 247 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features M 27 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 13 Front of J4350 and J6350 Chassis Mounting Physical Interface Blank ESD Mounting bracket Module PIM PIM panel point bracket Power LAN ports Console Auxi
88. minimo de 15 2 cm alrededor de las aperturas para ventilacion WARNING Varning F rhindra att en Juniper Networks router verhettas genom att inte anv nda den i ett omr de dar den maximalt rekommenderade omgivningstemperaturen pa 40 C verskrids F rhindra att luftcirkulationen inskr nks genom att se till att det finns fritt utrymme pa minst 15 2 cm omkring ventilations ppningarna Product Disposal Warning WARNING Disposal of this product must be handled according to all national laws and regulations WARNING Waarschuwing Dit produkt dient volgens alle landelijke wetten en voorschriften te worden afgedankt WARNING Varoitus T m n tuotteen lopullisesta h vitt misest tulee huolehtia kaikkia valtakunnallisia lakeja ja s nn ksi noudattaen WARNING Attention La mise au rebut d finitive de ce produit doit tre effectu e conform ment toutes les lois et r glementations en vigueur WARNING Warnung Dieses Produkt mu den geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften entsprechend entsorgt werden WARNING Avvertenza L eliminazione finale di questo prodotto deve essere eseguita osservando le normative italiane vigenti in materia gt gt bib b b WARNING Advarsel Endelig disponering av dette produktet m skje i henhold til nasjonale lover og forskrifter Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 281 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide
89. not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning activity WARNING Waarschuwing Tijdens onweer dat gepaard gaat met bliksem dient u niet aan het systeem te werken of kabels aan te sluiten of te ontkoppelen Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information WARNING Varoitus Ala ty skentele j rjestelm n parissa l k yhdist tai irrota kaapeleita ukkosilmalla Pb WARNING Attention Ne pas travailler sur le syst me ni brancher ou d brancher les c bles pendant un orage WARNING Warnung Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schlie en Sie keine Kabel an bzw trennen Sie keine ab wenn es gewittert WARNING Avvertenza Non lavorare sul sistema o collegare oppure scollegare i cavi durante un temporale con fulmini WARNING Advarsel Utfor aldri arbeid pa systemet eller koble kabler til eller fra systemet nar det tordner eller lyner WARNING Aviso Nao trabalhe no sistema ou ligue e desligue cabos durante per odos de mau tempo trovoada WARNING jAtenci n No operar el sistema ni conectar o desconectar cables durante el transcurso de descargas el ctricas en la atm sfera P gt gt gt b b WARNING Varning Vid ska skall du aldrig utf ra arbete p systemet eller ansluta eller koppla loss kablar Operating Temperature Warning WARNING To prevent the router from overheating do not
90. on an antistatic surface in an antistatic card rack or in an electrostatic bag see Figure 109 on page 251 If you are returning a component place it in an electrostatic bag before packing it Figure 109 Place a Component into an Electrostatic Bag CAUTION 4 2 ELECTROSTATIC J SENSITIVE DEVICES DO NOT OPEN OR HANDLE EXCEPT AT A STATIC FREE WORKSTATION Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 251 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings 252 m When working on equipment powered by electricity follow the guidelines described in the following sections m General Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 252 m AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 255 m DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines on page 254 m Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies on page 255 m DC Power Disconnection Warning on page 255 m DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning on page 257 m DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning on page 257 m DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning on page 259 m Grounded Equipment Warning on page 260 m Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden on page 261 m In Case of Electrical Accident on page 261 Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning on page 262 m Power Disconnection Warning on page 263 m TN Power Warning on page 264 m Telecommunication Line Cord Warning on page 265 General Electrical Safety Guidelines WARNING Ce
91. on page 70 also known as the TGM550 Gateway Module has two analog telephone ports two analog trunk ports and a serial console port The TGM550 enables routers to provide VoIP services to telephones and trunks that do not directly support VoIP by translating voice and signaling data between VoIP and the system used by the telephones and trunks Avaya VoIP Modules m 69 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 70 m Figure 41 TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module g003855 The TGM550 provides the following key features m Voice VoIP Media Gateway services Two analog telephone LINE ports to support two analog telephones or incoming analog direct inward dialing DID trunks with either wink start or immediate start An analog relay supports emergency transfer relay ETR Two analog trunk TRUNK ports to support loop start ground start centralized automatic message accounting CAMA and direct inward and outward dialing DIOD for Japan only trunks Survivability features for continuous voice services Call center capabilities m Provisioning Avaya Communication Manager CM media server management Extensive alarm and troubleshooting features m Survivability Media Gateway Controller MGC automatic switchover migration and survivability features Modem backup connection to the MGC Dynamic call admission control CAC for WAN interfaces m Management One serial port for
92. operate it in an area that exceeds the maximum recommended ambient temperature of 104 F 40 C To prevent airflow restriction allow at least 6 inches 15 2 cm of clearance around the ventilation openings WARNING Waarschuwing Om te voorkomen dat welke router van de Juniper Networks router dan ook oververhit raakt dient u deze niet te bedienen op een plaats Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 279 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 280 m waar de maximale aanbevolen omgevingstemperatuur van 40 C wordt overschreden Om te voorkomen dat de luchtstroom wordt beperkt dient er minstens 15 2 cm speling rond de ventilatie openingen te zijn WARNING Varoitus Ettei Juniper Networks router sarjan reititin ylikuumentuisi sit ei saa k ytt tilassa jonka l mp tila ylitt korkeimman suositellun ymp rist l mp tilan 40 C Ettei ilmanvaihto estyisi tuuletusaukkojen ymp rille on j tett v ainakin 15 2 cm tilaa WARNING Attention Pour viter toute surchauffe des routeurs de la gamme Juniper Networks router ne l utilisez pas dans une zone o la temp rature ambiante est sup rieure 40 C Pour permettre un flot d air constant d gagez un espace d au moins 15 2 cm autour des ouvertures de ventilations WARNING Warnung Um einen Router der router vor berhitzung zu sch tzen darf dieser nicht in einer Gegend betrieben werden in der die Umgebungstemperatur das empfo
93. page 129 STATUS LED When the system is powered on the STATUS LED changes from off to blinking green Startup takes approximately 90 seconds to complete If you want to turn the system off and on again we recommend waiting a few seconds between shutting it down and powering it back up Table 8 on page 21 describes the STATUS LED Table 8 J2320 and J2350 STATUS LED Color State Description Green Blinking Router is starting up or performing diagnostics On steadily Router is operating normally Red Blinking Error has been detected ALARM LED The ALARM LED lights amber to indicate a minor condition that requires monitoring or maintenance and lights red to indicate a major condition that can result in a system shutdown When the condition is corrected the light turns off Table 9 on page 22 describes the ALARM LED J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features M 21 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 9 J2320 and J2350 ALARM LED Color State Description Red On steadily Major alarm indicates a critical situation on the router that has resulted from one of the following conditions A red alarm condition requires immediate action m One or more hardware components have failed m One or more hardware components have exceeded emperature thresholds m An alarm condition configured on an interface has riggered a critical warning Yellow On steadily Minor ala
94. parameter show Show a parameter status Show users currently editing configuration top Exit to top level of configuration up Exit one level of configuration wildcard Wildcard operations The JUNOS software configuration consists of a hierarchy of statements There are two types of statements container statements which contain other statements and leaf statements which do not contain other statements All the container and leaf statements together form the configuration hierarchy Each statement consists of a fixed keyword and optionally an identifier that you define such as the name of an interface or a username To configure the Services Router or to modify an existing configuration you add statements to the configuration with the edit and set configuration mode commands For more information about the CLI configuration editor and configuration mode see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide and the JUNOS software configuration guides This section contains the following topics m Editing Keystrokes on page 94 m Command Completion on page 95 m Online Help on page 96 m Configuring the CLI Environment on page 97 Editing Keystrokes In the CLI you use keystrokes to move around on and edit the command line and to scroll through a list of recently executed commands Table 50 on page 95 lists some typical CLI editing tasks and the keystrokes that perform them Using the Command Line Interfa
95. rese ioca dr Een 193 stalling ID see ease 196 LED States if oeste toque eene 37 redundaney ui ud a et A MR eris 57 removinguAC tte tesor oisi tevin siepe sesh 192 removing DG oo eese dioe e IE Ner E URL 195 serial number label oe eese 216 power system CONTMECUING cio co Bars tote ttt de 125 126 i LEES 25 38 2320 3 6 oett tette ett pete EE EE A eni bes t ertet tiet power supply LED preparing for installation processes software chassis iD OCeSS ee et Ee 40 forwarding Process ice ood orte bete s 40 interface process isa edente Ert dd 40 management proCess e cce eren ds 40 routing protocol process 40 304 m Index product disposal product overview prompt See command prompts restart after upgrade prompt provisioning an ISDN line sss 115 Q Quick Configuration LEE 145 Oe 88 initial configuration esie ese poer ees 145 Secure ACCESS Ddge ii eb e ore e 156 secure Web 466658 deb tere 155 Seb E ee 145 R rack installation general requirements 0 tege ettet ede lifting SuidelMes ite erc eter mouriting brackets 2 22 a kitti order of multiple routers DroCediire tse dem eee teta e a safety guidelines and warmings 267 securing rack to Duilding 105 SIZE FEGUITEIMENIS clas 104 105 support for front mount rack 104 105 ventilation regulrement 104 105 radio frequency interference RFI reducing
96. sends the packet over it See also dial on demand routing backup floating static route dial on demand routing DDR backup Feature that provides a J series Services Router with full time connectivity across an ISDN line When routes on a primary serial T1 E1 T5 E5 Fast Ethernet or PPPoE interface are lost an ISDN dialer interface establishes a backup connection To save connection time costs the Services Router drops the ISDN connection after a configured period of inactivity Services Router with ISDN interfaces support two types of dial on demand routing backup on demand routing with a dialer filter and dialer watch See also dialer filter dialer watch dialer watch Dial on demand routing DDR backup feature that provides reliable connectivity without relying on a dialer filter to activate the ISDN interface The ISDN dialer interface monitors the existence of each route on a watch list If all routes on the watch list are lost from the routing table dialer watch initiates the ISDN interface for failover connectivity See also dial on demand routing backup dying gasp notification Ability of a Services Router with a digital subscriber line DSL connection that has lost power to send a message informing the attached DSL access multiplexer DSLAM that it is about to go offline ePIM Enhanced PIM A particular type of high speed PIM such as the Gigabit Ethernet ePIM or 4 port Fast Ethernet ePIM which
97. shows the intended secure access configuration Related Topics For more information about the format of a configuration file see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide Displaying a Secure Access Configuration Purpose Verify the secure access configuration Action From the J Web interface select Configuration View and Edit View Configuration Text Alternatively from configuration mode in the CLI enter the show system services command The following sample output displays the sample values for secure Web access as configured in Table 66 on page 158 edit user RO show system services web management http https port 8443 local certificate new Meaning The output shows the intended secure access configuration Related Topics For more information about the format of a configuration file see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide 160 Mm Displaying a Secure Access Configuration Chapter 9 Installing and Managing J series Licenses To enable some JUNOS software features on a J series Services Router you must purchase install and manage separate software licenses The presence on the router of the appropriate software license keys passwords determines the features you can configure and use For those features that require a license the presence on the router of the appropriate software license keys passwords determines whether you can
98. tee C Ge S eet ee 229 MOSS DTE Cable ne LE EE 230 V35 DCE Cabl PInOUt ti iii eee eere een GER 231 X21 DTE Cable PINUS Ce Db ee tes 251 Xel DCE Cable Pinout n npe n tn e grt eee ck e dg 252 Fast Ethernet RJ 45 Connector BINOUE recopila piratas 255 Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ 45 Connector Pinot 255 Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ 45 Connector Pinot 254 Chassis Console Port PINOUIS c eee reser m d e pe dd 254 Ed and 1 1R 48 Cable PINOU S etarras 235 E3 and T3 BNC Connector Pinout raoic irira earr eee 238 ADSL and G SHDSL RJ 11 Connector Pinout esrara tea aan 258 ISDN R 45 Connector Pinout x pecie tate tet E T ee ect e get 259 Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules ariieaineeerirsriaei aii a 259 TGM550 Console Port PInOuUts 10 ocn e oer oe eet 259 TGM550 RJ 11 Connector Pinout for Analog Porte 240 TIM508 COotfnector PIGOUL eo et ede ae eer das 241 TIM510 RJ 45 Connector PIBOUL eoe coit ot eot ntes tete ntts 241 TIM5 1 4 Connector PIQUE tonsa pe vo ed ere e vo ER AER 242 TIM516 Connector PINOUL centralita 242 TIMS18 COornnector PInOUL sce Nae e He e pe ae e 244 TIM521 Connector PINOUT citet tete He pe aii 245 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information 247 Definition of Safety Warning Levels ssssssssH REA 247 Safety Guidelines and Warnings ssssssssss e 249 General Safety Guidelines and Warnings ononncninnnoonnccconanncccconnnorccinannn 249 Qualified Personnel Warning oocooncccinnnoonncccconnnc
99. the CLI enter the show system license usage command user router gt show system license usage Licenses Licenses Licenses Expiry Feature name used installed needed j flow 0 0 T bgp reflection 1 1 0 permanent The output shows a list of the licenses installed on the Services Router and how they are used Verify the following information m Each license is present Features are listed in ascending alphabetical order by license name The number of licenses is shown in the third column Verify that the appropriate number of licenses are installed m The number of used licenses matches the number of configured features If a licensed feature is configured the feature is considered used The sample output shows that the BGP route reflection feature is configured m A license is installed on the Services Router for each configured feature For every feature configured that does not have a license one license is needed For example the sample output shows that the user has configured the J Flow traffic analysis feature but has not purchased the license for it An additional license is required to be in compliance with license agreements m The expiration information for the license is correct For J series only permanent licenses are supported Displaying Installed License Keys Purpose Action Verify the license keys installed on the Services Router From the CLI enter the show system license keys command user router gt show
100. the CoS Configuration page m Prev Access the previous page m Next Access the next page a Report an Error Access a form for providing feedback Using the J Web Interface m 89 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide J Web Sessions Figure 52 CoS Help Page Next Report an Error Configuring CoS with Quick Configuration The Class of Service Quick Configuration pages allow you to configure most of the JUNOS CoS components for the IPv4 IPv6 and MPLS traffic on a routing platform You can configure forwarding classes for transmitting packets define which packets are placed into each output queue schedule the transmission service level for each queue and manage congestion using a random early detection RED algorithm After defining the CoS components you must assign classifiers to the required physical and logical interfaces This section contains the following topics a Defining CoS Components a Defining CoS Value Aliases a Defining Forwarding Classes a Defining Classifiers a Defining Rewrite Rules a Defining Schedulers a Defining Virtual Channel Groups a Assigning CoS Components to Interfaces Next Report an Error You establish a J Web session with the Services Router through an HTTP enabled or HTTPS enabled Web browser The HTTPS protocol which uses 128 bit encryption is available only in domestic versions of the JUNOS software To use HTTPS you must
101. the Services Router has the settings you configured perform the following task Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations on page 150 Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations Purpose Verify the configuration of basic connectivity Because the basic connectivity settings appear in different places in the configuration hierarchy displaying the entire configuration at once makes viewing the settings easier Action From the J Web interface select Configuration View and Edit View Configuration Text Alternatively from configuration mode in the CLI enter the show command The following sample output displays the sample values configured in Table 65 on page 148 Your output displays the values you set edit user host show system host name routera domain name lab router net domain search lab router net router net backup router 192 168 2 44 time zone America Los_Angeles root authentication ssh rsa ssh rsa AAAAB3Nza D9Y2gXF9ac rootGroutera lab router net name server 10 148 2 32 150 Mm Verifying Basic Connectivity Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity services ntp server 10 148 2 21 interfaces ge 0 0 0 unit O family inet address 192 168 1 1 24 100 unit O family inet address 172 16 1 24 32 Meaning The output shows the configuration of basic connectivity Verify that the values displayed are correct for your Services
102. the terminal block 12 Verify that the power cable does not block access to router components or drape where people might trip on it 13 Press and release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Removing a DC Power Supply The power supplies are located at the right rear of the chassis A power supply weighs 2 4 lb 1 1 kg To remove a DC power supply see Figure 93 on page 196 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 2 Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off 3 Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that the cable leads cannot become active during installation Replacing Power System Components m 195 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide A CAUTION You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity The power source cables might be labeled and to indicate their polarity There is no standard color coding for DC power cables The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to
103. the terminal studs on each power supply 4 Remove the power cables from the DC power source 5 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal block 6 Within the terminal block remove the screws that fasten the power cable lugs to the terminal block 7 Carefully move the power cables out of the way 8 Slide the ejector tab on the power supply faceplate to the right and hold it in place to unlock the power supply 9 Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate and pull firmly to start removing the power supply Slide it halfway out of the chassis see Figure 95 on page 196 10 Place one hand underneath the power supply to support it and slide it completely out of the chassis 11 If you are not reinstalling a power supply into the emptied slot install a blank power supply panel over the slot Figure 93 Removing a DC Power Supply Ejector Installing a DC Power Supply Each power supply in a DC powered router must be connected to earth ground A ground terminal is provided on each DC power supply for this purpose To install a DC power supply see Figure 94 on page 198 196 1H Replacing Power System Components I Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that the cable leads cannot become active during installation CAUTION You must ensure that power connections maintain the pr
104. through 1355 nm Average launch power 9 5 dBm through 4 dBm For SMF cable 9 5 dBm through 3 dBm For MMF cable 11 5 dBm through 3 dBm Receiver saturation 5 dBm 3 dBm Receiver sensitivity 18 dBm 20 5 dBm 54 pg Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Dual Port Serial PIM The Dual Port Serial PIM Figure 28 on page 55 provides a physical connection to serial network media types through two serial interface ports Figure 28 Dual Port Serial PIM 9002329 The Dual Port Serial PIM provides the following key features m Onboard network processor m Autoselection of operation modes based on data terminal equipment DTE or data communication equipment DCE cables m Local and remote loopback diagnostics m Configurable clock rate for the transmit Tx clock and receive Rx clock For pinouts of cable connectors for serial PIMs see Serial PIM Cable Specifications on page 225 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 172 Status LEDs indicate port status Table 25 on page 55 describes the meaning of the LED states Table 25 Status LEDs for Serial Ports Color State Description Green On steadily Online with no alarms or failures Red On steadily Active with a local alarm The router has detected a failure Unlit Off Offline For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide
105. to align e all slots with tabs at both the front and rear of the chassis Cover tab Chassis slot To replace the cover on the J2320 and J2350 chassis 1 Lower the cover onto the chassis so that the front edge of the cover is a few inches away from the front edge of the chassis base see Figure 76 on page 177 2 Tilt the cover and align the rear tabs with the slots at the bottom of the chassis see Figure 77 on page 178 Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers m 177 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 77 Matching the Chassis Slots and Tabs 3 Lower the cover fully onto the base and slide it so that the front tabs match the front slots and the chassis cover and base edges align completely 4 Insert and tighten the flat head screws with a Phillips screwdriver 5 Return the router to its installation site and attach the grounding cable and the power cables See Connecting Power on page 124 6 Press and release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers The internal compact flash provides primary storage for the router and is installed in a slot on the bottom of the J2320 or J2350 chassis see Figure 78 on page 179 It can accommodate software images configuration files and microcode For information about configuring the internal com
106. use the feature For information about how to purchase J series software licenses contact your Juniper Networks sales representative This chapter contains the following topics m J series License Overview on page 161 m Before You Begin on page 162 m Managing J series Licenses with the J Web Interface on page 165 m Managing J series Licenses with the CLI on page 165 m Verifying J series License Management on page 166 J series License Overview Each J series feature license is valid for only a single Services Router To manage the licenses you must understand the components of a license key This section contains the following topics m License Enforcement on page 161 m Software Feature Licenses on page 162 m License Key Components on page 162 License Enforcement For features that require a license you must install and properly configure the license to use the feature Although the router allows you to commit a configuration that specifies a feature requiring a license when the license is not present you are prohibited from actually using the feature Successful commitment of a configuration does not imply that the required licenses are installed If a required license is not present the system provides a warning J series License Overview m 161 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide message after it commits the configuration rather than failing to commit it because of a license violation
107. xv m How to Use This Guide on page xvi wm Document Conventions on page xvii m Related Juniper Networks Documentation on page xviii m Documentation Feedback on page xxi m Requesting Technical Support on page xxi This guide contains an overview basic instructions and specifications for J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Routers It explains how to prepare your site for installation unpack and install a Services Router and its components power on the router install licenses and establish basic connectivity J series Services Router operations are controlled by the JUNOS software You direct the JUNOS software through either a Web browser or a command line interface CLI NOTE This guide documents Release 9 2 of the JUNOS software For additional information about J series Services Routers either corrections to or omissions from this guide see the J series Services Router Release Notes at http www juniper net This guide is designed for anyone who installs and sets up a J series Services Router or prepares a site for Services Router installation The guide is intended for the following audiences m Customers with technical knowledge of and experience with networks and the Internet m Network administrators who install configure and manage Internet routers but are unfamiliar with the JUNOS software Objectives M XV J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide m Network administrators w
108. your site consider the factors discussed in the following sections Signaling Limitations Improperly installed wires can emit radio interference In addition the potential for damage from lightning strikes increases if wires exceed recommended distances or if wires pass between buildings The electromagnetic pulse EMP caused by lightning can damage unshielded conductors and destroy electronic devices If your site has previously experienced such problems you might want to consult experts in electrical surge suppression and shielding Radio Frequency Interference You can reduce or eliminate the emission of radio frequency interference RFI from your site wiring by using twisted pair cable with a good distribution of grounding conductors If you must exceed the recommended distances use a high quality twisted pair cable with one ground conductor for each data signal when applicable Electromagnetic Compatibility If your site is susceptible to problems with electromagnetic compatibility EMC particularly from lightning or radio transmitters you might want to seek expert advice Strong sources of electromagnetic interference EMI can destroy the signal drivers and receivers in the router and conduct power surges over the lines into the equipment resulting in an electrical hazard It is particularly important to provide a properly grounded and shielded environment and to use electrical surge suppression devices Power Guidelines R
109. zone For example Detroit or Azores A Network Time Protocol NTP server provides accurate time across a network The router synchronizes the system time with the NTP server and periodically accesses the NTP server to maintain the correct time The time zone and system time must be accurate so that the router schedules events and operations as expected For Common Criteria compliance you must configure NTP to provide accurate timestamps for system log messages For more information see the Secure Configuration Guide for Common Criteria and JUNOS FIPS A Domain Name System DNS server on the network maintains a database for resolving hostnames and IP addresses Network devices can query the DNS server by hostnames rather than IP addresses The router accesses the DNS servers that Basic Connectivity Overview m 133 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Default Gateway Backup Router are added to the configuration to resolve hostnames in the order in which you list them If you plan to include your router in several domains you can add these domains to the configuration so that they are included in a DNS search When DNS searches are requested the domain suffixes are appended to the hostnames A default gateway is a static route that is used to direct packets addressed to networks not explicitly listed in the routing table If a packet arrives at the Services Router with an address that the route
110. 0 If contacting JTAC by telephone enter your 1 1 digit case number followed by the pound key if this is an existing case or press the star key to be routed to the next available support engineer Information You Might Need to Supply to JTAC Return Procedure When requesting support from JTAC by telephone be prepared to provide the following information m Your existing case number if you have one m Details of the failure or problem m Type of activity being performed on the router when the problem occurred Configuration data displayed by one or more show commands If the problem cannot be resolved by the JTAC technician a Return Materials Authorization RMA number is issued This number is used to track the returned material at the factory and to return repaired or new components to the customer as needed 216 Mm Contacting Customer Support Chapter 12 Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware NOTE Do not return any component to Juniper Networks unless you have first obtained an RMA number Juniper Networks reserves the right to refuse shipments that do not have an RMA Refused shipments are returned to the customer via collect freight For more information about return and repair policies see the customer support Web page at http www juniper net support guidelines html For product problems or technical support issues open a support case using the Case Manager link at http www juniper net su
111. 108 ramp angle requirement oce tette 271 read or write error Routing Engine 210 red alarms See major alarms E E HEET 86 redundant J6350 power supplies descriptor ee ee as 37 safety guidelines for power SQUICES ooociioccccooo 255 regulatory cornpliance aeter estt 247 release notes URL uL ics asian este Ath ahi prep datae Xv remote connection to router console port configuring modem at router end 141 configuring modem at user end 145 connecting modem to router 142 oa 141 replacement AC DOWER CONG tie ct tet ep pm tots 191 are 206 console port cable Chassis 172 Crypto Accelerator Module 198 201 DC Power Cable 5 chen ile oed dave Peek 194 DRAM Ould 188 external compact Hash 184 internal compact flash 178 181 PIM cables ue e eee ARD s 175 EENS eeh geg Meet eege 172 power system 0300 seii tee ane 191 tools and parts required 171 USB storage device 186 request chassis pic fpc slot command sal T5 request system license add command 165 request system license add terminal command 165 request system license delete command 165 request system license save command 166 required entry eee tra ign o dece edt 86 rescue configuration resetting with RESCUE CONFIG DUTON Ed 22 55 reset power button for restart 20 55 RESET CONFIG button for factory configuration EE 22 55 RESET CONFIG button for factory Configuration eee 22 55 fo
112. 227 7201 through 227 7202 4 FAR 12 212 FAR 27 405 b 2 FAR 52 227 19 or FAR 52 227 14 ALT III as applicable 13 Interface Information To the extent required by applicable law and at Customer s written request Juniper shall provide Customer with the interface information needed to achieve interoperability between the Software and another independently created program on payment of applicable fee if any Customer shall observe strict obligations of confidentiality with respect to such information and shall use such information in compliance with any applicable terms and conditions upon which Juniper makes such information available 14 Third Party Software Any licensor of Juniper whose software is embedded in the Software and any supplier of Juniper whose products or technology are embedded in or services are accessed by the Software shall be a third party beneficiary with respect to this Agreement and such licensor or vendor shall have the right to enforce this Agreement in its own name as if it were Juniper In addition certain third party software may be provided with the Software and is subject to the accompanying license s if any of its respective owner s To the extent portions of the Software are distributed under and subject to open source licenses obligating Juniper to make the source code for such portions publicly available such as the GNU General Public License GPL or the GNU Library General Public License LGPL
113. 2320 and J2350 Routers 178 Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers 181 Replacing External Compact Flashes ooonnnnnnnnnninococcocnccccccccnccnnnn ana n nc cnc 184 Replacing USB Storage DevVic S ete ee tees pe ene te he ga 186 REMOVING the USB storage DeviCE ue tetti e de 186 Installing the USB Storage Device gere nie i arei iri ii i 187 Replacing DRAM Modules sette stung eR te ee Eee qe 188 Removing a DRAM Module 189 Installing a DRAM Module eit GE bo I Pet cete nde 190 Replacing Power System Components ssssssssssss 191 Replacing AC Power Supply Code 191 Removing an AC Power Supply from J6350 Routerg inrcr 192 Installing an AC Power Supply in J6550 Routers 2 0 0 0 eres 195 Replacing DC Power Supply Cables ooinccoocccccccccccccocinan iieii 194 Removing a DC Power SUDDly cuisc ita 195 Installing a DC Power Supply etuvi ditai e 196 Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2550 Routers 198 Removing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module 199 Installing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module 200 Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6550 Routers 201 Removing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Accelerator Module 202 Installing a J4550 or j6350 Crypto Accelerator Module 204 Replacing Air Filters on J2350 Routers en irni anoet aa nano cnn nnnnnnos 205 Replacing Air Filters on J4550 and J6550 Routers ccecce 206
114. 48 J Web Quick Configuration Buttons Function Button Commit your entries into the configuration and return to the previous J Web OK page Clear the entries you have not yet applied to the configuration and return to the Cancel previous J Web page Commit your entries into the configuration and stay on the same J Web page Apply Navigating the J Web Configuration Editor When you select Edit Configuration J Web configuration editor the side pane displays the top level of the configured hierarchy committed on the Services Router The main pane displays the configuration hierarchy options As you navigate through the configuration the hierarchy level is displayed at the top of the main pane You can click a statement or identifier displayed in the main pane or in the hierarchy in the left pane to display the corresponding configuration options in the main pane After typing or selecting your configuration edits click a button in the main pane described in Table 49 on page 88 to move to the previous page after applying committing or canceling the configuration An updated configuration does not take effect until you commit it Table 49 Key J Web Edit Configuration Buttons Function Button Apply edits to the candidate configuration and return one level up previous OK page in the configuration hierarchy Using the J Web Interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview Table 49 K
115. 4q ix8i8d adj7kr 8uq38t ix8i8d jzsn4q ix8i8d 4ky27y acasck 82fsj6 ii8i7e adj7kr 8uq38t ks2923 a9382e The license data defines the device ID for which the license is valid and the version of the license Before You Begin Before you begin managing the J series licenses complete the following tasks m Purchase the licenses you require m Establish basic connectivity See Establishing Basic Connectivity on page 151 162 m Before You Begin Chapter 9 Installing and Managing J series Licenses Managing J series Licenses with the J Web Interface To manage licenses with the J Web interface you perform the following tasks Adding New Licenses with the J Web Interface on page 164 Deleting Licenses with the J Web Interface on page 164 Displaying License Keys with the J Web Interface on page 164 Downloading Licenses with the J Web Interface on page 164 The Licenses page displays a summary of licensed features that are configured on the Services Router and a list of licenses that are installed on the routers The information on the license management page is summarized in Table 68 on page 163 Table 68 Summary of License Management Fields Field Name Definition Feature Summary Feature Name of the licensed feature m Leeries licenses listed in Table 67 on page 162 m All features All inclusive licenses Licenses Used umber of licenses currently being used on the router Usage is determined by
116. 5 JUNOSceript SSL access ttti ttt 155 E Seer Rots TEQUITE MEN Sai a obe estes eem 154 sample Conftguration 160 verifying secure access configuration 159 Secure Access page ele ee EE 156 field Su ee t vedete 157 Secure Sockets Layer See SSL serial number chassis components Jabel 215 214 PIMS ad RE uet bela 216 power s pplys uade aep qe roe s 216 serial ports cables and Connectorg ninas 225 Dual Port Serial DIN 55 EIA 550A DCE poinours apigeniini blean 229 EIA 550A DTE poinours 228 LED SERIES EE 55 RS 232 DCE PINOS a e a ernen seii dean nh taahi 225 RS 252 DTE Ile 224 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE poinouts 227 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE poinouts 225 1 39 DEE ee LEE Vi35 DTE pITIOUES rta rss X 21 DCE pinouts T KEE RECH ele service provider contacting for ISDN DEOVISIORITIg 21 4 essere bee a 115 Services Router Avaya VoIP module overview 66 ELE e ee et dt ati edet 134 A le 103 CONNEC ia 157 establishing secure Web accesg 155 306 Hm Index establishing software connectivity 151 grounding a DC powered model 127 grounding an AC powered model 124 AGO Wales fon Aet PN Pe E TRETEN ARD 15 hardware replacement 171 hardware ret rti us seme a led os 215 HTTPS WEB ACCESS lotti Ne db edes tiges 155 installation and connecton 117 CASES sxe ina e o aora dades 161 network cables and Connectors 225 operating environMenNt eee 106 OVEEVICW
117. 5822 toll free in the USA Canada and Mexico For international or direct dial options in countries without toll free numbers visit us at http www juniper net support requesting support html Requesting Technical Support Part 1 J series Overview m Overview of Services Routers on page 3 m System Overview on page 15 m PIM and VoIP Module Overview on page 45 m Services Router User Interface Overview on page 81 J series Overview J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 2 W series Overview Chapter 1 Overview of Services Routers J series Services Routers provide stable reliable and efficient IP routing WAN and LAN connectivity and management services for small to medium sized enterprise networks Services Routers typically connect small branch or regional offices to a central site router and link Internet service provider ISP networks All J series Services Routers run the JUNOS software which offers many advanced routing and security services For more information about software features see J series Software Features and Licenses on page 7 A single common JUNOS code base simplifies deployment patches and software upgrades You can use two user interfaces to monitor configure troubleshoot and manage a Services Router m J Web interface A Web based graphical interface that allows you to operate a router without commands The J Web interface provides access to all JUNOS f
118. 6 Connecting to a Services Router sssssssssssssssssss ene 157 Connecting to the J Web Interface AAA 157 Connecting to the CLI Local 159 Connecting to the CLI Remotely eitt a e N E 141 Configuring the Modem at the Router End ccecce 141 Connecting the Modem to the Console Port ssssssssse 142 Connecting to the CLI at the User End 145 Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration ss 145 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Part 3 Chapter 10 Table of Contents Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor 0 0 0 147 Verifying Basic Connectivity 5i naso eeu a anion ate 150 Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations sss 150 Configuring Secure Web Access 153 Secure WED ACCESS LETS Eege Par reset a ees Secure Web Access Overview rormannen E ee ee eee eee nennen Before You EE Generating SSL Certificates Configuring Secure Web Access Configuring Secure Web Access with a Configuration Editor 158 Verifying Secure Web ACCESS eee teret d e Pe eeepc e dg 159 Displaying an SSL Certificate Configuration sssssss 159 Displaying a Secure Access Configuration ooooccccccccccccoonannnnnncncccccccnnnnns 160 Installing and Managing J series Licenses 161 Jsseries Ja cense OVerVIeW ees ee Ae deed Een 161 License Enforcement siria icon Deenen tbe td ee vie a ied qs 161 Software Feature Licenses ee ed Adult ud de reges 162 License Key Components et lid ik e
119. 61 in 6 63 cm high 17 51 in 44 48 cm wide and 15 1 in 58 55 cm deep The outer edges of the mounting ears extend the width of either chassis to 19 in 48 2 cm and the front of the chassis extends approximately 0 78 in 1 98 cm beyond the mounting ears The spacing of rails and adjacent racks must also allow for the clearances around the router and rack See General Site Guidelines on page 105 CAUTION If you are mounting the router in a cabinet be sure that ventilation is sufficient to prevent overheating If a front mount rack is used we recommend supporting the back of the router with a shelf or other structure Rack Requirements Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation The J2320 chassis height of 1 75 in 4 45 cm equals 1 U The J2350 chassis height of 2 61 in 6 63 cm equals 1 5 U Each U is a standard rack unit defined in Cabinets Racks Panels and Associated Equipment document number EIA 510 D published by the Electronics Industry Association Rack Size and Strength for J4350 and J6350 Routers The Services Router is designed for installation in a rack that complies with either of the following standards m A 19 in rack as defined in Cabinets Racks Panels and Associated Equipment document number EIA 510 D published by the Electronics Industry Association http www eia org m A600 mm rack as defined in the four part Equipment Engineering EE European telecommunications standard fo
120. 7 For information about connecting the router to power and ground see Connecting Power on page 124 J2350 Power System 24 m The J2350 Services Router uses either AC or DC power The autosensing power supply see Figure 4 on page 15 or Figure 5 on page 16 distributes the different output voltages to the router components according to their voltage requirements The power supply is fixed in the chassis and is not field replaceable J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview The AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet that requires a dedicated AC power feed The DC power supply has a terminal block that provides a single DC input 48 VDC and return and requires a dedicated 15 A 48 VDC circuit breaker The J2350 AC powered or DC powered chassis has a power switch and does not include a power LED For information about site power preparations see Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications on page 107 For information about connecting the router to power and ground see Connecting Power on page 124 de NOTE You cannot mix DC and AC power supplies in the same chassis A WARNING DC powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a restricted access location J2320 and J2350 Cooling System The cooling system in J2320 and J2350 routers is from side to side The J2320 router has five cooling fans and the J2350 router has four cooling fans The
121. 7 uPIM Ports 0 through 7 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet JUNOS 8 5 and later Slots 1 through 6 ge 2 0 15 uPIM Ports 0 through 15 1 Port SFP Gigabit JUNOS 8 0 and later Can be installed in any ge 3 0 0 Ethernet ePIM high speed slot as follows m J4350 Slots 3 and 6 Port 0 m J6350 Slots 2 3 5 and 6 Port 0 Dual Port Serial PIM JUNOS 8 0 and later Slots 1 through 6 se 3 0 1 Ports 0 and 1 Dual Port T1 or E1 PIM JUNOS 8 0 and later Slots 1 through 6 t1 0 0 1 Ports 0 and 1 or e1 0 0 1 Dual Port Channelized Channelized T1 E1 JUNOS 8 1 Slots 1 through 6 ct1 0 0 0 T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM and later Port 0 and 1 ce1 0 0 0 ISDN PRI JUNOS 8 3 and later T3 or E3 PIM JUNOS 8 0 and later Slots 1 through 6 t3 0 0 0 Port 0 or e3 2 0 0 Dual Port Fast Ethernet JUNOS 8 0 and later Slots 1 through 6 fe 1 0 0 PIM Ports O and 1 48 HW Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Table 20 J4350 and J6350 Field Replaceable PIM and Module Summary continued Sample Interface Name Supported Software Releases PIM for This PIM Slot and Port Numbering type pim 0 port 4 port Fast Ethernet JUNOS 8 0 and later Can be installed in any fe 3 0 0 ePIM PIM high speed slot as follows m J4350 Slots 3 and 6 Ports 0 through 5 m J6350 Slots 2 5 5 and 6 Ports 0 through 3 4 Port ISDN BRI PIM JUNOS 8 0 and later Slots 1 through 6 br 1 0 2 Ports 0 1 2 and 5 ADSL PIM JUNOS 8
122. 7 Clear to Send B 10 29 9 Data Mode B 54 50 1555 Terminal Ready B 14 51 15 Receiver Ready B 51 35 52 Terminal Timing B 57 37 Send Common 26 to 25 18 to 17 5 E 226 Mm Serial PIM Cable Specifications RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE Cable Pinout Table 75 RS 422 449 ElA 449 DCE Cable Pinout Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts LFH 60 Pin DC 37 DB 37 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground 1 4 2 Send Data A 56 5 55 Send Timing A 60 6 59 Receive Data A 37 7 38 Request to Send A 52 8 51 Receive Timing A 48 9 47 Clear to Send A 45 10 Local Loopback 55 11 54 Data Mode A 9 12 10 Terminal Ready A 15 15 14 Receive Ready A 5 17 6 Terminal Timing A 56 19 Signal Ground 4 20 Receive Common 2 22 1 Send Data B 55 25 56 Send Timing B 59 24 60 Receive Data B 38 25 37 Request to Send B 51 26 52 Receive Timing B 47 27 48 Clear to Send B 34 29 33 Data Mode B 10 50 9 Terminal Ready B 14 51 15 Receiver Ready B 6 35 5 Terminal Timing B bif 57 Send Common 26 to 25 Serial PIM Cable Specifications m 227 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinout Table 76 EIA 530A DTE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin L
123. 84 backup router defining configuration editor 149 descriptio Neeser aE ae 134 basic connectivity CLI configuration editor 147 establishing eaim eet tese e tete anseris 151 J Web configuration editor 147 Quick Coftgurattort encuentre da 145 requiremberts a5 tetendit t se o etu 156 sample Conftguration 150 Secure WED ACCESS seele tt eee pe leede 155 KEE 150 battery environmental Compltance 283 ER EE 276 Dt eoe dett et dete ett 285 BGP route reflectors license 162 blank panel Tor PIMslots eate ee ue p he mter 46 for power supply 6550 191 blinking Fast Ethernet port ACTIVITY LED state dual port PIM eg retten tpe te tp ho rH e ep ere 61 Fast Ethernet port link activity LED state 4 port GPIMS ise aee te toe decus de tres esti eite d 62 Gigabit Ethernet port LED occ 51 Gigabit Ethernet port TX RX LED St di deese s sue 25 55 54 ISDN BRI ONLINE LED starte 65 POWER LED state seedy 3S STATUS router LED state 21 34 TIM508 ACT active LED starte 74 TIM514 ACT active LED state 76 TIM516 ACT active LED state 0 77 TIM518 ACT active LED state 0 79 eege 19 31 external compact flash 24 boot process backup router for 134 boot SEQUETICE E 19 51 Border Gateway Protocol BGP route reflectors e EE 162 Bottom Pane es feeb deet nu e ded ect ati onde ts 84 braces in configuration StateMentS ee xviii brackets angle in syntax descrip
124. AC power cords cables DC power cables cover replacing 2320 and Dam 176 Crypto Accelerator Module descripto s nt ette ue Vr Ad Ae 18 51 installing 200 204 location 198 201 TEMOVING sucia oe 199 202 curly braces in configuration statements xviii customer SUPPOF Es sicario xxi contacting AC d ld E tages xxi contacting JTAC for hardware return 216 information required for hardware return 216 D daemons See processes software datasheets URL vats iet eR iris 45 DB 9 connector pinouts chassis Console Dott oec ertet 255 TGM550 console port DB 9 to DB 25 serial port adapter DC power cables See DC power cables connecting POWER inter EN ts 126 dedicated DC power feed requirement 197 electrical specifications 109 grounding requirements and warning 257 grounding the router 127 installing a 6550 power SUPPlY ooo 196 J2320 SYSTEM o e epo tette Dt sut ba and 24 T2350 SVSteTTI o seta ete etra tee ees 24 JAS SO SYSTEM aceti t be tee 56 6350 5VSLle TEIG O 57 power disconnection Warning 255 removing a 6550 power supply 195 requlrements zuet a tede Put 109 safety guidelines general ees 254 safety guidelines power sources for redundant Power Supplies n dat ene ails 255 wiring sequence W TnImg eee 257 wiring terminations warmtmg 259 DC power cables electr
125. Access Terms Before configuring secure Web access become familiar with the terms defined in Table 64 on page 153 Table 64 Secure Web Access Terms Term Definition certificate authority CA Third party organization or company that issues digital certificates used to create digital signatures and public private key pairs The CA guarantees the identity of the individual or device that presents the digital certificate Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP Protocol used to publish and receive information on the Web such as text and graphics files Secure Web Access Terms WM 153 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 64 Secure Web Access Terms continued Term Definition Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Sockets Layer HTTPS Protocol similar to HTTP with an added encryption layer that encrypts and decrypts user page requests and pages that are returned by a Web server HTTPS is used for secure communication such as payment transactions Privacy Enhanced Mail PEM Technique for securely exchanging electronic mail over a public medium PEM is based upon public key infrastructure PKI standards like X 509 certificates SSL certificates are partly based on PEM and end in the suffix pem RSA Public key cipher that can be used for encrypting messages and making digital signatures RSA uses a well known encryption and authentication algorithm tha
126. Basics and Services Command Reference eS NOTE In the show chassis fpc pic status command the PIM slot number is reported as an FPC number and the PIM number always 0 is reported as a PIC number For more information about network interface naming see J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers 176 nm On J2520 and J2350 routers the chassis cover fits tightly on the chassis To remove the cover from the chassis 1 Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off 2 Remove the power cable from the power source receptacle 5 With a Phillips screwdriver remove the grounding screw 4 Remove the router from the rack Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components 5 With a Phillips screwdriver remove the flat head screws from the rear and sides of the chassis 6 Position the router so that you face the front panel 7 Place your hands on the cover and press down while pushing the cover back until the two front tabs disengage from the chassis base see Figure 75 on page 177 Figure 75 Sliding the Chassis Cover 8 Lift the cover upward and pull it away from the tabs on the rear of the chassis see Figure 76 on page 177 Figure 76 Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover 9004129 Angle the cover
127. Conditions and Corrective Actions Component Alarm Conditions Corrective Action Alarm Severity Alternative boot media The Services Router boots from Typically the router boots from the Yellow minor an alternative boot device internal compact flash If you configured your router to boot from an alternative boot device ignore this alarm condition If you did not configure the router to boot from an alternative boot device contact JTAC See Requesting Technical Support on page xxi Chassis Alarm Conditions m 209 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 70 Chassis Alarm Conditions and Corrective Actions continued Component Alarm Conditions Corrective Action Alarm Severity PIM A PIM has failed Replace the failed PIM See Red major Replacing a PIM on page 172 When a PIM fails it attempts to reboot If the Routing Engine detects that a PIM is rebooting too often it shuts down the PIM Routing Engine An error occurred during the Reformat the compact flash and Yellow minor process of reading or writing install a bootable image See the compact flash J series Services Router Administration Guide If this remedy fails you must replace the failed Routing Engine To contact JTAC see Requesting Technical Support on page xxi Routing Engine temperature is m Check the room temperature Yellow minor too warm See Router Environment
128. DHCP lease after initial CORFIBUTAOTL o Asa esl EE di 145 through WED tese Tete hee ds 157 through the CLl locally eret 159 through the CLI remotely ueneno 141 connector pinouts TIMSO8 EE 241 TIM S16 DOES cou Rae ehe peter eed 242 TIMS TS e id dede dae b uen eed CE S 244 console port adapter chaselei 159 142 adapter TGM550 ista delete eet 70 auxiliary console port 25 56 connecting through the CLI locally 159 connecting through the CLI remotely 141 GESCHIP LON ano cmt tees tet nee un b do Deg 25 56 on chassis DB 9 connector pinouts 255 on chassis RJ 45 connector pinouts 234 on TGM550 DB 9 connector pinouts 259 on TGM550 RJ 45 connector pinouts 259 replacing the cable iiss rst teet tee 172 settings for local CLI Connection 140 settings for modem connection at router for remote CLI ACCESS i e stehe door 142 settings for modem connection for remote CLI ACCESS eos Meroe e E T 145 contairier statements tte tet tn deer 94 conventions Tfiow to use this guide e eroi xvi NOTICE ICONS iio di esr e ay peregre xvii text and Syntax cesi RP e oti xvii cooling system airflow regulrerment ere 105 description aetate puse iade ten eoe 25 58 Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs A a n IR Ere qe eren 52 Ee EI 234 Copper Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs OVEIVICW edd pitt ia 49 A feele ge beer 233 cords See
129. DM calls Announcements VAL 16 playback channels for playing announcements one of which can be used for recording 20 minutes for G711 quality stored announcements and music on hold 256 maximum announcements stored CAUTION Some capacities may change For the most recent list see the Avaya manual System Capacities Table for Avaya Communication Manager on Avaya Media Servers For pinouts of the TGM550 RJ 45 console connector see TGM550 Console Port Pinouts on page 259 For pinouts of cable connectors for the TGM550 analog ports see TGM550 RJ 11 Connector Pinout for Analog Ports on page 240 To install or remove an Avaya VoIP module see Replacing a PIM on page 172 TGM550 LEDs indicate link status and activity Table 57 on page 72 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 37 LEDs for TGM550 Gateway Module Label Color State Description ALM Red On steadily Alarm A failure in the TGM550 requires monitoring or maintenance ACT Yellow On steadily Active The TGM550 is online with network traffic ASB Green On steadily Alternate software bank The software is not running from the selected boot bank ETR Green On steadily Emergency transfer relay ETR feature is active 72 WW Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview For more information about the TGM550 see the Avaya manual Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager TIM508 Anal
130. EE EE 242 TIM514 possible Conftgurations 76 TIM516 possible Conftgurations 77 TIM518 possible Conftgurations 78 analog trunk TRUNK ports TGM550 pinouts ee ee E 240 TIM508 possible Conftgurations 73 TIM514 pinouts traia 242 TIM514 possible Conftgurations 76 TIM516 possible Conftgurations 77 TIM518 possible Conftgurations 78 Annex A Annex B See ADSL SHDSL antistatic IMAL iA e eisdem d ere ee tina 251 Apply DUttOT as ten bete ec t ertet tt 88 approvals AGENCY Hoy sides sisi egene tases eee sees mie frt 282 EE 72 asymmetric digital subscriber line See ADSL AT modem commands coa Eegen Pp ATADI modem command AT amp KO modem command ATAW modem command 2 ATDT modem Commande ATSO 1 modem command eerte 142 AUX POLE sists Eeer tele 23 36 auxiliary Console e 23 36 Avaya 1G550 Integrated Gateway See Avaya VoIP modules Avaya VoIP modules CONMECUOF PINOULS ere ue eege mete eet 239 grounding 10 AWG replacement cable 66 heat dissipation 112 LEDs See LEDs Don bot swappabiltv OV EEVIC T power CONSUMPTION 000 eee eee He power management Olanmnimg power management troubleshooting requlrermerits o ott t sito ete e t eer TGM550 maximum gateway capacities ER El EE PENIS DAE E ues TIMO Oti Rer ipei es Sesto etr As EE IMS EE 292 m index B backup compact flash removing ssssss 1
131. FH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground 60 2 59 Transmit Data A 1 3 2 Receive Data A 48 4 47 Request to Send A 37 5 38 Clear to Send A 9 6 Data Set Ready A 57 Y Signal Ground 15 8 14 Received Line Signal Detector A 6 9 5 Receive Clock B 14 0 13 Received Line Signal Detector B 51 1 52 Terminal Timing B 55 2 56 Transmit Clock B 38 3 37 Clear to Send B 59 4 60 Transmit Data B 56 5 55 Transmit Clock A 2 6 1 Receive Data B 5 17 6 Receive Clock A 41 18 Local Loopback 47 19 48 Request to Send B 33 20 Data Terminal Ready A 4 25 Signal Ground 52 24 51 Terminal Timing A 26 to 25 50 to 29 i 18to 17 e 228 1H Serial PIM Cable Specifications EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinout Table 77 EIA 530A DCE Cable Pinout Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts LFH 60 Pin DB 25 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 1 Shield Ground 1 2 2 Transmit Data A 60 3 59 Receive Data A 37 4 38 Request to Send A 48 5 47 Clear to Send A 33 6 Data Set Ready A 57 7 Signal Ground 15 8 14 Received Line Signal Detector A 51 9 52 Receive Clock B 14 0 15 Received Line Signal Detector B 6 1 5 Terminal Timing B 55 2 56 Transmit Clock B 47 3 48 Clear to Send B 2 4 1 Transmit Data B 56 5 55 Transmit Clock A 59 6 60 Receive Data B 52 7 51 Recei
132. GE Base PIC FPC 6 REV 00 750 015152 FPC PIC 0 6x GE SFP uPIM Xcvr 0 NON JNPR PC14DP3 SFP SX Xcvr 2 NON JNPR PC21M3E SFP SX Power Supply 0 If Crypto Module appears in the output the Crypto Accelerator Module is installed correctly Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers The Crypto Accelerator Module is a processor card that enhances performance of cryptographic algorithms used in IP security IPSec services The Crypto Module is a standard feature on J6350 Services Routers and an optional feature on the J4350 Services Routers Figure 98 on page 202 shows the location of the Crypto Accelerator Module Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers m 201 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 98 Crypto Accelerator Module Location on J4350 and J6350 Routers Crypto Accelerator Module T 9003836 o modify a Crypto Accelerator Module configuration use the following procedures Removing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 202 Installing a J4550 or j6550 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 204 Removing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Accelerator Module 202 m C NOTE If you are installing a Crypto Accelerator M
133. Iesse rp 111 electrical 2s oet e tute aeta 109 environmental Ju ias 106 grounding cable 1 ie teret tnnt 125 12320 hard Watts eq eti et e tutus 17 125350 Mee 17 Index 4350 hardware ias temen ettet 30 6350 hardware Mare ee et ee les 30 serial PIM cables and Commectorg 223 SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 00 cece 54 SFP Gigabit Ethernet UPIMS ooocnncccnncciciocccconnnos 52 SRE application oorr c eed 42 SSH defining configuration dito 148 defining access Quick Configuration 146 management S CHEREN 156 SSL Secure Sockets Layer enabling secure access Quick Configuration eden be epe e t 155 management access 154 verifying SSL configuration eee 159 SSL 3 0 option disabling on Internet Explorer for worldwide version of JUNOS software 83 SSL certificates adding configuration dito 159 adding Quick Conftguraton 157 generating utere tatc Zeg derit eus 155 sample wonfiguratiori e tette testet tes 159 verifying SSL Conftguratton eee 159 Standards compliance wiht diets Mer eek ot es 282 startup J Web interface JUNOS CED 2n ne Services QUIET sioe d ee at ie eio o des 129 Standby ee 129 statements configuration Dpes 94 Status license Key tecto ress etg pat sott pts 165 jolie E 21 34 See also STATUS LEDs STATUS LEDs le RL Dee 65 channelized El porte 58 Channelized TI ports sees eege feo nettes de 58 BOTS se tie NEE 57 ES elei
134. In your Web browser type http URL or http IP address m For HTTPS access In your Web browser type https URL or https IP address m For SSL JUNOScript access A JUNOScript client such as JUNOScope is required For information about how to log in to JUNOScope see the JUNOScope Software User Guide 4 To verify the secure Web access configuration see Verifying Secure Web Access on page 159 Table 65 Secure Access Quick Configuration Summary Field Function Your Action Certificates Certificates Displays digital certificates required for SSL access to the Services Router Allows you to add and delete SSL certificates For information about how to generate an SSL certificate see Generating SSL Certificates on page 155 To add a certificate 1 Click Add Opens the Add a Local Certificate page 2 Type a name in the Certificate Name box for example new 3 Paste the generated certificate and RSA private key in the Certificate box To delete a certificate select it and click Delete HTTP Web Access Enable HTTP Access Enables HTTP access on interfaces To enable HTTP access select the Enable HTTP access check box Enable HTTP on All Interfaces Enables HTTP access on all interfaces at one time To enable HTTP access on all interfaces select the Enable HTTP on All Interfaces check box HTTP Enabled Specifies interfaces on which you want
135. J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Release 9 2 Juniper Networks Inc 1194 North Mathilda Avenue Sunnyvale California 94089 USA 408 745 2000 www juniper net Part Number 530 025360 01 Revision 1 This product includes the Envoy SNMP Engine developed by Epilogue Technology an Integrated Systems Company Copyright 1986 1997 Epilogue Technology Corporation All rights reserved This program and its documentation were developed at private expense and no part of them is in the public domain This product includes memory allocation software developed by Mark Moraes copyright 1988 1989 1993 University of Toronto This product includes FreeBSD software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors All of the documentation and software included in the 4 4BSD and 4 4BSD Lite Releases is copyrighted by the Regents of the University of California Copyright 1979 1980 1983 1986 1988 989 1991 1992 1993 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved GateD software copyright 1995 the Regents of the University All rights reserved Gate Daemon was originated and developed through release 3 0 by Cornell University and its collaborators Gated is based on Kirton s EGP UC Berkeley s routing daemon routed and DCN s HELLO routing protocol Development of Gated has been supported in part by the National Science Foundation Portion
136. J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 13 and J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 26 To connect the DC power cable during initial installation see Connecting DC Power on page 126 To replace a DC power cable see Replacing DC Power Supply Cables on page 194 Planning for Power Management 112 nm Before you install a chassis or add a new PIM to an existing chassis verify that the combination of PIMs to be installed does not exceed the power and heat capacities for that model Add the low power tokens high power tokens and heat tokens required by each PIM and compare them to the capacity of the chassis NOTE The low power and high power correspond to a specific voltage for that PIM CAUTION Do not install a combination of PIMs in a single chassis that exceeds the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis If J series power management is enabled PIMs that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis is powered on To verify that the combination of PIMs to be installed in a chassis does not exceed the power and heat capacities for that model 1 Check Table 57 on page 115 to determine the token values for low power high power and heat for each PIM that you plan to install in the chassis 2 For all PIMs to be installed in the chassis a Add the low power tokens for all PIMs to be installed in the chassis b Add the h
137. J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 15 m J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 26 m Software Overview on page 39 J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features This section contains the following topics m J2320 and J2350 Chassis on page 13 m J2320 and J2350 Midplane on page 18 m J2320 and J2350 Routing Engine Hardware on page 18 m j2520 and J2350 Boot Devices on page 19 m J2320 and J2350 Front Panel on page 19 m 2520 and 2550 External Compact Flashes on page 24 m J2320 Power System on page 24 m J2350 Power System on page 24 m J2320 and J2350 Cooling System on page 25 J2320 and J2350 Chassis The J2320 and J2350 chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses all the other router components see Figure 1 on page 14 through Figure 7 on page 17 The chassis can be installed in many types of racks or cabinets For information about acceptable rack types see Rack Requirements on page 104 J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features m L J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide In addition to the components described in subsequent sections the chassis includes the following components mw Mounting brackets One pair of metal brackets can be mounted at the front or center of the chassis for mounting the chassis in a rack or cabinet m Earthing terminal A protective earthing terminal and a PEM nut at the rear of the chassi
138. Ms supported on J2320 and J2350 Services Routers The supported PIMs can be installed in any slot available on the J2320 and J2350 routers CAUTION Do not install a combination of PIMs in a single chassis that exceeds the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis If J series power management is enabled PIMs that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis is powered on To verify that the combination of PIMs to be installed in a chassis does not exceed the power and heat capacities for the J2320 or J2350 router see Planning for Power Management on page 112 NOTE Although J2320 and J2350 Services Routers support PIMs that were introduced before the JUNOS 8 4 release these routers do not support software releases earlier than JUNOS 8 4 Field Replaceable PIMs Table 19 J2320 and J2350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Supported Software Releases Sample Interface Name PIM for This PIM Port Numbering type pim 0 port 1 Port SFP 6 Port SFP JUNOS 8 4 and later Ports ge 2 0 0 8 Port and 16 Port d Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs m O through 5 m 0 through 7 m Othrough 15 Dual Port Serial PIM JUNOS 8 4 and later Ports 0 and 1 se 3 0 1 Dual Port T1 or E1 PIM JUNOS 8 4 and later Ports 0 and 1 t1 0 0 1 or e1 0 0 1 Dual Port Channelized JUNOS 8 4 and later Ports 0 and 1 ct1 0 0 0 T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM ce1 0 0 0 4 Port ISDN BRI
139. NG Warnung Bevor Sie an einem Chassis oder in der Nahe von Netzger ten arbeiten ziehen Sie bei Wechselstromeinheiten das Netzkabel ab bzw WARNING Avvertenza Prima di lavorare su un telaio o intorno ad alimentatori scollegare il cavo di alimentazione sulle unit CA WARNING Advarsel Fer det utfores arbeid pa kabinettet eller det arbeides i naerheten av stramforsyningsenheter skal str mledningen trekkes ut p vekselstromsenheter Pb bb WARNING Aviso Antes de trabalhar num chassis ou antes de trabalhar perto de unidades de fornecimento de energia desligue o cabo de alimenta o nas unidades de corrente alternada Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 263 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 264 m WARNING Atenci n Antes de manipular el chasis de un equipo o trabajar cerca de una fuente de alimentaci n desenchufar el cable de alimentaci n en los equipos de corriente alterna CA WARNING Varning Innan du arbetar med ett chassi eller nara str mf rs rjningsenheter skall du for v xelstr msenheter dra ur n tsladden TN Power Warning WARNING The router is designed to work with a TN power system WARNING Waarschuwing Het apparaat is ontworpen om te functioneren met TN energiesystemen WARNING Varoitus Koje on suunniteltu toimimaan TN s hk voimaj rjestelmien yhteydess WARNING Attention Ce dispositif a t concu pour f
140. NOS Interfaces Command Reference m JUNOS Routing Protocols and Policies Command Reference Configuring Packet Capture JUNOS Services Interfaces Configuration Guide Configuring RPM Probes JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference Documentation Feedback We encourage you to provide feedback comments and suggestions so that we can improve the documentation You can send your comments to techpubs comments juniper net or fill out the documentation feedback form at http www juniper net techpubs docbug docbugreport html If you are using e mail be sure to include the following information with your comments m Document name m Document part number m Page number m Software release version not required for Network Operations Guides NOGs Requesting Technical Support Technical product support is available through the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center JTAC If you are a customer with an active J Care or JNASC support contract or are covered under warranty and need postsales technical support you can access our tools and resources online or open a case with JTAC m JTAC policies For a complete understanding of our JTAC procedures and policies review the JTAC User Guide located at http www juniper net customers support downloads 710059 pdf Documentation Feedback W xxi J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide xxii m Product warranties For prod
141. NOS VPNs Configuration Guide Configuring Signaling Protocols for Traffic Engineering Configuring Virtual Private Networks Configuring CLNS VPNs Configuring IPSec for Secure Packet Exchange m JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide JUNOS Services Interfaces Configuration Guide JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference Multicast Overview m JUNOS Multicast Protocols Configuration Guide JUNOS Routing Protocols and Policies Command Reference Configuring a Multicast Network Configuring Data Link Switching m JUNOS Services Interfaces Configuration Guide JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference Policy Framework Overview m JUNOS Policy Framework Configuration Guide JUNOS Routing Protocols and Policies Command Reference Configuring Routing Policies Configuring NAT m JUNOS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide m JUNOS Policy Framework Configuration Guide Configuri ful Fi 11 Fil NAT ontiguring Statelu Firewall Filters and m JUNOS Services Interfaces Configuration Guide Configuring Stateless Firewall Filters m Secure Configuration Guide for Common Criteria and JUNOS FIPS JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference JUNOS Routing Protocols and Policies Command Reference Class of Service Overview m JUNOS Class of Service Configuration Guide JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference Configuring Class of Service J series Services
142. OTE You might find this information helpful in a particular situation or might otherwise overlook it A CAUTION You need to observe the specified guidelines to avoid minor injury or discomfort to you or severe damage to the Services Router A WARNING This symbol means danger You are in a situation that could cause bodily injury Before you work on any equipment be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents A WARNING Waarschuwing Dit waarschuwingssymbool betekent gevaar U verkeert in een situatie die lichamelijk letsel kan veroorzaken Voordat u aan enige apparatuur gaat werken dient u zich bewust te zijn van de bij elektrische schakelingen betrokken Definition of Safety Warning Levels M 247 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 248 m risico s en dient u op de hoogte te zijn van standaard maatregelen om ongelukken te voorkomen WARNING Varoitus T m varoitusmerkki merkitsee vaaraa Olet tilanteessa joka voi johtaa ruumiinvammaan Ennen kuin ty skentelet mink n laitteiston parissa ota selv s hk kytkent ihin liittyvist vaaroista ja tavanomaisista onnettomuuksien ehk isykeinoista WARNING Attention Ce symbole d avertissement indique un danger Vous vous trouvez dans une situation pouvant causer des blessures ou des dommages corporels Avant de travailler sur un quipement so
143. PIM m Dual Port El PIM m Dual Port TI PIM m Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM m E3 PIM 1 port m DS3 T3 PIM 1 port m Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM m 4 port Fast Ethernet ePIM m 4 port ISDN BRI S T or U PIM m ADSL 2 2 Annex A PIM 1 port m ADSL 2 2 Annex B PIM 1 port m GSHDSL PIM 2 ports m TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module m TIM508 Analog Telephony Interface Module 8 ports m TIM510 E1 TI Telephony Interface Module 1 port m TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module 4 ports m TIM516 Analog Telephony Interface Module 16 ports m TIM518 Analog Telephony Interface Module 16 ports a TIM521 ISDN BRI Telephony Interface Module 4 ports J6350 Services Router Overview 6 m The 6550 Services Router is designed primarily for regional or central offices It has a chassis that is 2 U rack units in size with an optional redundant AC or DC power supply up to 2 GB of memory and two universal serial bus USB ports for external storage The J6350 Services Router is a higher performance system than the J4350 Services Router J6350 routers come standard with 1 GB of memory and can be upgraded to 2 GB of memory For instructions on adding memory see Replacing DRAM Modules on page 188 Each J6350 chassis contains four built in Gigabit Ethernet ports with link speeds of 10 100 1000 Mbps over a copper interface and six slots for field replaceable Physical Interface Modules PIMs and Avaya VoIP m
144. PUERER ete tete Eeer 75 defining Quick Configuration ssss 146 TIM514 Dk State gelt ct lent Neth 76 A tts ete tuts rated ee sath ets 154 TIMS5T6 linK SUtatUS den dcp nte rerit TT LX transceiver TIM518 link status TIM521 link status Gigabit Ethernet ePIM Gigabit Ethernet uPIM TST test TX RX license infringement M identifying any licenses needed 165 main parie FWebu iina tete rete eee nens 85 verifying license usage 167 maintenance verifying licenses Jnstalled ee 166 AC power cord replacing 191 license keys ciii E 206 COMPONEN e petes tuts ee ee ibo abad tareas 162 console port cable Chassis 172 displaying LI dee enero AEE eet 167 Crypto Accelerator Module 198 201 Index mM 301 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide DC power cable replacing DRAM modules external compact flash internal compact flash P PIM bles ceti iia poWer SySterm an Soest id e est egenis tools and parts reouired USB Storage device natem cot etes Ed eee hrec dedi e ERR major red alarms NS CA oe rete 210 management ACCESS crederet ids erede uda 155 management device connecting through the CL 141 connecting to web 157 159 management interface address after initial configuration 154 before initial conftguratton 154 defining configuration editort 150 defining Quick Configurat
145. RJ 48 Pin on T2 E1 PIM DB 15 Pin Data Numbering Data Numbering Form Form Signal 1 11 RX Ring gt RX Ring 2 5 RX Tip lt gt RX Tip 4 9 TX Ring gt TX Ring 5 1 TX Tip lt gt TX Tip 5 4 Shield Return Ground 6 2 Shield Return Ground 7 o connect o connect 8 o connect o connect 9 o connect o connect 10 o connect o connect 11 o connect o connect 12 o connect o connect 13 o connect o connect 14 o connect o connect 15 o connect o connect Table 90 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Crossover Pinout RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 PIM DB 15 Pin Data Numbering Data Numbering Form Form Signal 1 9 RX Ring lt gt TX Ring 2 1 RX Tip TX Tip 4 11 TX Ring gt RX Ring 5 5 TX Tip lt gt RX Tip 5 4 Shield Return Ground 6 2 Shield Return Ground E1 and T1 R48 Cable Pinouts m 237 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 90 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Crossover Pinout continued DB 15 Pin RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 PIM Data Numbering Data Numbering Form Form Signal 7 o connect o connect 8 o connect o connect 9 o connect o connect 10 o connect o connect 11 o connect o connect 12 o connect o connect 15 o connect o connect 14 o connect o connect 15 o connect o connect
146. Replacing Hardware Components Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers The internal compact flash is installed in a slot on the bottom of the J4350 or J6350 chassis see Figure 81 on page 181 ES NOTE Use only compact flash cards purchased from Juniper Networks for your J series platform and model Figure 81 Location of J4350 and J6350 Compact Flash Compact flash drive Y Al N ON OOOOO0o0o00 Oooo0o0o0o00 i Dg nu BZD q QS NO ES e 9003842 On some J4350 and J6350 Services Routers the compact flash is in a horizontal position while on others it is in a vertical position Figure 82 on page 182 shows the alternative horizontal orientation of the compact flash Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers m 181 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 182 m Figure 82 Alternative Horizontal Orientation of J4350 and J6350 Compact Flash H Compact flash drive ooo0o000g0 200000000 a D a wm S e 0 Es o DU ER o o SON vn penna dat Barn ang one noch
147. Requirements on page 104 WARNING If you are installing multiple routers in one rack install the lowest one first and proceed upward in the rack Install heavier routers in the lower part of the rack The router must be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack WARNING The chassis weighs between 23 Ib 10 4 kg and 30 7 Ib 13 9 kg Read and follow the lifting guidelines in Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 266 To install the J4350 and J6350 router into a rack 1 Attach the mounting brackets to the sides of the chassis see Figure 58 on page 121 You can position the brackets either in the center or the front Positioning the brackets in the center offers greater stability Figure 58 Installing the Mounting Brackets 9008860 N N 2 Attach a screw to each rack rail in the third hole down from where you want the top of the router to be positioned Screw only part way in leaving about in 6 mm distance between the screw head and the rail see Figure 59 on page 122 Installing J4350 and J6350 Routers m 121 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 59 Attaching Center Screw to the Rack Rail Seen TZ placed in center hole 29 D 28 1RU rack unit measurement 9003861 5 Lift the router and insert the larger elliptical openings in the mounting brackets onto the partially inserted screws so that the router
148. Router Administration Guide Managing User Authentication and Access m JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Secure Configuration Guide for Common Criteria and JUNOS FIPS Setting Up USB Modems for Remote Management JUNOS Network Management Configuration Guide Configuring SNMP for Network Management Configuring the Router as a DHCP Server JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Configuring Autoinstallation Automating Network Operations and Troubleshooting JUNOS Configuration and Diagnostic Automation Guide XX MH Related Juniper Networks Documentation About This Guide Table 4 J series Guides and Related JUNOS Software Publications continued Chapter in a J series Guide Corresponding JUNOS Software Manual Monitoring the Router and Routing Operations JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference JUNOS Interfaces Command Reference JUNOS Routing Protocols and Policies Command Reference Monitoring Events and Managing System Log Files JUNOS System Log Messages Reference Secure Configuration Guide for Common Criteria and JUNOS FIPS Configuring and Monitoring Alarms JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Performing Software Upgrades and Reboots JUNOS Software Installation and Upgrade Guide Managing Files JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Using Services Router Diagnostic Tools m JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference m JU
149. SB storage devices see the J series Services Router Release Notes at http www juniper net J2320 and J2350 External Compact Flashes On J2320 and J2350 routers an external compact flash also known as removable compact flash accepts a type I or II compact flash as defined in the CompactFlash Specification published by the CompactFlash Association The J2320 and J2350 chassis has a slot on the rear for external compact flashes see Figure 5 on page 15 When the external compact flash is installed and configured it automatically acts as the secondary boot device if the internal compact flash fails on startup Depending on the capacity of the external compact flash you can also configure it to receive any core files generated during a failure For information about configuring an external compact flash see the J series Services Router Administration Guide J2320 Power System The J2520 Services Router uses AC power see Figure 5 on page 15 The autosensing power supply distributes the different output voltages to the router components according to their voltage requirements The power supply is fixed in the chassis and is not field replaceable The AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet that requires a dedicated AC power feed The J2320 AC powered chassis has a power switch and does not include a power LED For information about site power preparations see Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications on page 10
150. See J Web interface grounding Avaya VoIP 10 AWG replacement cable 66 CAD Sis MP 123 O E tent bod iet ded 123 DC power requirements and warning 257 equipment wa rmimg 260 grounding lug COMMECUING a s eines Aat e aie ap 125 127 group licenses egisti i bate eet des 165 GUI See J Web interface H HA high availability LED 22 54 hardware alarm conditions and remedies Avaya VoIP module overview T installation and Connection r alnternarnce soc e ueste dee PIM Overview a eive odo Od ere Pede 45 product ONeTvlew cono aiiin iia 3 replacing components 171 Index EU ates teet eee troubleshooting components See also LEDs hardware features Avaya VOIP modules eei tete 66 COMPONENTS asi do du the eed ed i A Los 50 front panely asd eate b 19 32 PIMS void id ld 43 product oVervie Wstore e e e ette 5 Hayes compatible modem See modem connection to router console port heat dissipation PIMs RE 112 troubleshooting tereti ette 210 help apropos Commande 97 Help CO Mist od e healt hes 86 89 help reference commande 97 help topic COM Madrona ie BE ari 97 Help J Webinterface E 85 89 Help JUNOS EL uie ET 97 high availability HA LED 22 34 high speed interfaces See ePIMs high speed slots for ePIMs Jocaton eee 33 Ve 132 defining configuration dito 148 defining Quick Conftguration ee 145 OVeI VIE Wire eet iste dits eet bote eet 132 See also DNS server
151. Services Router on page 117 m Gather the following information Hostname for the router on the network m Domain that the router belongs to on the network m Password for the root user m Time zone where the router is located m IP address of an NTP server if NTP is used to set the time on the router m IP address of a DNS server m List of domains that can be appended to hostnames for DNS resolution m IP address of the default gateway m IP address to be used for the loopback interface m IP address of the built in Ethernet interface that you will use for management purposes The examples in this guide use the ge 0 0 0 interface m If you are performing the initial configuration with the J Web interface collect the following equipment m Amanagement device such as a laptop with an Ethernet port m An Ethernet cable provided m If you are performing the initial configuration with the CLI collect the following equipment Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity m A management device such as a PC or laptop with a serial port and an asynchronous terminal application such as Microsoft Windows Hyperterminal m An RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter provided m An Ethernet cable provided m Foraremote connection two dial up modems m Foraremote modem connection a DB 9 female to DB 25 male adapter or other adapter appropriate for your modem not provided Connecting to a Services Router You can connect to the
152. Services Router using the J Web or CLI interface This section contains the following topics Connecting to the J Web Interface on page 157 Connecting to the CLI Locally on page 159 Connecting to the CLI Remotely on page 141 Connecting to the J Web Interface If you plan to use the J Web interface to configure the Services Router you must connect through one of the built in Ethernet management ports as shown in Figure 67 on page 158 and Figure 68 on page 159 When the Services Router is powered on for the first time the system looks for a DHCP server and if it does not find one it assigns an IP address within the 192 168 1 0 24 subnetwork to any devices connected to it To connect to the J Web interface through port 0 on the router see Figure 67 on page 158 and Figure 68 on page 159 1 On the management device such as a PC or laptop you use to access the J Web interface verify that the address of the port that you connect to the router is set to one of the following m An Ethernet address on the 192 168 1 24 subnetwork other than 192 168 1 1 m An Ethernet address from a DHCP server Turn off the power to the management device Plug one end of the Ethernet cable into the Ethernet port on the management device Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the built in Ethernet port on the router Power on the router by pressing the power button on the front panel Wait until the STATUS LED on the front panel tu
153. Storage Devices USB storage devices are optional components on J series Services Routers If installed a USB storage device provides secondary storage for the router It can accommodate software images configuration files and microcode If the internal compact flash fails on startup and the external compact flash is not installed or fails the router boots from the USB storage device For information about configuring the USB storage device see the J series Services Router Administration Guide NOTE For a list of supported USB storage devices see the J series Services Router Release Notes at http www juniper net To remove and install a USB storage device perform the following procedures m Removing the USB Storage Device on page 186 m Installing the USB Storage Device on page 187 Removing the USB Storage Device 186 m a NOTE Depending on your configuration the Services Router might not have a USB storage device If no USB storage device is installed proceed directly to Installing the USB Storage Device on page 187 The USB storage device is installed into the USB port on the front panel of the Services Router To remove the USB storage device Replacing USB Storage Devices Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components 1 Verify the device that the router used to boot by running the show system storage command from the CLI For example user host gt show system storage Filesystem 512 blocks Used
154. T NUMBER SLOT NUMBER 1 2 1 3 3 2 4 3 E Power Button and POWER LED The power button is located on the left side of the front panel see Figure 1 on page 14 You can use the power button to power the Services Router on and off When you power on the router the Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence The POWER LED is located to the upper left of the LED dashboard Table 7 on page 21 describes the POWER LED J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview Table 7 J2320 and J2350 POWER LED Color State Description Green On steadily Power is functioning correctly Blinking Power button has been pressed and quickly released and the router is gracefully shutting down Unlit Off Router is not receiving power After the router is powered on status indicators such as LEDs on the front panel and show chassis command output can take up to 60 seconds to indicate that the power supply is functioning normally Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds If you need to power off the router after the Routing Engine finishes booting use the J Web interface or the CLI to halt the Services Router first For instructions see the Jrseries Services Router Administration Guide Alternatively you can press and release the power button to gracefully shut down the router For more information see Powering a Services Router On and Off on
155. TEE 60 SON e EE 63 TOUTE Sta iiu deo bt e idee 21 55 ee 55 SHDSE BOFIS2 2 eee epe e eb aote tds 66 a D Lee 57 T3 Lee 60 storage media replacing the external compact flash 184 replacing the internal compact flash 178 181 replacing the USB storage device ocio 186 support technical See technical support SX transceiver Gigabit Ethernet ePIM c coincida terne 54 Gigabit Ethernet PIM ei reir iens 52 symmetric high speed digital subscriber line See SHDSL Syntax CONVENIOS e ori edere e ep eed pes xvii Index mM 307 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide system overview hardWate bu eb AULAM ee Ee 15 software 39 system time defining Quick Configuratont 146 GE 155 synchronizing configuration editor 149 synchronizing Quick Configuration 145 T T1 ports description x eee e eee 56 See also channelized T1 ports EE StItE S EEE eegen 57 RJ 48 cable pinouts oscitans 235 T1 trunk ports TIM510 descriptione eorr py rer etes 74 PINUS era ac 241 T1 E1 media module See TIM508 See TIM510 See TIM516 See TIM518 T3 ports BNC connector pinouts des cEIDUOTI atte cor og totu LED States rotes eo rrt exero LASK DANS naar E technical support contactine TAG dian dr tbe e eg ed xxi contacting JTAC for hardware return 216 information required for hardware return 216 telecommunications line wire gaug
156. THE SOFTWARE OR ANY JUNIPER OR JUNIPER SUPPLIED SOFTWARE IN NO EVENT SHALL JUNIPER BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM UNAUTHORIZED OR IMPROPER USE OF ANY JUNIPER OR JUNIPER SUPPLIED SOFTWARE EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THE WARRANTY STATEMENT TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW JUNIPER DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES IN AND TO THE SOFTWARE WHETHER EXPRESS IMPLIED STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT DOES JUNIPER WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE OR ANY EQUIPMENT OR NETWORK RUNNING THE SOFTWARE WILL OPERATE WITHOUT ERROR OR INTERRUPTION OR WILL BE FREE OF VULNERABILITY TO INTRUSION OR ATTACK In no event shall Juniper s or its suppliers or licensors liability to Customer whether in contract tort including negligence breach of warranty or otherwise exceed the price paid by Customer for the Software that gave rise to the claim or if the Software is embedded in another Juniper product the price paid by Customer for such other product Customer acknowledges and agrees that Juniper has set its prices and entered into this Agreement in reliance upon the disclaimers of warranty and the limitations of liability set forth herein that the same reflect an allocation of risk between the Parties including the risk that a contract remedy may fail of its essential purpose and cause consequential loss and that the same form an essential basis of the bargai
157. TI E1 ISDN PRI PIM E3 PIM 1 port JX 1E3 S 1xE3 7 B 7 T3 PIM also JX 1DS3 S 1xT3 7 7 known as DS5 Dual Port Fast JX 2FE TX S 2xFE 6 1 6 Ethernet PIM 4 Port Fas JXE 4FE TX S 4xFE ePIM 9 9 Ethernet ePIM 4 Port ISDN BRI JX 4BRI S S 4x BRI S T 4 pa 4 S T PIM 4 Port ISDN BRIU JX 4BRI U S 4x BRI U 4 6 PIM ADSL 2 2 JX 1ADSL A S 1x ADSL Annex A 16 2 16 Annex A PIM 1 port for POTS Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications mH 113 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 57 J series PIM Power Consumption and Heat Dissipation continued Name Model Number PIM Abbreviation Tokens In JUNOS CH Low Power High Power Heat ADSL 2 2 JX 1ADSL B S 1x ADSL Annex B 16 2 16 Annex B PIM 1 port for ISDN G SHDSL PIM JX 2SHDSL S 2x SHDSL ATM 9 10 2 port two wire mode or 1 port four wire mode TGM550 Avaya 1x TGM550 15 7 18 Telephony Gateway Module TIM508 Telephony Avaya 8x FXS TIM508 4 25 17 Interface Module TIM510 E1 T1 Avaya 1x DS1 TIM510 6 5 Telephony Interface Module TIM514 Analog Avaya 4x FXS AxFXO 4 13 12 Telephony TIM514 Interface Module TIM516 Analog Avaya 16x FXS TIM516 6 19 22 Telephony Interface Module TIM518 Analog Avaya 8x FXS 8xFXO 6 25 20 Telephony TIM518 Interface Module TIM521 BRI Avaya 4x BRI TIM521 2 2 Telephony Interface Module Table 58 on page 114 lists the maximum power tokens and maximum h
158. The router has detected a failure Yellow On steadily m Loopback mode T3 DS3 Remote endpoint is in red alarm failure m E5 Remote defect indication RDI Unlit Off Offline For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM 60 The Dual Port 10 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet PIM Figure 34 on page 60 has two physical Fast Ethernet ports Figure 34 Fast Ethernet PIM 9002326 The Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM provides the following key features m Onboard network processor m Full duplex and half duplex modes m Media access control MAC address filtering m Autonegotiation through medium dependent interface MDI and MDI crossover MDI X support For pinouts of cable connectors for Fast Ethernet PIMs see Fast Ethernet RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 255 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 172 Fast Ethernet LEDs indicate link status port speed and activity Table 29 on page 61 describes the meaning of the LEDs Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Table 29 LEDs for Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM Label Color State Description LINK SPEED Green 100 Mbps On steadily Online and link is active Yellow 10 Mbps Red Disconnected Link is unavailable ACTIVITY Green Blinking Online with network traffic Green On steadily Online without
159. These instructions use Hayes compatible modem commands to configure the modem If your modem is not Hayes compatible refer to the documentation for your modem and enter equivalent modem commands Before you can connect a dial up modem to the console port on the Services Router you must configure the modem to accept a call on the first ring and accept Data Terminal Ready DTR signals You must also disable flow control on the modem To configure the modem on the router end 1 Connect the modem to a PC or laptop computer 2 Power on the modem Connecting to a Services Router m 141 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 142 m From the PC or laptop computer start your asynchronous terminal emulation application such as Microsoft Windows Hyperterminal and select the COM port to which the modem is connected for example COM1 Configure the port settings as follows m Bits per second 9600 m Data bits 8 m Parity None m Stop bits 1 m Flow control None In the HyperTerminal window enter AT An OK response verifies that the modem communicates successfully with the COM port on the PC or laptop To configure the modem to answer a call on the first ring enter ATSO 1 To configure the modem to accept modem control Data Terminal Ready DTR signals enter AT amp D1 To disable flow control enter AT amp KO To save modem settings enter AT amp W Connecting the Modem to the Console P
160. This chapter describes how to return the Services Router or individual components to Juniper Networks for repair or replacement It contains the following topics m Locating Component Serial Numbers on page 213 m Contacting Customer Support on page 216 m Return Procedure on page 216 m Packing a Router or Component for Shipment on page 217 Locating Component Serial Numbers Before contacting Juniper Networks to request a Return Materials Authorization RMA you must find the serial number on the router or component To list the router components and their serial numbers enter the following command line interface CLI command user host gt show chassis hardware Hardware inventory Item Version Part number Serial number Description Chassis JN1092BAEADB 36350 Midplane REV 03 710 014593 NR2489 System IO REV 01 710 016210 NL3304 JX350 System IO Crypto Module Crypto Acceleration Routing Engine REV 08 710 015273 NM4265 RE J6350 3400 FPC 0 FPC PIC 0 4x GE Base PIC FPC 6 REV 00 750 015152 FPC PIC 0 6x GE SFP uPIM Xcvr 0 NON JNPR PC14DP3 SFP SX Xcvr 2 NON JNPR PC21M3E SFP SX Power Supply 0 Ss NOTE In the show chassis hardware command the PIM slot number is reported as an FPC number and the PIM number always 0 is reported as the PIC number Most components also have a serial number ID label attached to the component body Locating Component Serial Numbers m 213 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Start
161. UNOS 8 4 and later m J2320 Slots Two Telephony E1 T1 media 1 through 3 Interface module m J2350 Slots Module m TIM510 1 through 5 TIM514 m TIM514 JUNOS 8 4 and later m J2320 Slots Two Analog analog media 1 through 3 Telephony module m J2350 Slots Interface m TIM514 1 through 5 Module TIM516 m TIM516 JUNOS 8 5 and later m J2320 Slots One on J2320 Analog analog media 1 through 3 Telephony module m J2350 Slots Three on J2350 See Interface m TIM516 1 through 5 Planning for Power Module Management on page 112 TIM518 m TIM518 JUNOS 8 5 and later m J2320 Slots One on J2520 Analog analog media 1 through 3 Telephony module m J2350 Slots Three on J2350 See Interface m TIM518 1 through 5 Planning for Power Module Management on page 112 TIM521 BRI m TIM521 BRI JUNOS 8 4 and later m J2320 Slots Two Telephony media 1 through 3 Interface module J2350 S ots Module m TIM521 1 through 5 Table 35 J4350 and J6350 Avaya VoIP Module Summary Software Release for Slot and Port Maximum Number on a Sample Interface Name PIM Also Called This PIM Numbering Chassis type pim 0 port TGM550 m TGM550 JUNOS 8 2 and later Slots 1 through6 One required vp 3 0 0 Telephony Gateway Gateway Module If more than one See the interface Module m TGM550 TGM550 is installed naming conventions only the one in the in the J series Services lowest numbered slot is Router Basic LAN and
162. Usingthe J Web Interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview Top Pane Elements The top pane comprises the elements shown in Figure 49 on page 85 Figure 49 Top Pane Elements Juniper Networks logo Monitor Configuration Taskbar with J Web tasks Manage Events Username J Web Help About the J Web interface Logout m Juniper Networks logo Link to http www juniper net in a new browser window m hostname model Hostname and model of the Services Router m Logged in as username Username you used to log in to the Services Router elp Link to context sensitive help information m About Link to information about the J Web interface such as the version number m Logout Ends your current login session with the Services Router and returns you to the login page m Taskbar Menu of J Web tasks Click a J Web task to access it Monitor View information about configuration and hardware on the Services Router Configuration Configure the Services Router with Quick Configuration or the configuration editor and view configuration history Diagnose Troubleshoot network connectivity problems Manage Manage files and licenses upgrade software and reboot the Services Router Events View events and set up filters for an event summary Alarms View the alarm summary Main Pane Elements The main pane comprises the elements shown in Figure 50 on page 86 U
163. Y Sienna o meg eege enges 56 restricted access installation 25 37 38 120 Routing Engine hardware 31 EMS here airis 69 TIMS OS tadas sa eee ates 73 MMS TO EG 74 A tee teda elato test 75 TIMO s bL ML ali as 76 TIM SS I 78 TUM D2 EE 79 USB Ports 36 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM cete 61 4 Port ISDN BRI S T DIN 62 4 Port ISDN BRU PIM u s tuer iet e RT Cada 62 ADSL E 64 air filter Teplacirig iic peteret tasche 206 Avaya VoIP modules ete 66 boot devices 19 31 boot sequence tidad tea tess 31 A te oe re tee ERE HERE E RENE 27 Cooling SYSTEM ii atii dite ER emt tente 38 Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM 57 DuabPort EL PIM sei iet e rettet 56 Dual Port Fast Ethernet DIN 60 Index mM 299 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Dual Port Serial PIM Dual Port T1 PIM eee ES PIM eid rtp ette det electrical specifications falis cipe ctp at gg ee o b es frontiparel iu a od Me LA ees FRUS Teplacitig c 2 il needs 171 G SHDSESPIM S A apps sen asd diee rds e etti ore ipa nd 65 Gigabit Ethernet ePIM zt ttt cedit 52 Gigabit Ethernet UPIMS oia 49 BONNET eet 26 hardware COMPONEN S oococcccccoooccncccccconnnoncccconnnnno 30 hardware replachng ii oe iiin bi Adinia 171 install TEE 120 interfaces supporter 47 mounting brackets installing 121 OVOEVIEW ur de Ee os 6 physical speclfications 30 PIM OVETVIE Wi
164. a Los_Angeles time zone IP address of the DNS server to which DNS requests are sent 10 148 2 32 Domains to which the Services Router belongs lab router net and router net IP address of a backup router to use while the Services Router is booting or if the routing protocol processes fail to start 192 168 2 12 24 Loopback IP address and prefix length for the Services Router loO interface 172 16 1 24 32 IP address and prefix length for the Services Router ge 0 0 0 interface 192 168 1 1 24 You can configure basic settings in the J Web interface from a device attached to the ge 0 0 0 interface on port 0 For instructions see Connecting to the J Web Interface on page 157 You can also connect to the CLI to configure basic settings For instructions see Connecting to the CLI Locally on page 159 and Connecting to the CLI Remotely on page 141 To use a configuration editor to configure basic settings 1 Navigate to the top of the configuration hierarchy in either the J Web or CLI configuration editor 2 To configure basic settings perform the configuration tasks described in Table 65 on page 148 Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor m 147 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide If you are using the J Web interface click Commit to view a summary of your changes then click OK to commit the configuration If you are using the CLI commit
165. ace intended for home and small enterprise applications BRI consists of two 64 Kbps B channels and one 16 Kbps D channel callback Alternative feature to dial in that enables a J series Services Router to call back the caller from the remote end of a backup ISDN connection Instead of accepting a call from the remote end of the connection the router rejects the call waits a configured period of time and calls a number configured on the router s dialer interface See also dial in caller ID Telephone number of the caller on the remote end of a backup ISDN connection used to dial in and also to identify the caller Multiple caller IDs can be configured on an ISDN dialer interface During dial in the router matches the incoming call s caller ID against the caller IDs configured on its dialer interfaces Each dialer interface accepts calls from only callers whose caller IDs are configured on it channel service unit CSU Unit that connects a digital telephone line to a multiplexer or other signal service data service unit DSU Unit that connects a data terminal equipment DTE device in this case a Services Router to a digital telephone line data terminal equipment to data communication equipment DTE DCE interface Interface that a Services Router the DTE uses to exchange information with a serial device such as a modem the DCE A DTE cable uses a male 9 pin or 25 pin connector and a DCE cable use
166. age 16 and Figure 7 on page 17 You install the PIMs into the midplane from the front of the chassis Data packets are transferred across the midplane from the PIM to the Routing Engine and from the Routing Engine across the midplane to the destination PIM A time division multiplexing TDM bus in J2320 and J2350 routers provides support for the Avaya VoIP module TGM550 The TGM550 converts the voice path from the TDM bus to compressed or uncompressed and packetized VoIP on an Ethernet connection For more information see PIM and VoIP Module Overview on page 43 J2320 and J2350 Routing Engine Hardware 18 m The Routing Engine consists of the following components For more information see Software Overview on page 59 m Processor Creates the packet forwarding switch fabric for the router and runs JUNOS software to maintain the router s routing tables and routing protocols m DRAM Buffers incoming packets and provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other Routing Engine processes To view the amount of DRAM installed on your router issue the show chassis routing engine command m EPROM Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine To view the serial number of the Routing Engine issue either the show chassis routing engine command or the show chassis hardware command m Crypto Accelerator Module Processor card that enhances performance of cryptographic algorithms used in IP security IPSec
167. al Tolerances on page 106 m Check the air flow See General Site Guidelines on page 103 m Check the fans See J2320 and J2350 Cooling System on page 25 and J4350 and J6350 Cooling System on page 38 If you must replace a fan or the Routing Engine contact JTAC See Requesting Technical Support on page xxi m Check the air filter and replace it if it appears clogged See Replacing Air Filters on J2550 Routers on page 205 and Replacing Air Filters on J4550 and J6550 Routers on page 206 Routing Engine fan has failed Replace the failed fan To contact Red major JTAC see Requesting Technical Support on page xxi Troubleshooting Power Management If one or more PIMs remain offline when you power on the chassis the combination of PIMs installed might exceed the power and heat capacity of the chassis For information about the maximum power and heat tokens permitted for each chassis see Planning for Power Management on page 112 210 m Troubleshooting Power Management Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Hardware Components To bring the PIM online 1 Check if the PIM exceeds the power and heat tokens permitted by issuing the show chassis fpc and show chassis power ratings CLI commands userQ host show chassis fpc Temp CPU Utilization Memory Utilization Slot State C Total Interrupt DRAM MB Heap Buffer 0 Online CPU less FPC
168. and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 290 m Index index Symbols comments in configuration st tementzs xviii configuration mode command prompt 95 in syntax description xviii red asterisk sse lis EE 86 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM ceti testet taerel ptt 61 4 Port ISDN BRI S T PIM descriptions ecce Ans e eee ite e rae ee led 62 PIM ONLINE LD sees trt ee rct 65 4 Port ISDN BRI U PIM descriptionBn se cel ebat de ettet 62 PIM ONLINE R I tat eee e e Ane ette 65 lt gt in syntax descriptons xviii gt operational mode command prompt ssseeee 92 command for CLI online helpzasie eere ether rete 96 in configuration Mode esco dete pe eben ette 95 irtoperational MOdE sei e ada 92 AMICON SA Seeks id deci Mer e E alk ker Ce in configuration statements cece xviii in configuration statements xviii pipe in syntax descriptions xviii A UE s tete et ns POR POE gi tue 110 AC power connecting POWE enee dere eaha etae 124 cords See AC power cords dedicated AC power feed requirement 194 electrical Specification 109 grounding the router 124 installing a 6550 power supply 195 12 220 5 St desee tdt ee etuer tr doe Eo le aunt tina 24 12350 SYSTEM EE 24 EE vt db teneo eet shennan 56 6350 SYSTEM s tiet arce s a edu 57 removing a 6550 power supply 192 requirements eee eto ste eee ee sde 109 safety
169. arth ground For cable requirements see Chassis Grounding on page 123 a Verify that a licensed electrician has attached an appropriate grounding cable lug to the grounding cable b Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground such as the rack in which the router is installed Connecting Power Chapter 6 Installing and Connecting a Services Router c With a Phillips screwdriver remove the screw and washer from the PEM nuts at the grounding point on the rear of the chassis d Place the grounding lug at the other end of the cable over the grounding point as shown in Figure 62 on page 125 through Figure 64 on page 126 e Secure the cable lug to the grounding point first with the washer then with the screw On J2320 and J2350 routers use the screw containing a captive washer to secure the cable lug to the grounding point 3 Locate the power cord or cords shipped with the router which has a plug appropriate for your geographical location For power cord specifications see Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications on page 107 4 For the power supply a Insert the appliance coupler end of a power cord into the appliance inlet on the power supply faceplate as shown in Figure 62 on page 125 through Figure 64 on page 126 b Insert the plug into an AC power source receptacle 5 Verify that the power cord does not block access to router components or drape where people can trip on
170. assis that secure the cover to the chassis 8 Replace the power cord or cable 9 Pressandrelease the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily 10 To view the DRAM configuration and verify that it was installed correctly issue the show chassis routing engine command described in the JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference This command shows the total memory installed Replacing Power System Components The power cords on all Services Routers are replaceable You can add a second power supply to the J6350 Services Router that is of the same type as the first either AC or DC The power supplies are located at the right rear of the chassis see Figure 15 on page 28 and Figure 17 on page 29 Each J6550 power supply provides power to all components in the router The J6550 power supplies are fully redundant If one power supply fails or is removed the remaining power supply instantly assumes the entire electrical load One power supply can provide full power for as long as the router is operational Each J6350 power supply is hot insertable and hot removable A CAUTION Do not leave a power supply slot empty for more than a short time while the Services Router is operational The power supply or a blank power supply panel must remain in the chassis for proper airflow To replace power system components use the following procedures m Replacing AC Power Supply Cords on page 191 m R
171. assword regulrement 155 Common Criteria environments management access affected 136 NIP e Uu 155 password Wmmitattonms 133 compact flash backup replacing ics ede eve tien fet 184 descripto Re uide EA oo Rt ledge 18 51 external description ero eR terea 24 external J2320 and 25350 irae ere 24 external replacing u c eee e te ts INS ETN Gd usce eese trei uso ger tenete location horizontal itte t location Gverticalt ee minor yellow alarm FEMOVING EE ele 178 181 replacing rotating fans warning 179 182 compliance EMC reQuirements o o rte bist p ERE e e eth 285 general Standarde 282 lun Dette attente 276 components packing for ship Estres 218 replacing senno e ee ebe dc 171 Serial Number label toten tte 215 214 troubleshooting ize mh ne ee iate 209 See also LEDs configuration clearing with RESET CONFIG button 22 55 factory resetting with RESET CONFIG DUO red erepto AE 22 55 root password regulrement ccc 155 configuration editor See CLI configuration editor J Web configuration editor configuration hierarchy J Web display 87 configuration mode commands prompt connection AG DOWER s Eege Eed 124 DG EE 126 for management seo eere pete reet dts 151 network tables iode lalate 125 to Services Router 157 294 m Index connectivity basic See basic connectivity W ses Secure quete iere modem remote connection regaining lost
172. at the router can use to resolve hostnames into addresses To add an IP address type it in the box to the left of the Add button then click Add To delete an IP address click on it in the box above the Add button then click Delete Domain Search Adds each domain name that the router is included in to the configuration so that they are included in a DNS search To add a domain name type it in the box to the left of the Add button then click Add To delete a domain name click on it in the box above the Add button then click Delete Default Gateway Defines a default gateway through which to direct packets addressed to networks not explicitly listed in the routing table Type a 32 bit IP address in dotted decimal notation Loopback Address Defines a reserved IP address that is always available on the router If no address is entered this address is set to 127 0 0 1 32 Type a 52 bit IP address and prefix length in dotted decimal notation ge 0 0 0 Address Defines the IP address and prefix length of ge 0 0 0 The interface ge 0 0 0 is typically used as the management interface for accessing the router The DHCP client sets this address to 192 168 1 1 24 if no DHCP server is found Type a 52 bit IP address and prefix length in dotted decimal notation NOTE You must enter the ge 0 0 0 address on the Quick Configuration Set Up page before you click Apply or OK If you do not manually con
173. ays subtasks of the Monitor Configuration Diagnose or Manage task currently displayed in the main pane For the configuration editor this pane displays the hierarchy of configuration statements committed on the router Click an item to access it in the main pane m Bottom pane Displays copyright and trademark information Figure 48 J Web Layout Top pane FL dy Juniper ROUTER J6350 Monitor Configur ation Manage Events J Help About Logout Diagnose gt Pica Moss Ping MPLS Traceroute Ping Host CLI Ter renal WE Ping Host Packet Capture The ping diagnostic tool sends a series of ICMP echo request packets to the specified remote host Side pane The receipt of such packets will usually result in the remote host replying with an ICMP echo response Note that some hosts are configured not to respond to ICMP echo requests so 4 lack of responses does not necessarily represent a connectivity problem Also some firewalls block the ICMP packet types that ping uses so you may find that you are not able to ping outside your local network Entering host below creates periodic ping task that will run until cancelled or until it times out as specified Remote Host Advanced options soniper ger Net Bottom pane Main pane 9016741 Elements of the J Web Interface This section summarizes the elements of the top pane side pane and main pane of the J Web interface 84 Mm
174. bel WARNING Aviso Dada a possibilidade de emiss o de radia o invisivel atrav s do orif cio da via de acesso quando esta n o tiver nenhum cabo de fibra conectado dever evitar a exposic o radiac o e nao dever olhar fixamente para orif cios que se encontrarem a descoberto WARNING jAtenci n Debido a que la apertura del puerto puede emitir radiaci n invisible cuando no existe un cable de fibra conectado evite mirar directamente a las aperturas para no exponerse a la radiaci n A WARNING Varning Osynlig str lning kan avges fran en port ppning utan ansluten fiberkabel och du bor d rf r undvika att bli utsatt for stralning genom att inte stirra in i oskyddade ppningar Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings As you maintain the Services Router observe the following guidelines and warnings m Battery Handling Warning on page 276 m Jewelry Removal Warning on page 277 m Lightning Activity Warning on page 278 m Operating Temperature Warning on page 279 m Product Disposal Warning on page 281 Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 275 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 276 m Battery Handling Warning WARNING Replacing the battery incorrectly might result in an explosion Replace the battery only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions
175. bel identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements Industry Canada does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the users satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment CAUTION Users should not attempt to make electrical ground connections by themselves but should contact the appropriate inspection authority or an electrician as appropriate Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution ma
176. cal safety guidelines apply to AC powered routers AC powered routers are shipped with a three wire electrical cord with a grounding type plug that fits only a grounding type power outlet Do not circumvent this safety feature Equipment grounding should comply with local and national electrical codes You must provide an external Listed circuit breaker rated minimum 15 A in the building installation The power cord serves as the main disconnecting device The socket outlet must be near the router and be easily accessible Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 253 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 254 m m The cores in the mains lead are colored in accordance with the following code within the United States m Green and yellow Earth m Blue Neutral m Brown Live m When a router is equipped with two AC power supplies both power cords one for each power supply must be unplugged to completely disconnect power to the router m Note the following warnings printed on the AC power supply faceplate m To completely de energize the system disconnect maximum of 2 power cordsets m Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat uttag n r den ansluts till ett n tverk Swedish Power Cable Warning Japanese WARNING The attached power cable is only for this product Do not use the cable for another product EOS RI Fev Nt COS MEA CS HOS ites cH EA UEC TER 9017253 DC Power Elect
177. ccess Task J Web Configuration Editor CLI Configuration Editor Import the SSL certificate that you have 1 Next to Certificates click Configure Enter generated for example en DAA EE set certificates local new load key filepath new 3 Inthe Name box type a name for the certificate to be imported for example Replace path with a path or URL to the file For information about new containing an SSL certificate and private key generating SSL certificates in PEM format for example see Generating SSL 4 Inthe Certificate box paste the generated var tmp new pem Certificates on page 155 SSL certificate and private key 5 Click OK Enable HTTPS access and 1 On the main Configuration page next to From the edit system hierarchy level enter specify the SSL certificate System click Configure or Edit to be used for set services web management https authentication 2 Selec the Services check box and click local certificate new port 8443 Edit next to it Specify the port on which 3 Next to Web management click Edit HTTPS access is to be A enabled for example TCP 4 Selec the Https check box and click Edit port 8443 next to 1t 5 Inthe Local certificate box type the name NOTE You can Hable of the certificate for example new HTTPS access on specified interfaces also If you 6 In the Port box type 8443 enable HTTPS without specifying an interface HTTPS is enabled on all int
178. ccnnonnnnncccnonnnrncccnnnn 250 Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage sss 251 Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings ssssss 252 General Electrical Safety Guidelines ooonnnnnnnnnonccnnnnaconcccconnnrccccnnnoo 252 AC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines sssssee 255 DC Power Electrical Safety Guidelines sssssee 254 Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies ssssssse 255 DC Power Disconnection Warning eet e cece cere tees 255 DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning i c 257 DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning ees 257 DC Power Wiring Terminations Warning eerren 259 Table of Contents W xiii J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Grounded Equipment Warning sssssssssss nano teia 260 Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden sss 261 Iti Case OF El ctrical ACCIdent ee iese a e ee t ese teas 261 Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning s 262 Power Disconnection Warning ce eei t edet tetas 265 TN POWER Warning eot erret aly o sre ve de Fede VY Ee et 264 Telecommunication Line Cord Warning ssssss 265 Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings ooconnninninnnccnncccccccccnin nns 266 Chassis Hitung Guidelines inerte pre deett 266 Installation Instructions Warning oonnonnnnccccnccccicoconann cnn non cnccccccnnn nno 266 Rack Mounting Requirements and Warnings eec 267 ane ios
179. ce Table 50 CLI Editing Keystrokes Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview Task Category Move the cursor Action Keyboard Sequence Move the cursor back one character Ctrl b Move the cursor back one word Esc b Move the cursor forward one character Ctrl f Move the cursor forward one word Esc f Move the cursor to the end of the command line Ctrl e Delete characters Delete the character before the cursor Ctrl h Delete or Backspace Delete the character at the cursor Ctrl d Delete all characters from the cursor to the end of he command line Ctrl k Delete all characters on the command line Ctrl u or Ctrl x Delete the word before the cursor Ctrl w or Esc Backspace Delete the word after the cursor Esc d Insert recently deleted text Insert the most recently deleted text at the cursor Ctrl y Redraw the screen Redraw the current line Ctrl l Display previous command lines Scroll backward through the list of recently executed Ctrl p commands Scroll forward through the list of recently executed Ctrl n commands Search the CLI history in reverse order for lines Ctrl r matching the search string Search the CLI history by typing some text at the Esc prompt followed by the keyboard sequence The CLI attempts to expand the text into the most recent word in the history for which the text is a prefix
180. ceplate 7 Insert the power cord plug into an AC power source receptacle ES NOTE Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated AC power feed For information about connecting to AC power sources see Connecting Power on page 124 8 Verify that the power cord does not block access to Services Router components or drape where people might trip on it 9 Pressandrelease the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Removing an AC Power Supply from J6350 Routers 192 m The power supplies are located at the right rear of the chassis A power supply weighs 2 4 lb 1 1 kg To remove an AC power supply from a J6550 Services Router see Figure 91 on page 195 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 2 Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off Replacing Power System Components Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components NOTE If the power supply is a redundant power supply in a J6350 Service Router p Pply p DIN you can leave the router powered on and power flowing in the other power supply Unplug the power cord from the power source receptacle Un
181. chakeld is Om u ervan te verzekeren dat alle stroom UIT is geschakeld kiest u op het schakelbord de stroomverbreker die het gelijkstroom circuit bedient draait de stroomverbreker naar de UIT positie en plakt de schakelaarhendel van de stroomverbreker met plakband in de UIT positie vast Varoitus Varmista ett tasavirtapiirissa ei ole virtaa ennen seuraavien toimenpiteiden suorittamista Varmistaaksesi ett virta on KATKAISTU t ysin paikanna tasavirrasta Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 255 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 256 m huolehtivassa kojetaulussa sijaitseva suojakytkin k nn suojakytkin KATKAISTU asentoon ja teippaa suojakytkimen varsi niin etta se pysyy KATKAISTU asennossa WARNING Attention Avant de pratiquer l une quelconque des proc dures ci dessous v rifier que le circuit en courant continu n est plus sous tension Pour en tre s r localiser le disjoncteur situ sur le panneau de service du circuit en courant continu placer le disjoncteur en position ferm e OFF et l aide d un ruban adh sif bloquer la poign e du disjoncteur en position OFF Warnung Vor Ausf hrung der folgenden Vorg nge ist sicherzustellen da die Gleichstromschaltung keinen Strom erh lt Um sicherzustellen da s mtlicher Strom abgestellt ist machen Sie auf der Schalttafel den Unterbrecher f r die Gleichstromschaltung ausfindig stellen Sie den Unterbrecher auf AUS und kleben
182. compact flash see step 1 5 With a Phillips screwdriver loosen the pan head screws that secure the external compact flash cover to the rear of the chassis see Figure 85 on page 185 Figure 85 Removing the External Compact Flash Cover Compact flash cover 6 Remove the compact flash cover 7 Eject the external compact flash by pressing the ejector button to the left of the compact flash slot once to unlock the button and again to eject the compact flash see Figure 86 on page 185 Figure 86 Removing the External Compact Flash Eject button d i SA m A Compact flash 8 Gently grasp the compact flash and slide it out of the slot 9 Place the compact flash on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag 10 With the vendor name and memory size facing up and the arrow pointing towards the router insert the new compact flash in the external compact flash slot see Figure 87 on page 185 Figure 87 Inserting the External Compact Flash 9004133 ES Compact flash 11 Replace the compact flash slot cover Replacing External Compact Flashes m 185 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 12 Tighten the pan head screws that secures the compact flash slot cover to the rear of the chassis 13 Plug the power cord into the power supply 14 Press and release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Replacing USB
183. configuration editor 149 defining Quick Conftguration 145 OVEIVICW 33 stt reet de Let 155 requirement for Common Criteria euVIrOnments s dete steer e lat 155 o OK button J Web configuration editor 88 QUICK CONMSULALION ET 88 ONLINE LEDs ADSL PIM Status cect seep teen tet ptt tots 65 channelized EI POTES iii rete 58 channelized T1 porte 58 GR DS PIM Status et tecti nep recae 66 ISDN BRI PIM sans 63 Openssl COMMANG iu avenae ote 155 operating system See JUNOS software operational mode COMMAND EE prompt gt overview DEE 3 TO e 4 JAB BO EE 5 JEE nee tbe anh Ak edu eee a a 6 P Packet Forwarding Engine coetus 40 TRUICTOK EEN Gy e irent reir entres 40 packing materials packing a Services Router for shipment 218 packing components for shipment 218 BIEL ess coe e pie pe d e EE deu 118 pages layout in J WEeD smt eee e oe dese 85 parentheses in syntax description xviii password See root password PC See management device personnel warming ioien dania o a e 250 PIC See PIMs PIM number always 0 176 PIMs Physical Interface Modules 4 Port Fast Ethernet erede 61 4 Port ISDN BRI 62 E eg 64 Avaya VoIP modules See Avaya VoIP modules cables and Conpnectors ccc ceeeeetsteeeeeeteeeees 225 Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM 57 Dual Port E 56 D al Port Fast Ethernet o eerte Tt tet 60 RTE EE 55 Dual Port edel enden cnet canals 56 O 59 failur
184. configurations sedens Ree tete lectis 76 ports LED States 2455 un eis te eat n Rez n rg 76 TIM516 connector port pi description port configuratio ports LED states TIM518 connector port pinouts sssssssss 244 GESCHIPUOMN es n ote ue betreten ue ed 78 port Copflgurationg e 78 ports LED States eee uet e eat ette dotes 79 TIM521 CESCTIPUION asus tb ed Lo Ma ret M cede ed ee 79 ISDN BRI connector port pinouts sssss 245 ISDN BRI DOLLS cte o e et pe D TREE YS 79 ports LED States die teste uad dere ug geed 80 RJ 45 connector port Dinouts ee 245 time See system time A ege ee aA 155 defining configuration dito 148 defining Quick Configuration 145 TIMs See TIM508 TIM510 TIM514 TIM516 TIM518 TIM521 TN power Syste ettet ete etes ede 264 tolerances environmental 106 tools and equipment for component replacemenmt 171 for hard Ware returer ess cetero pet tete 217 top pane J Webszs cue ete e anaes oath ite 85 traffic analysis license Anean Eee s 162 troubleshooting a Services Router hardware components chassis alarm Conditions 209 offline PIMS Censo ic tee p eed ees 210 power management ccce eret 210 TRUNK and LINE ports on Avaya VoIP TGM550 69 trunk ports TIM508 El gier 241 TRUNK p 75 trunk ports TIM516 PIQUE is oft dedu edt e bem as 242 trunk ports TIM518 POUM doit be i e aea EEN 244 EE RW 75 turning on a Services Rou
185. copy of the Software or any product in which the Software is embedded e distribute any copy of the Software to any third party including as may be embedded in Juniper equipment sold in the secondhand market f use any locked or key restricted feature function service application operation or capability without first purchasing the applicable license s and obtaining a valid key from Juniper even if such feature function service application operation or capability is enabled without a key g distribute any key for the Software provided by Juniper to any third party h use the Software in any manner that extends or is broader than the uses purchased by Customer from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller i use the Embedded Software on non Juniper equipment j use the Software or make it available for use on Juniper equipment that the Customer did not originally purchase from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller k disclose the results of testing or benchmarking of the Software to any third party without the prior written consent of Juniper or I use the Software in any manner other than as expressly provided herein 5 Audit Customer shall maintain accurate records as necessary to verify compliance with this Agreement Upon request by Juniper Customer shall furnish such records to Juniper and certify its compliance with this Agreement 6 Confidentiality The Parties agree that aspects of the Software and associat
186. ctor to RJ 48 connector CTOSSOVEN EE 236 Index RJ 48 connector to RJ 48 connector EICH EE 236 RS 232 DCE serial cabled i oti ese pete oe 225 RS 252 DTE serial cable 224 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE serial cable 227 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE serial cable 225 SHDSER 1 T COMME COE uu cette 258 TGM550 analog RJ 11 CONNECtOT n a 240 TGM550 console DB 9 connector sussse 259 TGM550 console port 259 TIMBOS scent t t e tete ts STRE Std 241 ROSA RER WEE 241 TIM514 analog RJ 11 connector ssss 242 IO 242 MISS Laas EE 244 TIM52T ISDNBREDOLUS edo ade eto e 245 V 55 DCE Serial cable i47 te 231 V5 5 ER EE 230 X21 DCE serial cable oe pe eerste 252 X21 DTE serial cable ita as rotes 251 plug types AC oldie cena eiert dede ea eee pergens 110 ports Leger Ee sepe EE I RR 154 ADSL See ADSL ports AUR fac oeste e Eeer 25 56 cables PIM installing eects 175 cables WAN removing 175 channelized See channelized E1 ports channelized T1 ports console chassis 25 56 See also console port console TGM550 sete iso pete EEN 69 DS1 See El ports T1 ports DS3 See E3 ports T5 ports E1 See E1 ports E3 See E3 ports G SHDSL See SHDSL ports interface NAMING soto secedere epe 176 ISDN See ISDN BRI ports 2320 types supported epe oet 46 J2350 types supported ioocciconccccono cocinan ccconn conan 46 J4350 types supported etes 47 6350 t
187. d Otherwise assess the condition of the victim then call for help Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 261 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 262 m Multiple Power Supplies Disconnection Warning WARNING The J6550 Services Router has more than one power supply connection All connections must be removed completely to remove power from the unit completely WARNING Waarschuwing Deze J6550 eenheid heeft meer dan n stroomtoevoerverbinding alle verbindingen moeten volledig worden verwijderd om de stroom van deze eenheid volledig te verwijderen WARNING Varoitus T ss laitteessa on useampia virtal hdekytkent j Kaikki kytkenn t on irrotettava kokonaan jotta virta poistettaisiin t ysin laitteesta WARNING Attention Cette J6350 unit est quip e de plusieurs raccordements d alimentation Pour supprimer tout courant lectrique de l unit tous les cordons d alimentation doivent tre d branch s WARNING Warnung Diese J6550 Einheit verf gt ber mehr als einen Stromanschluf um Strom g nzlich von der Einheit fernzuhalten m ssen alle Stromzufuhren abgetrennt sein WARNING Avvertenza Questa J6350 unit ha piu di una connessione per alimentatore elettrico tutte le connessioni devono essere completamente rimosse per togliere l elettricit dall unit WARNING Advarsel Denne J6550 enheten har mer enn n stromtilkobling Alle tilkoblinger m k
188. d in Table 51 on page 97 the CLI displays usage guidelines and summary information for configuration statements and operational mode commands You can enter help commands in operational or configuration mode Table 51 help Commands CLI Command Description help apropos string Displays help based on a text string contained in a statement or command name If the string contains spaces enclose it in quotation marks You also can specify a regular expression for the string using standard UNIX style regular expression syntax In configuration mode this command displays statement names and help text that match the string specified In operational mode this command displays the following types of commands that match the string specified plus help text m Operational mode commands m help topic and help reference commands you can enter for more information For example to get a list of statements that contain the string traps enter the help apropos traps command in configuration mode help reference string Displays summary information for configuration statements For example to display summary information for the OSPF hello interval enter he command help reference ospf hello interval help topic string Displays usage guidelines for configuration statements For example to display usage guidelines for the OSPF hello interval enter the command help topic ospf hello interval Configuring the CLI
189. dalla 153 installation and Connection 117 JUNOS software Overvlew cerns 39 EES Eet EE Ek 161 models available 5 ots ette tom Eee ta 5 network cables and Connectors 225 PIM Sifter dede iu e cobre Edge 45 teleasenotes URL tas det io XV safety and Compllance 247 Site PIE PAratlON av ege tan 105 SLA ACCESS 8 a2 stasis d nds tne cece Mecha bidet ate BER na ERES 153 user interfaces See user interfaces J Web configuration editor DASIC Seting Siei rete ee eed 147 configuration hierarchy display 87 initial COnfiguratior eco eed ttes 147 Secure acces Sic eerte Ao E duis Rec perdes 158 J Web interface configuration editor See J Web configuration editor connecting cede er context sensitive help Help icon Internet Explorer modifying for worldwide version Of JUNOS SOftWAEe iste te eret ag 85 EU eie dto tbe tt i dr aetas ed 84 mai PAM Cee nt NA ee inca M a EE reet 85 Managing HEISER ett eet tes 163 DEENEN e TEE Ee 81 PASE layout ss estet ert c dettes 85 Quick Configuration See Quick Configuration regaining lost DHCP lease after initial CONTISUTA ON Hdi messes eoe ge reped 145 SESSIONS A Dx 90 side Pair ete Beet rsen 86 BESTELLEN ER leet 85 windows multiple unpredictable results Withee fee ee e coo ebbe edad 90 J Web Quick Configuration See Quick Configuration J2320 Avaya VoIP rnodul s 2 aeo ie eerte etis 66 boot devi6es cus er t de t eee ENEE 19 bOOt Sequere erste te ro
190. data Unlit Off Port might be online but it is not receiving data J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features m 35 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Console Port You can use the console port on the chassis front panel to connect to the Routing Engine through an RJ 45 serial cable From the chassis console port you can use the CLI to configure the router The console port is configured as data terminal equipment DTE and supports the RS 232 EIA 252 standard For information about securing the chassis console port see the J series Services Router Administration Guide For pinout information see Chassis Console Port Pinouts on page 254 AUX Port The port labeled AUX on the front panel of the J4350 or 6550 Services Router is for future use and is not activated USB Port The USB ports on the front panel of the router see Figure 19 on page 52 accept a USB storage device or USB storage device adapter with a compact flash installed as defined in the CompactFlash Specification published by the CompactFlash Association When a USB storage device is installed and configured it automatically acts as a secondary boot device if the internal compact flash fails on startup Depending on the size of the USB storage device you can also configure it to receive any core files generated during a failure For information about configuring a USB storage device see the J series Services Router Adm
191. de r paration de cette unit en casier il convient de prendre des pr cautions sp ciales afin de maintenir la stabilit du syst me Les directives ci dessous sont destin es assurer la protection du personnel m Lerack sur lequel est mont le Juniper Networks router doit tre fix la structure du batiment m Sicette unit constitue la seule unit mont e en casier elle doit tre plac e dans le bas m Si cette unit est mont e dans un casier partiellement rempli charger le casier de bas en haut en placant l l ment le plus lourd dans le bas m Sile casier est quip de dispositifs stabilisateurs installer les stabilisateurs avant de monter ou de r parer l unit en casier Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information WARNING Warnung Zur Vermeidung von K rperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser Einheit in einem Gestell m ssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen um sicherzustellen da das System stabil bleibt Die folgenden Richtlinien sollen zur Gewahrleistung Ihrer Sicherheit dienen Der Juniper Networks router mu in einem Gestell installiert werden das in der Gebaudestruktur verankert ist Wenn diese Einheit die einzige im Gestell ist sollte sie unten im Gestell angebracht werden Bei Anbringung dieser Einheit in einem zum Teil gef llten Gestell ist das Gestell von unten nach oben zu laden wobei das schwerste Bauteil unten im Gestell anz
192. defines the notice icons used in this guide Table 2 Notice Icons Icon Meaning Description e Informational note Indicates important features or instructions A Caution Indicates a situation that might result in loss of data or hardware damage A Warning Alerts you to the risk of personal injury or death LN Laser warning Alerts you to the risk of personal injury from a laser Table 5 on page xvii defines the text and syntax conventions used in this guide Table 3 Text and Syntax Conventions Convention Description Examples Bold text like this Represents text that you type To enter configuration mode type the configure command user host gt configure Fixed width text like this Represents output that appears on the userGhost show chassis alarms terminal screen No alarms currently active Italic text liRe this m Introduces important new terms Identifies book names Identifies RFC and Internet draft titles A policy term is a named structure that defines match conditions and actions JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide RFC 1997 BGP Communities Attribute Document Conventions Wi xvii J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 3 Text and Syntax Conventions continued Convention Description Examples Italic text like this Represents variables options for which you substitute a value in commands or configuration statements
193. ding required space clearances Secure the rack to the floor and the building structure Acquire appropriate cables and connectors Network Cable Specifications WM 115 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 116 1H Site Preparation Checklist Chapter 6 Installing and Connecting a Services Router Make the appropriate preparations and verify the J series equipment before installing a J series Services Router and connecting it to a power source and the network CAUTION Do not install a combination of PIMs in a single chassis that exceeds the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis If J series power management is enabled PIMs that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis is powered on Before You Begin This chapter contains the following topics Before You Begin on page 117 Unpacking a J series Services Router on page 118 Installing J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 119 Installing J4350 and J6550 Routers on page 120 Connecting Interface Cables to Services Routers on page 123 Chassis Grounding on page 123 Connecting Power on page 124 Powering a Services Router On and Off on page 129 Before you begin installation complete the following tasks Read the information in Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 275 with particular attention to Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 266 Determine wh
194. ducto LED de Clase 1 Varning Lysdiodprodukt av klass 1 Laser Beam Warning WARNING Do not stare into the laser beam or view it directly with optical instruments WARNING Waarschuwing Niet in de straal staren of hem rechtstreeks bekijken met optische instrumenten WARNING Varoitus Ala katso s teeseen l k tarkastele sit suoraan optisen laitteen avulla bo b bb WARNING Attention Ne pas fixer le faisceau des yeux ni l observer directement l aide d instruments optiques Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 273 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 274 m WARNING Warnung Nicht direkt in den Strahl blicken und ihn nicht direkt mit optischen Ger ten pr fen Pb WARNING Avvertenza Non fissare il raggio con gli occhi n usare strumenti ottici per osservarlo direttamente WARNING Advarsel Stirr eller se ikke direkte p strlen med optiske instrumenter WARNING Aviso Nao olhe fixamente para o raio nem olhe para ele directamente com instrumentos pticos WARNING jAtenci n No mirar fijamente el haz ni observarlo directamente con instrumentos pticos gt bib gt WARNING Varning Rikta inte blicken in mot str len och titta inte direkt pa den genom optiska instrument Radiation from Open Port Apertures Warning WARNING Because invisible radiation may be emitted from the aperture of the port when no fib
195. e licenses d For any trial copy of the Software Customer s right to use the Software expires 30 days after download installation or use of the Software Customer may operate the Software after the 50 day trial period only if Customer pays for a license to do so Customer may not extend or create an additional trial period by re installing the Software after the 50 day trial period e The Global Enterprise Edition of the Steel Belted Radius software may be used by Customer only to manage access to Customer s enterprise network Specifically service provider customers are expressly prohibited from using the Global Enterprise Edition of the Steel Belted Radius software to support any commercial network access services The foregoing license is not transferable or assignable by Customer No license is granted herein to any user who did not originally purchase the applicable license s for the Software from Juniper or an authorized Juniper reseller 4 Use Prohibitions Notwithstanding the foregoing the license provided herein does not permit the Customer to and Customer agrees not to and shall not a modify unbundle reverse engineer or create derivative works based on the Software b make unauthorized copies of the Software except as necessary for backup purposes c rent sell transfer or grant any rights in and to any copy of the Software in any form to any third party d remove any proprietary notices labels or marks on or in any
196. e 103 Rack Requirements on page 104 Router Environmental Tolerances on page 106 Fire Safety Requirements on page 106 Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications on page 107 Network Cable Specifications on page 115 ISDN Provisioning on page 115 Site Preparation Checklist on page 115 General Site Guidelines The following precautions help you plan an acceptable operating environment for your Services Router and avoid environmentally caused equipment failures For the cooling system to function properly the airflow around the chassis must be unrestricted Ensure that there is adequate circulation in the installation location In J2320 and J2350 routers allow at least 6 in 15 2 cm of clearance between the left and right sides of the chassis and adjacent equipment In J4350 and J6350 routers allow at least 6 in 15 2 cm of clearance between the front and back of the chassis and adjacent equipment Follow ESD procedures described in Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 to avoid damaging equipment Static discharge can cause components to fail completely or intermittently over time Install blank PIM panels in empty slots to prevent any interruption or reduction in the flow of air across internal components General Site Guidelines m 103 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Rack Requirements J series Services Routers must be installed in a rack Many types of racks
197. e SSLJUNOScript Enables secured SSL access to the To enable SSL access select the Enable SSL JUNOScript access JUNOScript XML scripting API access check box JUNOScript SSL Specifies SSL certificates to be used for To enable an SSL certificate select a certificate from Certificate encryption the JUNOScript SSL Certificate list for example new This field is available only after you create at least one SSL certificate Configuring Secure Web Access with a Configuration Editor You can manage your Services Router using a secure Web connection by enabling HTTPS To enable HTTPS on your Services Router 1 Navigate to the top of the configuration hierarchy in either the J Web or CLI configuration editor Perform the configuration tasks described in Table 66 on page 158 If you are finished configuring the router commit the configuration To check the configuration see Verifying Secure Web Access on page 159 Table 66 Configuring a Secure Web Access Task J Web Configuration Editor CLI Configuration Editor Navigate to the Security 1 Inthe J Web interface select From the edit hierarchy level enter level in the configuration Configuration gt View and Edit gt Edit hierarchy Configuration edit security 2 Next to Security click Configure or Edit 158 Mm Configuring Secure Web Access with a Configuration Editor Table 66 Configuring a Secure Web Access continued Chapter 8 Configuring Secure Web A
198. e Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 81 X 21 DCE Cable Pinout continued LFH 60 Pin DB 15 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 47 12 48 Indicate B 51 13 52 Signal Element Timing B 30 to 29 Fast Ethernet RJ 45 Connector Pinout Table 82 on page 233 describes the Fast Ethernet RJ 45 connector pinout information C NOTE Either a straight through or cross over cable can be used to connect to the interface Table 82 Fast Ethernet RJ 45 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 TX 2 TX RX 4 Termination network 5 Termination network 6 RX 7 Termination network 8 Termination network Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout Table 85 on page 255 describes connector pinout information for 8 port and 16 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIM ports Table 83 Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout Pin Signal Name Function 1 BI DA Bidirectional pair A 2 BI_DA Bidirectional pair A Fast Ethernet RJ 45 Connector Pinout MN 233 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 83 Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout continued Pin Signal Name Function 3 BI DB Bidirectional pair B 4 BI_DC Bidirectional pair C 5 BI_DC Bidirectional pair C 6 BI_DB Bidirectional pair B 7 BI_DD Bidirectional pair D 8 BI_DD Bidirectional pair D Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ 45 Conn
199. e ado dias 210 field replaceable PIMS ip resti 46 CESI a hB hoI EEEE E E E 65 Gigabit Ethernet ePlMS oia 52 Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs ssssss 49 heatdissipatiOn ege eise eb red 112 install ces ete ege e em 174 installing Cables rt earn Bates 175 LEDs See LEDs major red alarme ete t theta 210 midplane to Routing Bngine 18 51 pinouts non hot swappability 45 173 174 offline troubleshooting 210 OVETVIOW cce etra n engen rin Epis 245 See also Avaya VoIP modules PIM number always 0 176 215 power CONSUMO 112 power management Olanmnimg 112 power management troubleshooting 210 Mundi 172 replacing Cables espernas tete pet ek 175 serial n rmber labelka ia 216 slot numbering J2320 and J2350 0000000 20 slot numbering J4350 and J63DO ini 32 E eebe 59 ADSE RJA CONECTO eer 238 Avaya Volt modules eee 239 chassis console DB 9 connector 255 Chassis console Pol ie toe ues 254 EIA 550A DCE serial cable 229 EIA 530A DIE Serial cable ntt t 228 Fast Ethernet CONNECT a ienne aa 255 Gigabit Ethernet connector ePIM 254 Gigabit Ethernet connector uPIMs ISDN RJ 45 connector 212299 RJ 45 chassis console connector 234 RJ 45 TGM550 console Comnpnector 239 RJ 48 connector to DB 15 connector CROSSOVED zi e ed qe een erbe ee 257 RJ 48 connector to DB 15 connector Straight E recette Ee 237 RJ 48 conne
200. e batterie usate secondo le istruzioni del produttore WARNING Aviso Existe perigo de explos o se a bateria for substitu da incorrectamente Substitua a bateria por uma bateria igual ou de um tipo equivalente recomendado pelo fabricante Destrua as baterias usadas conforme as instru es do fabricante Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information WARNING jAtenci n Existe peligro de explosi n si la bater a se reemplaza de manera incorrecta Reemplazar la bater a exclusivamente con el mismo tipo o el equivalente recomendado por el fabricante Desechar las bater as gastadas seg n las instrucciones del fabricante WARNING Varning Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Ers tt endast batteriet med samma batterityp som rekommenderas av tillverkaren eller motsvarande F lj tillverkarens anvisningar vid kassering av anvanda batterier Jewelry Removal Warning WARNING Before working on equipment that is connected to power lines remove jewelry including rings necklaces and watches Metal objects heat up when connected to power and ground and can cause serious burns or weld the metal object to the terminals WARNING Waarschuwing Alvorens aan apparatuur te werken die met elektrische leidingen is verbonden sieraden inclusief ringen kettingen en horloges verwijderen Metalen voorwerpen worden warm wanneer ze met stroom en aarde zijn verbonden en kunnen
201. e from the destination port Installing PIM Cables To install a PIM cable 1 Have ready a length of the type of cable used by the PIM For cable specifications see Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 223 2 Insert the cable connector into the cable connector port on the PIM faceplate Replacing PIM Cables m 175 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 3 Arrange the cable as necessary to prevent it from dislodging or developing stress points m Secure the cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor m Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop m Use fasteners to maintain the shape of cable loops 4 Insert the other end of the cable into the destination port 5 Repeatthe previous steps for any additional cables 6 If the PIM is offline its status LED is steadily red issue the following CLI command to bring the PIM online user host gt request chassis fpc slot pim slot online For example to bring the PIM in slot 4 online enter the following command userQ host request chassis fpc slot 4 online For more information about the command see the JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference 7 Verify that the PIM status LED shines steadily green to confirm that the PIM is online You can also verify correct PIM functioning by issuing the show chassis fpc pic status command described in the JUNOS System
202. e ooo 265 telephone and trunk ports on Avaya VoIP TOMS SO vec etit peter tue ete tut rb ense bot hn 69 Telephony Gateway Module See TGM550 Telephony Interface Modules See TIM508 TIM510 TIM514 TIM516 TIM518 TIM521 Telnet defining access Quick Configuration 146 management access 155 temperature required for Operation 106 Routing Engine too warm 210 shutdown NEBS compliant routers 25 58 shutdown non NEBS compliant routers 38 EE 279 temperature alarm air filter replacement for 206 terminal Py Pe SELIG versidad p tege 99 terminology basic connectivity PUM See EE eet secure Web access TGM550 analog port pinouts ssssssssR 240 console port Dinouts ooocccccncoccccccoonnnonccccoonnnnnnnos 239 CESCH POM ui ete erbe o qute Rs OR ether Se 69 maximum gateway Capacities 71 308 m Index ports thermal output TIM508 connector port pinoUuts oc tide nee 241 descriptio suae bere ate WA Eileen ees 73 port configurations dig le eetehi eana 73 ports LED Stat Sipir eee eae ianea ir er ed 74 TIM510 ESC a an nep NRE is 74 EK TEE eebe poeti ret estatua 74 ports LED Staves sic ett tees Aerer ces 75 RJ 45 connector port Dinouts ee 241 TA tt nk POLS ett teet Eee eeh 74 TIM514 analog port piriOuts ii eet he ae eier 242 analog telephone porte 75 analog trunk POrtS cee reve eerte trees 75 descriptiones opere ted etae eR 75 port
203. e optical interface support on the 1 port and 6 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs over single mode fiber optic SMF and multimode fiber optic MMF cables Table 22 Optical Interface Support for SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs Parameter 1000Base SX Transceiver 1000Base LX Transceiver Model number JX SFP 1GE SX JX SFP 1GE LX Maximum distance 500 m 1640 ft on 50 125 um 10 km 6 2 mi on 9 125 um SMF MME cable cable 200 m 656 ft on 62 5 125 um 550 m 1894 ft on MMF cable MMF cable Transmitter 830 nm through 860 nm 1270 nm through 1355 nm wavelength Average launch power 9 5 dBm through 4 dBm For SMF cable 9 5 dBm through 3 dBm For MMF cable 11 5 dBm through 5 dBm Receiver sensitivity 21 dBm through 18 dBm 25 dBm through 20 5 dBm Copper Interface Support The 1 port and 6 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs also support 1000Base T SFPs model number JX SFP 1GE T 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs 52 The 1 port Gigabit Ethernet ePIM is supported on J4350 and J6350 Services Routers and is available in two versions one with copper connector see Figure 26 on page 52 the other with small form factor pluggable SFP transceivers see Figure 27 on page 53 Figure 26 Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 9003851 Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Figure 27 SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 9003852 Features The Gigabit Ethernet ePIM provides the following key features m
204. e session If the information does not match or the certificate has expired you are not able to access the router through HTTPS Without SSL encryption communication between your router and the browser is sent in the open and can be intercepted We recommend that you enable HTTPS access on your WAN interfaces On J series Services Routers HTTP access is enabled by default on the built in management interfaces By default HTTPS access is supported on any interface with an SSL server certificate Before you begin initial configuration complete the following tasks m Establish basic connectivity See Establishing Basic Connectivity on page 151 154 1H Secure Web Access Overview Chapter 8 Configuring Secure Web Access m Obtain an SSL certificate from a trusted signing authority See Generating SSL Certificates on page 155 Generating SSL Certificates To enable secure Web access you must first generate a digital SSL certificate and then enable HTTPS access on the Services Router To generate an SSL certificate 1 Enter the following openssl command in your Secure Shell command line interface The openssl command generates a self signed SSL certificate in the privacy enhanced mail PEM format It writes the certificate and an unencrypted 1024 bit RSA private key to the specified file openssl req x509 nodes newkey rsa 1024 keyout filename pem out filename pem Replace filename with the name of a file in whic
205. e sure that only authorized service personnel perform other system services m Keep the area around the chassis clear and free from dust before during and after installation m Keep tools away from areas where people could trip over them while walking m Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry such as rings bracelets or chains which could become caught in the chassis m Wear safety glasses if you are working under any conditions that could be hazardous to your eyes m Donot perform any actions that create a potential hazard to people or make the equipment unsafe m Never attempt to lift an object that is too heavy for one person to handle m Never install or manipulate wiring during electrical storms m Never install electrical jacks in wet locations unless the jacks are specifically designed for wet environments m Operate the Services Router only when it is properly grounded Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 249 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide m The separate protective earthing terminal provided on this product shall be permanently connected to earth m Replace fuses only with fuses of the same type and rating m Do not open or remove chassis covers or sheet metal parts unless instructions are provided in this manual Such an action could cause severe electrical shock m Do not push or force any objects through any opening in the chassis frame Such an action could result in electr
206. eat tokens available for each model Table 58 Maximum Power and Heat Capacities of J series Models Model Low Power Capacity High Power Capacity tokens tokens Heat Capacity tokens J2320 50 50 68 J2350 84 84 84 J4350 100 100 100 J6350 100 100 100 114 1H Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation Network Cable Specifications The Services Router supports interfaces that use various kinds of network cable For information about the type of cable used by each interface see Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 223 ISDN Provisioning You might need a network termination type 1 NT1 device to connect your ISDN interface to the ISDN service Contact your service provider for details on the following information m External NT1 device and ISDN cable m Ifthe two items are required where to obtain the items m List of NTI vendors Site Preparation Checklist The checklist in Table 59 on page 115 summarizes the tasks you need to perform when preparing a site for Services Router installation Table 59 Site Preparation Checklist Item or Task Performed By Date Notes Verify that environmental factors such as temperature and humidity do not exceed router tolerances Measure the distances between external power sources and the router installation site Select the type of rack Plan the rack location inclu
207. eature Category J series Feature Separate License Internet Protocols IPv4 IPv6 routing and forwarding J series Software Features and Licenses m 7 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 5 Summary of J series Features and License Requirements continued Feature Category J series Feature Separate License Routing and Open Shortest Path First OSPF Multicast Border Gateway Protocol BGP License required for advanced BGP route reflectors Routing Information Protocol version 1 RIPv1 and RIPv2 Static routes Intermediate System to Intermediate System IS IS Connectionless Network Services CLNS End system to Intermediate system ES IS protocol IS IS extensions BGP extensions Static routes Multiprotocol Label Switching MPLS Layer 2 and Layer 3 virtual private networks VPNs VPN routing and forwarding VRF table labels Traffic engineering protocols m Label Distribution Protocol LDP m Resource Reservation Protocol RSVP Multicast m Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP m Protocol Independent Multicast PIM m Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol DVMRP m Single source multicast IP Address Static addresses Management Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP 8 W J series Software Features and Licenses Chapter 1 Overview of Services Routers Table 5 Summary of J series Features and License Requir
208. ector Pinout Chassis Console Port Pinouts 234 m Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout Table 84 on page 234 describes connector pinout information for 1 port Gigabit Ethernet ePIM ports Table 84 Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ 45 Connector Pinouts Pin Signal 1 MDIO 2 MDIO 5 MDI 4 MDI2 5 MDI2 6 MDI 7 MDI3 8 MDIS5 The console port on a J series Services Router chassis has an RJ 45 connector Table 85 on page 255 provides RJ 45 chassis console connector pinout information An RJ 45 cable is supplied with the router To connect the console port to an external management device you need an RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter which is also supplied with the router Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 85 RJ 45 Chassis Console Connector Pinout Pin Signal Description 1 RTS Output Request to Send 2 DTR Output Data Terminal Ready 3 TxD Output Transmit Data 4 GND Chassis Ground 5 GND Chassis Ground 6 RxD Input Receive Data 7 DSR Input Data Set Ready 8 CTS Input Clear to Send Table 86 on page 235 describes the DB 9 connector pinouts Table 86 DB 9 Console Connector Pinout Pin Signal Direction Description 1 DCD lt Carrier Detect 2 RxD lt Receive Data 3 TxD gt Transmit Data 4 DTR gt Data Terminal Ready 5 Ground Signal Ground 6 DSR lt Da
209. ed Guide The following sections describe the label location on each type of component m J2320 and J2350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels on page 214 m J4350 and J6350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels on page 215 m PIM Serial Number Label on page 216 m Power Supply Serial Number Labels on page 216 J2320 and J2350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels J2320 and J2350 Services Routers have serial number ID labels located on the back of the chassis as shown in Figure 105 on page 214 and an agency label on the bottom of the chassis as shown in Figure 106 on page 214 Figure 105 Location of the Serial Number ID Labels 9004120 J2350JH COM Q0 1 cb307 700 DL JN 10C4720ADL COO AENEAN EIN Serial number ID label Figure 106 Location of the Agency Labels Models Serial MAC Mig Date a g004144 214 HN Locating Component Serial Numbers Chapter 12 Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware J4350 and J6350 Chassis Serial Number and Agency Labels J4350 and J6350 Services Routers have serial number ID labels on the back of the chassis as shown in Figure 107 on page 215 and an agency label on the bottom front corner as shown in Figure 108 on page 215 Figure 107 Location of Serial Number ID Labels wow D Ki any 9003837 Wu p pu HU J 4350 JB LOA B1 HERI IIT MU 00121ea92500 208 2800 06D IL 0008 NNN 0010dbd38580
210. ed documentation are the confidential property of Juniper As such Customer shall exercise all reasonable commercial efforts to maintain the Software and associated documentation in confidence which at a minimum includes restricting access to the Software to Customer employees and contractors having a need to use the Software for Customer s internal business purposes 7 Ownership Juniper and Juniper s licensors respectively retain ownership of all right title and interest including copyright in and to the Software associated documentation and all copies of the Software Nothing in this Agreement constitutes a transfer or conveyance of any right title or interest in the Software or associated documentation or a sale of the Software associated documentation or copies of the Software 8 Warranty Limitation of Liability Disclaimer of Warranty The warranty applicable to the Software shall be as set forth in the warranty statement that accompanies the Software the Warranty Statement Nothing in this Agreement shall give rise to any obligation to support the Software Support services may be purchased separately Any such support shall be governed by a separate written support services agreement TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW JUNIPER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOST PROFITS LOSS OF DATA OR COSTS OR PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES OR FOR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT
211. ed in the router chassis like PIMs but are controlled by the Avaya Communication Manager CM software rather than the JUNOS software For a complete list of supported modules see Avaya VoIP Modules on page 66 For J series Services Router PIM compatibility matrix and datasheets go to http www juniper net products jseries For information about network interfaces and for configuration instructions see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide This chapter contains the following topics m PIM and VoIP Module Terms on page 45 m Field Replaceable PIMs on page 46 m Avaya VoIP Modules on page 66 PIM and VoIP Module Terms To understand PIMs and VoIP modules become familiar with the terms defined in Table 18 on page 44 PIM and VoIP Module Terms WM 43 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 18 PIM and VoIP Module Terms Term Definition ADSL 2 2 Annex A ITU T Standard G 992 1 that defines how ADSL works over plain old telephone service POTS lines ADSL 2 2 Annex B ITU T Standard G 992 1 that defines how ADSL works over Integrated Services Digital Network ISDN lines bandwidth on demand ISDN cost control feature defining the bandwidth threshold that must be reached on all links before a Services Router initiates additional ISDN data connections to provide more bandwidth Basic Rate Interface BRI ISDN interf
212. edradingsvolgorde losgemaakt is en 48 V naar 48 V RTN naar RTN aarde naar aarde WARNING Varoitus Oikea yhdistettava kytkentajarjestys on maajohto maajohtoon RTN varten RTN 48 V varten 48 V Oikea irrotettava kytkentajarjestys on 48 V varten 48 V RTN varten RTN maajohto maajohtoon WARNING Attention C blez l approvisionnement d alimentation CC En utilisant les crochets appropri s l extr mit de c blage En reliant la puissance l ordre appropri de c blage est rectifi pour rectifier RTN RTN puis 48 V 48 V En d branchant la puissance l ordre appropri de c blage est 48 V 48 V RIN RTN a alors rectifi pour rectifier Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours tre reli d abord et d branch pour la derni re fois Notez que le fil de masse devrait toujours tre reli d abord et d branch pour la derni re fois WARNING Warnung Verdrahten Sie die Gleichstrom Versorgung mit den passenden Ans tzen am Verdrahtung Ende Wenn man Energie anschlie t wird die korrekte Verdrahtung Reihenfolge gerieben um RTN zu RTN dann 48 V bis 48 V zu reiben Wenn sie Energie trennt ist die korrekte Verdrahtung Reihenfolge 48 V bis 48 V RTN zu RTN rieb dann um zu reiben Beachten Sie da der Erdungsdraht immer zuerst angeschlossen werden und zuletzt getrennt werden sollte WARNING Avvertenza Mostra la morsettiera dell alimentatore CC Cablare l alim
213. ee compact flash 296 m Index F factory configuration resetting with RESCUE CONFIG BELLE an 22 55 failures compact Hash USB fksas ets 24 36 PIM troubleshooting erene 210 Routing Engine fan troubleshooting 210 fans GESCHIP HON eet e tte eb es 25 58 See also air filter See also cooling system failure roublesbooting eters 210 Fast Ethernet ports 4 Port Fast Ethernet ei 6 ACTIVITY status dual port PIM 6 Dual Port Fast Ethernet DIN 60 LED states 4 port epiM 62 LED states dual port DIN 6 ink activity 4 port eblM 62 ink status 4 port ePIMY ttes oo eet ets 62 LINK SPEED status dual port PIM sss 6 RJ 45 connector pinoUt eene ttes 255 FCC Part 15 compliance statement 287 FCC Part 68 compliance statement 287 feature licenses See licenses feature oVerVieW soi RE dee tyes cte der qu 7 field replaceable units replacimg 171 filter cover See air filter filter air See air filter fire extinguishers ptohibIted css lore ade tel tq be A ec fire safety requirements fire suppression equipment required uet tbe c ttes 107 shutdown regulrement 106 forit con Vertiorisz secat QU Lose cue th ette e Ded En xvii forwarding software Drocesg 40 FPC PIM slot number in command displays cele beh eet terere trs 176 215 front panel pa sore reete E elit 19 52 FRUs field replaceable units replacing 171 EWdd DEOCeSS 2s tes
214. eee 175 PIM IE MOV Bis nora tek EGG EE h 175 reducing radio frequency interference RFI 108 serial EIA 550A DCE Dinoure cee 229 serial EIA 530A DTE poinouts ees 228 serial PIM spechfticattons 223 serial RS 252 DCE pinouts eee Rem 225 serial RS 252 DTE oinoure eee 224 serial RS 422 449 EIA 449 DCE pinouts 227 serial RS 422 449 EIA 449 DTE pinouts 225 serial V 55 DCE pinouts Serial V 55 DTE pinouts cra deir Rem eds serial X 21 DCE pinouts serial X 21 DTE pinouts SHDSL RJ 11 pinouts TI RSA PIN Outs iss ciem ees TGM550 analog pinouts TGM550 console port DB 9 connector PINUS rd odias 239 TGM550 console port RJ 45 connector leie 259 d Ia e LEE 241 TIM510 EIMI pinouts eects 241 Index TIM514 analog pinouts eee 242 TIMST O DITIOULS roe A E 242 TIMS TS ele 244 TIM521 ISDN BRI pDimnours eeeeeeees 245 Canada compliance Statement 284 Cancel button J Web configuration editor 89 QUICK Configuration afina deet 88 case number or JTAGC cet a cetacean Sate 216 certificates See SSL certificates channelized El Plastica tiara 57 channelized El ports A O aden 57 LED St 3 nette denia 58 RJ 48 cable pinours ereere 235 channelized TE PIM eich lod det of channelized T1 ports GESCHIPUIOMN e 57 LEDs States ssa tee Aet epe rase piter us 58 RJ 48 cable poinouts aeara a eeds 255 chassis alarm conditions and remedies 209 componen
215. eee esce ted EREN rare dase 46 PIMS SUDDOEFted nimeen dte tetur un 47 POETS SUPPONE geen veste ere geseet RE 47 powermanagement ectetur titt haa 112 power supplies See power supplies J6550 restricted access installation 25 37 38 120 TIM SL O s tse Pieces mo itat Adeo e UE Ol n 74 TIME texit atn aber 75 TIMSTO ad oa rte dette dato 76 MMS UE eege earen 78 TIMB2 1 eege sde tent em texta ee eer eeneg 79 USB POT Paid Use re PEN EROS 56 Japan compliance statement oi ceso 286 JTAC Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center contacting ursus n SE ec 212 contacting for hardware rerum 216 information required for hardware return 216 Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center See JTAC JUNOS CLI CEL terminal ote e ede dee rea 92 command completion e rerrerrer 95 command ierakclty wis eaeteeee darkest a epe ata 91 command Modes sedo tette dina 82 command prompts See command prompts connecting locally connecting remotely CONSOLE yale sieh Dein sd e eese context sensitive help zu editing Reystrokes ie edes environment changing 97 dle tierna e r 98 managing licenses 165 sia s A 82 Screen de 98 300 m Index screen width TE SM ous emet tro see ane teltieE e terminal Pecos 99 Working directory ui sce eer teret oars 98 JUNOS Internet software release notes URD ninos ra XV JUNOS software establishing Connectivip ereere 151 establis
216. elp command completion and Emacs style keyboard sequences for moving around on the command line and scrolling through a buffer of recently executed commands The CLI has two modes m Operational mode Complete set of commands to control the CLI environment monitor and troubleshoot network connectivity manage the Services Router and enter configuration mode m Configuration mode Complete set of commands to configure the Services Router This guide refers to configuration mode as the CLI configuration editor For more information about the CLI see Using the Command Line Interface on page 91 Before you start the user interface you must perform the initial Services Router configuration described in Establishing Basic Connectivity on page 151 After the initial configuration you use your username and password and the hostname or IP address of the router to start the user interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview Using the J Web Interface This section contains the following topics m Starting the J Web Interface on page 83 m jJ Web Layout on page 83 m Elements of the J Web Interface on page 84 m Navigating the J Web Interface on page 87 m J Web Sessions on page 90 For more information about using the J Web interface see the J Web Interface User Guide Starting the J Web Interface To start the J Web interface 1 Launch your HTTP enabled or HTTPS enabled Web browser To use HTTPS you must
217. ements continued Feature Category J series Feature Separate License Encapsulation Ethernet m Media access control MAC encapsulation m 802 1p tagging m Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPoE m Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATM for asymmetric digital subscriber line ADSL or symmetric high speed digital subscriber line SHDSL Circuit cross connect CCC m Translational cross connect TCC Synchronous Point to Point Protocol PPP Frame Relay High level Data Link Control HDLC Serial encapsulation over RS 232 RS 449 X 21 V 35 and EIA 530 connections 802 10 filtering and forwarding Multilink Frame Relay Multilink PPP Data link switching DLSw Traffic Management Policing and shaping Class based queuing with prioritization Weighted random early detection WRED Queuing by virtual LAN VLAN data link connection identifier DLCI interface or bundle Ethernet Switching Access switching provided by multiport Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs J series Software Features and Licenses m 9 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 5 Summary of J series Features and License Requirements continued Feature Category J series Feature Separate License Security Common Criteria Network attack detection Denial of service DoS and distributed DoS protection Generic routing enca
218. ements and Specifications Mm 221 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 222 pm Jseries Requirements and Specifications Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts The network interfaces supported on the router accept different kinds of network cable m Serial PIM Cable Specifications on page 223 m Fast Ethernet RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 233 m Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 255 m Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 234 m Chassis Console Port Pinouts on page 234 m El and T1 RJ 48 Cable Pinouts on page 235 m E3 and T5 BNC Connector Pinout on page 238 wm ADSL and G SHDSL RJ 11 Connector Pinout on page 238 m ISDN RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 239 m Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules on page 239 Serial PIM Cable Specifications The 2 port serial PIM uses the cables and connectors summarized in Table 71 on page 223 Pinouts are detailed in Table 72 on page 224 through Table 81 on page 232 Table 71 2 Port Serial PIM Cables and Connectors End to End Name Connector Connector Hardware Conductors Pinouts RS 232 DTE DB 25 male 4 40 threaded 13 Table 72 on page 224 jackscrews RS 232 DCE DB 25 female 4 40 threaded jacknuts 13 Table 73 on page 225 RS 422 449 EIA 449 DC 37 DB 37 male 4 40 threaded 25 Table 74 on page 225 DTE jackscrews RS 422 449 EIA 449 DC 37 DB 37 female 4 40 threaded jacknuts 25 Table
219. emoving an AC Power Supply from J6350 Routers on page 192 m Installing an AC Power Supply in J6550 Routers on page 195 m Replacing DC Power Supply Cables on page 194 m Removing a DC Power Supply on page 195 m Installing a DC Power Supply on page 196 Replacing AC Power Supply Cords To replace the AC power cord for a redundant power supply Replacing Power System Components N 191 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 1 Locate a replacement power cord with the type of plug appropriate for your geographical location see AC Power Connection and Power Cord Specifications on page 109 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 3 Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off oe NOTE If the power supply is a redundant power supply in a J6350 Services Router you can leave the router powered on and power flowing in the other power supply 4 Unplug the power cord from the power source receptacle 5 Unplug the power cord from the appliance inlet on the power supply faceplate 6 Insert the appliance coupler end of the replacement power cord into the appliance inlet on the power supply fa
220. enabled For example if WAN Access TGM550s are installedin Configuration Guide slots 2 and 3 only the one in slot 2 is enabled 68 Avaya VoIP Modules Table 35 J4350 and J6350 Avaya VoIP Module Summary continued Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Software Release for Slot and Port Maximum Number on a Sample Interface Name PIM Also Called This PIM Numbering Chassis type pim 0 port TIM508 m TIM508 JUNOS 8 5 and later Slots 1 through 6 Three See Planning for Analog media Power Telephony module Management on page 112 Interface m TIMS508 Module TIM510E1 T1 m TIM510 JUNOS 8 2 and later Slots 1 through 6 Two Telephony E1 T1 media Interface module Module m TIM510 TIM514 m TIM514 JUNOS 8 2 and later Slots 1 through 6 Four Analog analog media Telephony module Interface B TIM514 Module TIM516 m TIM516 JUNOS 8 5 and later Slots 1 through 6 Three See Planning for Analog analog media Power Telephony module Management on page 112 Interface m TIM516 Module TIM518 m TIM518 JUNOS 8 5 and later Slots 1 through 6 Three See Planning for Analog analog media Power Telephony module Management on page 112 Interface m TIM518 Module TIM521 BRI m TIM521 BRI JUNOS 8 2 and later Slots 1 through 6 Two Telephony media Interface module Module m TIM521 TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module The TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module Figure 41
221. ense keys installed on the Services Router with the J Web license manager 1 2 In the J Web interface select Manage gt Licenses Under Installed Licenses click Download Keys to download all the license keys installed on the router to a single file 164 m Managing J series Licenses with the J Web Interface 9 4 Chapter 9 Installing and Managing J series Licenses Select Save it to disk and specify the file to which the license keys are to be written Go on to Verifying J series License Management on page 166 Managing J series Licenses with the CLI To manage the J series licenses with the CLI perform the following tasks Adding New Licenses with the CLI on page 165 Deleting a License with the CLI on page 165 Saving License Keys with the CLI on page 166 Adding New Licenses with the CLI To add a new license key to the Services Router with the CLI 1 2 Enter operational mode in the CLI Enter one of the following CLI commands m To adda license key from a file or URL enter the following command specifying the filename or the URL where the key is located request system license add filename url a To add a license key from the terminal enter the following command request system license add terminal When prompted enter the license key separating multiple license keys with a blank line If the license key you enter is invalid an error is generated when you press Ctrl D to exit license
222. ent as of the date listed in the revision history YEAR 2000 NOTICE Juniper Networks hardware and software products are Year 2000 compliant The JUNOS software has no known time related limitations through the year 2058 However the NTP application is known to have some difficulty in the year 2056 SOFTWARE LICENSE The terms and conditions for using this software are described in the software license contained in the acknowledgment to your purchase order or to the extent applicable to any reseller agreement or end user purchase agreement executed between you and Juniper Networks By using this software you indicate that you understand and agree to be bound by those terms and conditions Generally speaking the software license restricts the manner in which you are permitted to use the software and may contain prohibitions against certain uses The software license may state conditions under which the license is automatically terminated You should consult the license for further details For complete product documentation please see the Juniper Networks Web site at www juniper net techpubs End User License Agreement READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT AGREEMENT BEFORE DOWNLOADING INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE BY DOWNLOADING INSTALLING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE EXPRESSING YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN YOU AS CUSTOMER OR IF YOU ARE NOT THE CUSTOMER AS A REPRESENTATIVE AGENT AUTHORIZED TO BIND THE CUSTOMER
223. entatore CC usando i connettori adatti all estremit del cablaggio come illustrato La corretta sequenza di cablaggio da massa a massa da positivo a positivo da linea ad L e da negativo a negativo da neutro a N Tenere presente che il filo di massa deve sempre venire collegato per primo e scollegato per ultimo WARNING Advarsel Riktig tilkoples tilkoplingssekvens er jord til jord RTN til RTN 48 V til 48 V Riktig frakoples tilkoplingssekvens er 48 V til 48 V RTN til RTN jord til jord WARNING Aviso Ate con alambre la fuente de potencia cc Usando los terminales apropiados en el extremo del cableado Al conectar potencia la secuencia apropiada del cableado se muele para moler RTN a RTN entonces 48 V a 48 V Al desconectar potencia la secuencia apropiada del cableado es 48 V a 48 V RTN a RTN entonces moli para moler Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information conectar siempre primero y desconectar por ultimo Observe que el alambre de tierra se debe conectar siempre primero y desconectar por ultimo WARNING jAtenci n Wire a fonte de alimentac o de DC Usando os tal es apropriados na extremidade da fiac o Ao conectar a pot ncia a seq ncia apropriada da fiac o mo da para moer RTN a RTN ent o 48 V a 48 V Ao desconectar a pot ncia a seq ncia apropriada da fia o 48 V a
224. eparado y capacitado 250 1H Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Varning Denna utrustning ska endast installeras och bytas ut av utbildad och kvalificerad personal Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage Many Services Router hardware components are sensitive to damage from static electricity Some components can be impaired by voltages as low as 30 V You can easily generate potentially damaging static voltages whenever you handle plastic or foam packing material or if you move components across plastic or carpets Observe the following guidelines to minimize the potential for electrostatic discharge ESD damage which can cause intermittent or complete component failures m Always use an ESD wrist strap or ankle strap and make sure that it is in direct contact with your skin CAUTION For safety periodically check the resistance value of the ESD strap The measurement should be in the range of 1 to 10 Mohms m When handling any component that is removed from the chassis make sure the equipment end of your ESD strap is attached to one of the electrostatic discharge points on the chassis which are shown in Figure 1 on page 14 Figure 2 on page 15 and Figure 15 on page 28 m Avoid contact between the component and your clothing ESD voltages emitted from clothing can still damage components m When removing or installing a component always place it component side up
225. equirements and Specifications Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation A CAUTION To comply with intrabuilding lightning surge requirements intrabuilding wiring must be shielded and the shield for the wiring must be grounded at both ends Router Power Requirements Table 54 on page 109 and Table 55 on page 109 list the AC and DC power system electrical specifications for J series Services Routers Table 54 AC and DC Power System Electrical Specifications for J2320 and J2350 Routers Item Specification AC input voltage 100 to 240 VAC nominal AC input line frequency 50 to 60 Hz AC system current rating J2320 Services Routers 5 2 A to 1 5 A J2350 Services Routers 5 5 A to 1 5 A DC input voltage 48 to 60 VDC operating range DC system current rating 72A Table 55 AC and DC Power System Electrical Specifications for J4350 and J6350 Routers Item Specification AC input voltage 100 to 240 VAC nominal AC input line frequency 50 to 60 Hz AC system current rating J4350 Services Routers 6 A J6350 Services Routers 8 A DC input voltage 48 to 60 VDC operating range DC system current rating 20A AC Power Connection and Power Cord Specifications 2 NOTE The AC power cord for the Services Router is intended for use with the router only and not for any other use Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications W 109 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Servic
226. er cable is connected avoid exposure to radiation and do not stare into open apertures WARNING Waarschuwing Aangezien onzichtbare straling vanuit de opening van de poort kan komen als er geen fiberkabel aangesloten is dient blootstelling aan straling en het kijken in open openingen vermeden te worden WARNING Varoitus Koska portin aukosta voi emittoitua n kym t nt s teily kun kuitukaapelia ei ole kytkettyn v lt s teilylle altistumista l k katso avoimiin aukkoihin Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information WARNING Attention Des radiations invisibles l il nu pouvant traverser l ouverture du port lorsqu aucun c ble en fibre optique n y est connect il est recommand de ne pas regarder fixement l int rieur de ces ouvertures WARNING Warnung Aus der Port ffnung k nnen unsichtbare Strahlen emittieren wenn kein Glasfaserkabel angeschlossen ist Vermeiden Sie es sich den Strahlungen auszusetzen und starren Sie nicht in die Offnungen WARNING Avvertenza Quando i cavi in fibra non sono inseriti radiazioni invisibili possono essere emesse attraverso l apertura della porta Evitate di esporvi alle radiazioni e non guardate direttamente nelle aperture WARNING Advarsel Unnga utsettelse for str ling og stirr ikke inn i pninger som er apne fordi usynlig str ling kan emiteres fra portens apning nar det ikke er tilkoblet en fiberka
227. er the show command and all commands that display information about the routing table are grouped under the show route command Figure 55 on page 91 illustrates a portion of the show command hierarchy Figure 53 CLI Command Hierarchy Example show bgp isis ospf route system I LI gue A E brief exact protocol table terse B To execute a command you enter the full command name starting at the top level of the hierarchy For example to display a brief view of the routes in the routing table use the command show route brief The hierarchical organization results in commands that have a regular syntax and provides the following features that simplify CLI use m Consistent command names Commands that provide the same type of function have the same name regardless of the portion of the software they are operating on For example all show commands display software information and statistics and all clear commands erase various types of system information m Lists and short descriptions of available commands Information about available commands is provided at each level of the CLI command hierarchy If you type a question mark at any level you see a list of the available commands along with a short description of each command m Command completion Command completion for command names keywords and command options is also available at each level of the hierarchy If you type a partial comma
228. ere to install the Services Router and verify that the rack or installation site meets the requirements described in Preparing for Router Installation on page 103 For installation gather the following equipment and tools For J2320 and J2350 Services Routers Number 2 Phillips screwdriver and mounting screws appropriate for your rack Before You Begin M 117 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide m For J4350 and J6350 Services Routers Mounting brackets and screws provided number 2 Phillips screwdriver and mounting screws appropriate for your rack To connect the router to power and ground have ready a grounding cable and lug as specified in Chassis Grounding on page 123 and the power cords or cords shipped with the router You must supply your own power cables if you have a DC powered router See DC Power Connection and Power Cable Specifications on page 111 es NOTE The AC power cord for the Services Router is intended for use with the router only and not for any other use To connect network interfaces have ready a length of cable used by the interface as specified in Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 223 If your router has ISDN ports you might need an NT1 device to connect to the ISDN service For details see ISDN Provisioning on page 115 Unpacking a J series Services Router 118 m The Services Router is shipped i
229. erfaces Configuring Digital Subscriber Line Interfaces Configuring Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet Configuring ISDN JUNOS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide JUNOS Interfaces Command Reference Configuring Link Services Interfaces JUNOS Services Interfaces Configuration Guide JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference Configuring VoIP JUNOS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide JUNOS Interfaces Command Reference Configuring uPIMs as Ethernet Switches JUNOS Network Interfaces Configuration Guide JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference Routing Overview Configuring Static Routes Configuring a RIP Network Configuring an OSPF Network Configuring the IS IS Protocol Configuring BGP Sessions JUNOS Routing Protocols Configuration Guide JUNOS Routing Protocols and Policies Command Reference J series Services Router Advanced WAN Access Configuration Guide Related Juniper Networks Documentation WI xix J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 4 J series Guides and Related JUNOS Software Publications continued Chapter in a J series Guide Corresponding JUNOS Software Manual Multiprotocol Label Switching Overview m JUNOS MPLS Applications Configuration Guide JUNOS Routing Protocols and Policies Command Reference JU
230. erfaces Click OK Verifying Secure Web Access To verify that the Services Router has the secure access settings you configured perform the following tasks Displaying an SSL Certificate Configuration on page 159 Displaying a Secure Access Configuration on page 160 Displaying an SSL Certificate Configuration Purpose Action Display the SSL certificate configuration From the J Web interface select Configuration gt View and Edit gt View Configuration Text Alternatively from configuration mode in the CLI enter the show security command The following sample output displays an SSL certificate generated with instructions in Generating SSL Certificates on page 155 edit user RO show security certificates m 159 Verifying Secure Web Access J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide local new BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY nMIICXQIBAAKBgQC C5UI4frNqbi qPwbTiOkJvqoDw2YgYse0Z5zzVJyErgSg954T nEUHM67Ck8hAOrCnbOYO SY Y5rCXLf4 2s8k9EypLtYRw TS66DZoxl4viqE7 HSsk n5sQw UDBIw7 MJ OpA KYiFf4CbBBbjIMQJOHFudW6ISVBSIONkzX FT ni95ddka6ilRnArEb4VFCRh e1QBdp1UjziYf7 NuzDx4Z n END RSA PRIVATE KEY n BEGIN CERTIFICATE NnMIIDjDCCAvWgAwIBAgIBADANBgkqhkiG9wOBAQQ FADCBkTELMAkKGALUEBhMCdXMx nCzZAUBgNVBAgTAMNhMRIWEAYDVQQHEwizdW5ue HB1YnMxDTALBgENVBAMTBGpucHbODAiBgkghkiGNn9wOBCQEWFWB5iaGFyZ2F2YUB fLUYAnBYmsYWOH n END CERTIFICATE n SECRET DATA Meaning The output
231. ernstige brandwonden veroorzaken of het metalen voorwerp aan de aansluitklemmen lassen WARNING Varoitus Ennen kuin ty skentelet voimavirtajohtoihin kytkettyjen laitteiden parissa ota pois kaikki korut sormukset kaulakorut ja kellot mukaan lukien Metalliesineet kuumenevat kun ne ovat yhteydessa s hk virran ja maan kanssa ja ne voivat aiheuttaa vakavia palovammoja tai hitsata metalliesineet kiinni liit nt napoihin WARNING Attention Avant d acc der cet quipement connect aux lignes lectriques ter tout bijou anneaux colliers et montres compris Lorsqu ils sont branch s l alimentation et reli s la terre les objets m talliques chauffent ce qui peut provoquer des blessures graves ou souder l objet m tallique aux bornes WARNING Warnung Vor der Arbeit an Ger ten die an das Netz angeschlossen sind jeglichen Schmuck einschlie lich Ringe Ketten und Uhren abnehmen Metallgegenstande erhitzen sich wenn sie an das Netz und die Erde angeschlossen werden und k nnen schwere Verbrennungen verursachen oder an die Anschlu amp klemmen angeschweift werden Safety Guidelines and Warnings Wm 277 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 278 m WARNING Avvertenza Prima di intervenire su apparecchiature collegate alle linee di alimentazione togliersi qualsiasi monile inclusi anelli collane braccialetti ed orologi Gli oggetti metallici si riscaldano quando so
232. ers 1 and 2 Packing the Services Router for Shipment To pack the router for shipment follow this procedure iM Retrieve the shipping carton and packing materials in which the router was originally shipped If you do not have these materials contact your Juniper Networks representative about approved packaging materials Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 On the console or other management device connected to the master Routing Engine enter CLI operational mode and issue the following command to shut down the router software user host gt request system halt Wait until a message appears on the console confirming that the operating system has halted For more information about the command see the J series Services Router Administration Guide Shut down power to the router by pressing the power button on the front panel of the router Disconnect power from the router For instructions see Replacing AC Power Supply Cords on page 191 and Replacing DC Power Supply Cables on page 194 Remove the cables that connect to all external devices For instructions see Removing PIM Cables on page 175 Remove all field replaceable units FRUs from the router If the rou
233. ervices Router Getting Started Guide Installing a PIM 174 m A CAUTION Do not hot swap PIMs Failure to power off the router before removing or installing a PIM might result in damage to the hardware Figure 74 Installing a PIM CAUTION Do not install a combination of PIMs in a single chassis that exceeds the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis If J series power management is enabled PIMs that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis is powered on To verify that the combination of PIMs to be installed in a chassis do not exceed the power and heat capacities for the J4350 or J6350 router see Planning for Power Management on page 112 To install a PIM see Figure 74 on page 174 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the Services Router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 2 Press and release the power button to power off the router Verify that the POWER LED blinks and then turns off 3 Align the notches in the connector at the rear of the PIM with the notches in the PIM slot in the Services Router and slide the PIM in until it lodges firmly in the router CAUTION Slide the PIM straight into the slot to avoid damaging the components o
234. es On the product is a label that contains the FCC registration number for this device If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant See installation instructions for details If this device causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required The telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of this equipment If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements m 287 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide If trouble is experienced with this equipment or for repair or warranty information please follow the applicable procedures explained in the Technical Support section of this manual m FCC Registration Number See label on product m Required Connector USOC RJ 48C m Service Order Code SOC 6 ON 288 HN Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements Part 5 index m Index on page 291 Index m 289 J2320 J2350 J4350
235. es Features and License Requirements continued Feature Category J series Feature Separate License Activity Logging and Monitoring System log J Web event viewer Traceroute Administration Supports the following external administrator databases m RADIUS m TACACS Autoinstallation Configuration rollback Button operated configuration rescue CONFIG Confirmation of configuration changes Software upgrades Supports the following features for automating network operations and troubleshooting m Commit scripts m Operation scripts m Event policies J series Software Features and Licenses M 11 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 12 HN Jseries Software Features and Licenses Chapter 2 System Overview J series J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Routers have chassis that are similar but with important differences J2320 J2350 and J4350 routers have a single nonredundant power supply and an optional Crypto Accelerator Module J6350 routers have redundant power supplies and a standard Crypto Accelerator Module For field replaceable PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules the J2320 has three slots the J2350 has five slots and the J4550 and J6350 have six slots Of the six slots two on the J4350 and four on the J6350 are enhanced high speed slots All J series routers run the JUNOS software This chapter contains the following topics m
236. es Router Getting Started Guide Detachable AC power cords each 2 5 m approximately 8 ft long are supplied with the Services Router The appliance coupler at the female end of the cord inserts into the appliance inlet on the faceplate of the AC power supply The coupler is type C19 as described by International Electrotechnical Commission IEC standard 60320 The plug at the male end of the power cord fits into the power source receptacle that is standard for your geographical location NOTE In North America AC power cords must not exceed 4 5 m approximately 14 75 ft in length to comply with National Electrical Code NEC Sections 400 8 NFPA 75 5 2 2 and 210 52 and Canadian Electrical Code CEC Section 4 010 3 The cords supplied with the router are in compliance Table 56 on page 110 lists AC power cord specifications provided for each country or region Table 56 AC Power Cord Specifications Country Electrical Specifications Plug Standards Australia 250 VAC 10 A 50 Hz AS NZ 3112 1993 China 250 VAC 10 A 50 Hz GB2099 1 1996 and GB1002 1996 CH1 10P Europe except Italy and 250 VAC 10 A 50 Hz CEE 7 VII United Kingdom Italy 250 VAC 10 A 50 Hz CEI 23 16 VII Japan 125 VAC 12 A 50 Hz or 60 Hz JIS 8303 North America 125 VAC 10 A 60 Hz NEMA 5 15 United Kingdom 250 VAC 10 A 50 Hz BS 1363A Y Australia Figure 54 on page 110 illustrates the plug on the power cord f
237. es for lifting and moving a Services Router m Before moving the Services Router read the guidelines in Preparing for Router Installation on page 105 to verify that the intended site meets the specified power environmental and clearance requirements m Before lifting or moving the Services Router disconnect all external cables m As when lifting any heavy object lift most of the weight with your legs rather than your back Keep your knees bent and your back relatively straight and avoid twisting your body as you lift Balance the load evenly and be sure that your footing is solid Installation Instructions Warning WARNING Read the installation instructions before you connect the router to a power source Waarschuwing Raadpleeg de installatie aanwijzingen voordat u het systeem met de voeding verbindt Varoitus Lue asennusohjeet ennen j rjestelm n yhdistamista virtalahteeseen Attention Avant de brancher le syst me sur la source d alimentation consulter les directives d installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Warnung Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen bevor Sie das System an die Stromquelle anschlie en WARNING Avvertenza Consultare le istruzioni di installazione prima di collegare il sistema all alimentatore Advarsel Les installasjonsinstruksjonene for systemet kobles til stramkilden Aviso Leia as instru es de instala o antes de li
238. et een 19 J2320 and J2350 Front Panel 19 Physical Interface Modules PIMs sssssssss nn rccconnnnno 20 Power Button and POWER LED ee 20 STATUS TED EE 21 E RE RE 21 LEE EE ER RESET CONEIGSBUITOD ts s aat Nee do E ds 22 Built In Gigabit Ethernet Porte cese eterne 25 CONSOLE PONS ds eit Ate este se NM t PIT 25 AUXBOFPU sua dota Eeer tee Tee Ad Be oo ie 25 RE Oe 24 J2320 and J2350 External Compact Flashes 00 0 0 eee eeeteetteeeees 24 Table of Contents 8 vii J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Chapter 3 viii Table of Contents J2320 Feuer iid nr ett bte doe been tata e MALI RM LAM at int een 24 25550 e EE 24 12320 and 2550 Cooling System TEE 25 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features ssssssssssseee 26 4550 and 6550 EE 27 4350 and J6350 Midplane 4 5 etri nites nines ce EE EN Ee 31 J4350 and J6350 Routing Engine Hardware 31 4350 and J6550 BOOt DEVICES dct eer usi qe Sb nw dete 31 J4550 ANG J6350 Eront Panel sist ca 32 Physical Interface Modules GM 32 Power Button and POWER LED uuu sse 33 STATUS DED p i T a lee ep itp e ave C SER rats 33 ALARM RN 34 Ip PD EN 54 RESET COBNEIG Button 2 5i roe en t eee e re a 35 Built In Gigabit Ethernet Porte 35 CONSOLE ROLE der teats te tege ettet ttt cut 36 AUX POFLU ose ii pa rr mpeg Rar tee ee 56 USB POPE dein oti e eee e erp tet Pase te us 56 4550 BOESEN pe ae 56 6550 PoOWeE SySIeTITo
239. ey J Web Edit Configuration Buttons continued Function Button Clear the entries you have not yet applied to the candidate configuration and Cancel return one level up previous page in the configuration hierarchy Verify edits and apply them to the current configuration file running on the Commit Services Router Getting J Web Help The J Web interface provides two ways to display Help for the Monitor Quick Configuration Diagnose Manage Events and Alarms tasks For Help on the View and Edit configuration tasks see the related documentation provided in the Related Juniper Networks Documentation on page xviii To get Help in the J Web interface Field sensitive Help Move the cursor over the question mark next to the field for which you want more information The system displays useful information about the field Typically this Help includes one line of information about what this field does or what you must enter in a given text box For example Help for the Peer Autonomous System Number field states the value should be a number between 1 and 65535 Context sensitive Help Click Help in the taskbar to open a separate page displaying the summary of all the fields on that page To exit Help close the page You can navigate Help pages using hypertext links connecting related topics or click the following options if available at the top and bottom of each page Figure 52 on page 90 shows Help for
240. face GUI items you click or select m Inthe Logical Interfaces box select All Interfaces m To cancel the configuration click Cancel gt bold right angle bracket Separates levels in a hierarchy of J Web selections In the configuration editor hierarchy select Protocols gt Ospf Related Juniper Networks Documentation J series Services Routers are documented in multiple guides Although the J series guides provide instructions for configuring and managing a Services Router with the JUNOS CLI they are not a comprehensive JUNOS software resource For complete xviii M Related Juniper Networks Documentation About This Guide documentation of the statements and commands described in J series guides see the JUNOS software manuals listed in Table 4 on page xix Table 4 J series Guides and Related JUNOS Software Publications Chapter in a J series Guide Corresponding JUNOS Software Manual Getting Started Guide for Your Router Services Router User Interface Overview Establishing Basic Connectivity JUNOS CLI User Guide JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide Using Services Router Configuration Tools JUNOS CLI User Guide JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Interfaces Overview Configuring DS1 DS3 Ethernet and Serial Interfaces Configuring Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI Int
241. fare e ee ee 3 7 packing for shipment 218 PIM OVeIVIEW s soi Nad dp tec tr i eR etes ote dede 45 powering on and oft 129 preparation checklist nieto teet o 115 safety and Compllance 247 Sit prepara HON a a EE seins 103 SODEWATeU ect e r A 39 ee feet 155 UP PACKING ee eisen et a denen 118 user interfaces See user interfaces SESSIONS JW ED ta tede S set cli commands Set Up page Oe dell EE field summary setup configuration editor 147 Quick Conftguration 145 r quiremerits om teet ce A RT Ins 156 SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs optical interface S ppOEFt ue tertia 54 oM E 52 e Ee TED tg eet eo dope 53 SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs optical interface support 52 OVETVICW ocn ee ote serbe bet delete bte 49 SHDSL ports GESCTIPUON sc sux dut in pb OH eo 65 LED states on a G SHDSL PIM ee 66 RJ 11 connector poinouts seeni 258 shipping carton packing a Services Router for shipment 218 packing components for shipment 218 SAVING cette e et e EORR ET teca tod eot cedes 118 show chassis alarms Commande 209 show chassis fpc pic status Commande 176 show chassis hardware command identifying NEBS compliant routers 58 locating component serial numbers 215 verifying Crypto Accelerator Module installati n septem Red 201 204 show chassis power ratings command 211 show chassis routing engine command
242. figure this address you will lose your connection to the J Web interface when you click Apply or OK Management Access Allow Telnet Access Allows remote access to the router using Telnet Po enable Telnet access select the check box Allow JUNOScript over Clear Text Access Allows JUNOScript to access the router using a protocol for sending unencrypted text over a TCP connection To enable JUNOScript access over clear text select the check box Allow SSH Access Allows remote access to the router using SSH To enable SSH access select the check box 146 nm Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity Configuring Basic Settings with a Configuration Editor To establish basic connectivity on a Services Router you identify the router connect the router to the network and specify basic network settings In a typical network the Services Router has the basic settings listed in Table 62 on page 147 Determine the values to set on the Services Router in your network Table 62 Sample Settings on a Services Router Services Router Property Sample Value Services Router hostname routera Access for user root SSH RSA public key IP address of the NTP server used to synchronize system time on the Services Router 10 148 2 21 Services Router location Sunnyvale California USA which is in the Americ
243. g e Web EE 164 DRAM modules lafe UL ter eet ttes abes 190 JOC ATI OR WEE 188 le EE 189 dry chemical fire extinguishers prohibited 107 DS1 ports See El ports T1 ports DS3 ports See E3 ports T5 ports DSL See ADSL SHDSL dual inline memory modules See DRAM modules Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM 57 Dual PortEl Plane roto Rees 56 D al Port ES Plis alli 59 Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM 60 REI ele EEN EE 55 Dual Port TA PIM sis cse oe p e ERR 56 D al Port TS PIM secant lancia dado e PRO Corr 59 E E1 ports GESCHIPION e ee m el re aM 56 See also channelized E1 ports DA ee eet enn nte nere Ec dd 57 RJ 48 cable poinouts etsek teke ea 255 El trunk ports TIM510 descripta temet a Ee RE Eee Pu tanta nado 74 pinouts E1 T1 media module See TIM508 See TIM510 See TIM516 See TIM518 E3 ports BNC connector pinguis inia ee 238 descripto Me Eege ee Ee 59 LED States pdas 60 earth ground See grounding Index mM 295 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide earthquakes rack mount TequirementS eects 105 seismic requirements 106 EIA 550A DCE cable pinouts 3229 EIA 550A DTE cable pinouts 228 electrical Specification eoo Se red teens 109 electricity safety Warnitlgs ee it ng eee t i add 252 wiring guidelires s siete ttt dede 108 electromagnetic compatibility EMC See EMC electromagnetic interference EMI See See
244. g a Services Router 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 2 Use a grounding cable to connect the router to earth ground For cable requirements see Chassis Grounding on page 123 a Verify that a licensed electrician has attached an appropriate grounding cable lug to the grounding cable b Connect one end of the grounding cable to a proper earth ground such as the rack in which the router is installed c With a Phillips screwdriver remove the screw and washer from the PEM nut at the grounding point on the rear of the chassis d Place the grounding lug at the other end of the cable over the grounding point as shown in Figure 65 on page 128 and Figure 66 on page 129 e Secure the cable lug to the grounding point first with the washer then with the screw On J2320 and J2350 routers use the screw containing a captive washer to secure the cable lug to the grounding point NOTE A DC power supply in a Services Router becomes grounded when you connect a grounding cable between the router and earth ground 5 For each power supply a Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is O V and that the cable leads cannot become active in any way during installation CAUTION You must ensure that power connect
245. gar o sistema sua fonte de energia jAtenci n Ver las instrucciones de instalaci n antes de conectar el sistema a la red de alimentaci n Varning Las installationsanvisningarna innan du kopplar systemet till dess str mf rs rjningsenhet Rack Mounting Requirements and Warnings Ensure that the equipment rack into which the Services Router is installed is evenly and securely supported to avoid the hazardous condition that could result from uneven mechanical loading WARNING To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing the router in a rack take the following precautions to ensure that the system remains stable The following directives help maintain your safety m The router must be installed into a rack that is secured to the building structure m The router should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the rack m When mounting the router in a partially filled rack load the rack from the bottom to the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack m Ifthe rack is provided with stabilizing devices install the stabilizers before mounting or servicing the router in the rack WARNING Waarschuwing Om lichamelijk letsel te voorkomen wanneer u dit toestel in een rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft moet u speciale voorzorgsmaatregelen nemen om ervoor te zorgen dat het toestel stabiel blijft De onderstaande richtlijnen worden verstrekt om uw veiligheid te verze
246. gasp notification Field Replaceable IMs m 65 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide m Local and remote loopback diagnostics m ITU T G 991 2 ITU T G 994 1 and ITU T G 997 1 standards compliance NOTE Payload loopback functionality is not supported on ATM over SHDSL interfaces For pinouts of cable connectors for G SHDSL PIMs see ADSL and G SHDSL RJ 1 1 Connector Pinout on page 238 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 172 The G SHDSL PIM has two LEDs to indicate the status of the PIM and its ports Table 33 on page 66 describes the meaning of the LED states Table 33 LEDs for G SHDSL PIMs Label Color State Description ONLINE Green On steadily Online with no alarms or failures Red Disconnected Initialization of the PIM has failed Unlit Off PIM is booting STATUS Green On steadily Online with no alarms or failures Red On steadily Active with a local alarm The router has detected a failure For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide Avaya VoIP Modules The Avaya VoIP modules are installed in a J series chassis like Physical Interface Modules PIMs but they are controlled by the Avaya Communication Manager software rather than the JUNOS software CAUTION PIMs and VoIP modules are not hot swappable You must power off the Services Router before remo
247. ge 140 and Figure 70 on page 141 eS NOTE Figure 69 on page 140 and Figure 70 on page 141 show a connection to a local management device A remote connection to the router through a modem requires the cable and connector shown provided in the router s accessory box plus a DB 9 female to DB 25 male or similar adapter for your modem which you must purchase separately To connect to the CLI using a local management device through the console port on the router 1 Turn off power to the router 2 Turn off the power to the management device such as a PC or laptop computer that you are using to access the CLI 5 Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with your router into the RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter supplied with your router see Figure 69 on page 140 and Figure 70 on page 141 4 Plug the RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter into the serial port on the management device see Figure 69 on page 140 and Figure 70 on page 141 5 Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to the console port on the router Figure 69 on page 140 and Figure 70 on page 141 6 Turn on the power to the management device 7 Start your asynchronous terminal emulation application such as Microsoft Windows Hyperterminal and select the appropriate COM port to use for example COM1 Connecting to a Services Router M 139 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 140 m 8 Configure the port settings
248. gedet desea ed 17 JA O is dai 30 JOS DO tuerca rra d ete tod dete Set ein 30 rack mount redulrements i 104 105 windows J Web unpredictable results with m ltiple ai 90 wire gauge for grounding cables siioni rar 123 for telecommunications lines eee 265 wiring guidelines DC wiring sequence wamminmg ee 257 DC wiring terminations warmtmg 259 radio frequency interference RFI 108 Index mM 309 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide signaling limitations cece 108 suppressing electromagnetic interference X X21 DCE able pinout zs monet 232 X 2T DLE Cable pinOuts arien e T 231 310 m Index
249. guidelines etd eR ems 255 AC power cords electrical specifications 110 physical requirements plug types replacing stated accident steps to take ee e ete reete 261 ACT TED ties Sabatier ec ett bh tad 72 TIM5 OB seis ieget pe ER e POPE UR 74 TIMO EE 75 TIM E 76 RE ete ede e e red 77 EI 79 TIME ue b erret e 80 ACTIVITY LED Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM 61 adapter console port Classis ette o deed ets 159 142 REI ddl deste ben ideae atte e 70 addresses ge 0 0 0 for autoipnstallatton 154 TOO PB ACh us dert iei e a 134 management Interface 134 ADSL PIM descriptions ie area ite rep a eal 64 PIM AONEINES KREIS re ter ep es 65 ADSL ports GESCHPUON esta idet te pH 64 VED States t eei im ete tete te oes 65 RJ 11 connector pPINQUtS eens 238 agency APPLOVAlS tage ce oe SEA 282 air filter desc rr al lar eles 25 38 O 207 replacitig to cipes O 206 airflow HES D EN 39 Space TEqUIEE Murias sa ee ien 105 ALARM LED descripta tian etn 21 54 A A aoaie EEA 209 alarms conditions in chassis components LED ALM LED Index mM 291 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide alternative boot media See boot devices USB altitude Tequirerment ireid e Coe eren 106 analog media module See TIM514 analog telephone LINE ports TGM550 pITIOUES ne E T ee s 240 TIM508 possible Conftgurations 73 TIM514 pinouts
250. h you want the SSL certificate to be written for example new pem 2 When prompted type the appropriate information in the identification form For example type US for the country name 3 Display the contents of the file new pem cat new pem Copy the contents of this file for installing the SSL certificate You can use either J Web Quick Configuration or a configuration editor to install the SSL certificate and enable HTTPS Configuring Secure Web Access Navigate to the Secure Access Quick Configuration page by selecting Configuration gt Quick Configuration gt Secure Access On this page you can enable HTTP and HTTPS access on interfaces for managing Services Routers through the Web interface You can also install SSL certificates and enable JUNOScript over SSL with the Secure Access page Figure 72 on page 156 shows the Secure Access Quick Configuration page Configuring Secure Web Access Mm 155 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 72 Quick Configuration Secure Access Page Diagnose Manage Events ogged in as res Help About Logout Quick Configuration Secure Access Certificates Local certificates are used in providing SSL server access No certificates are defined HTTP Web Access HTTP access allows management of the router via the web interface Communication between the router web server and your browser is sent in the clear including passwords so it is recom
251. han 5 seconds The router immediately powers itself off without shutting down the operating system To remove power completely from the router unplug the AC power cord or switch off the DC power source The power button on the Services Router is a standby power switch If the router is connected to a power source when you press the power button to power the router off the router remains in standby mode and a small amount 5 V and 3 3 V of standby voltage is still available in the chassis Powering a Services Router On and Off M 129 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 130 Mm Powering a Services Router On and Off Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity The JUNOS software is preinstalled on the Services Router When the router is powered on it is ready to be configured If the router does not have a configuration from the factory or your service provider you must configure the software to establish basic connectivity If you are setting up a Services Router for the first time you can use either J Web Quick Configuration or a configuration editor to configure basic connectivity For a brief explanation of J Web Quick Configuration and the J Web and CLI configuration editors see Services Router User Interface Overview on page 81 If you are setting up many Services Routers autoinstallation can help automate the configuration process For more information about autoinstallation see the series
252. have installed a certificate on the Services Router and enabled HTTPS NOTE If the Services Router is running the worldwide version of the JUNOS software and you are using the Microsoft Internet Explorer Web browser you must disable the Use SSL 3 0 option in the Web browser to access the Services Router 2 After http or https in your Web browser type the hostname or IP address of the Services Router and press Enter The J Web login page appears 3 On the login page type your username and password and click Log In To correct or change the username or password you typed click Reset type the new entry or entries and click Log In NOTE The default username is root with no password You must change this during initial configuration or the system does not accept the configuration J Web Layout The J Web Quick Configuration gt Set Up or Monitor gt System page appears To explicitly terminate a J Web session at any time click Logout in the top pane Each page of the J Web interface is divided into the following panes as shown in Figure 48 on page 84 Using the J Web Interface m 83 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide m Top pane Displays identifying information and links m Main pane Location where you monitor configure diagnose and manage the Services Router by entering information in text boxes making selections and clicking buttons m Side pane Displ
253. he 8500 must reside in a G700 or G550 media gateway Therefore the maximum of 50 H 248 gateways supported by the 8500 means that only 49 of the 50 can be TGM550s Media servers that can be registered as Media Gateway Controllers MGCs on a TGM550 If an MGC becomes unavailable the TGM550 uses the next MGC on the list The built in SLS module can be considered as a fifth MGC although its functionality is limited than that of a full scale media server Fixed analog line ports Fixed analog trunk ports Digital signal processors DSPs 1 up to 80 channels For calls using voice codec sets with 20 millisecond or higher packet sizes the DSP supports m SOchannels m 20 channels E 10 channels For calls with 10 millisecond or lower packet sizes the 80 channel DSP supports 40 channels For TTY fax or modem over IP calls the 80 channel DSP supports 40 channels Avaya VoIP Modules M 71 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 36 TGM550 Maximum Media Gateway Capacities continued Hardware or Feature TGM550 Maximum Capacity Additional Information Busy Hour Call Completion Rate BHCC 800 Total of IP and analog telephones that 70 14350 Maximum includes a combination of can be connected to a TGM550 and TIMs analog and IP telephones 100 6550 Touch tone recognition TTR 32 Receivers Tone generation As much as necessary for all T
254. he following ways m Type a question mark at the command line prompt The CLI lists the available commands and options For examples see CLI Operational Mode on page 92 and CLI Configuration Mode on page 93 m Type a question mark after entering the complete name of a command or command option The CLI lists the available commands and options then redisplays the command names and options that you typed user host gt request Possible completions chassis Perform chassis specific operations ipsec Perform IP Security operations message Send text message to other users routing engine Log in to Routing Engine security Perform security level operations services Perform service application operations support Perform JUNOS support tasks system Perform system level operations user host gt request m Type a question mark in the middle of a command name The CLI lists possible command completions that match the letters you have entered so far then redisplays the letters that you typed For example to list all operational mode commands that start with the letter s type the following user host gt s Possible completions set Set CLI properties date time craft interface message show Show system information ssh Start secure shell on another host start Start shell user host gt s Using the Command Line Interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview When you enter the help commands describe
255. hing secure Web access ssss 155 Internet Explorer modifying for worldwide Versio uid esce Meere ii ped tn dies 85 leen 162 NI 39 Packet Forwarding Bngine 40 PROCESSES aru Ded da a a le es 40 Routing EOS cu ig ote steer ute p dde s 40 worldwide version modifying Internet Explorer Us M S 85 JUNOScope applications ret tert rte 42 JUNOScript API defining access Quick Configuration 146 enabling s cure access ete c tds 155 MANAGEMENT ACCESS ripe es deep rete edt 155 verifying secure access configuration 159 JUNOScript Ver SSL uie tee Robe 155 K kernel e sted outers eat cei eost eerte fon eti tat cats 40 key sequences editing in CLI eee 94 L labels serial Numbers setin 213 214 laptop See management device lasers BEAN dE 273 Class 1 product warmimg 272 Open aperture warning sssssssssse 274 Safety guidelines tee e e ens 272 Jayo t JW Ds sae seccion teme eti cetero iR end 84 leal statemeritsz doa biete Tope Leeds beet tors 94 LEDs ACT TGM550 a6ctiVe o etur ute Thi eit hos 72 ACT TIM508 active ACT TIM510 active ACT TIM514 active ACT TIM516 active ACT TIM518 active ACT TIM521 active ACTIVITY status dual port PIM 61 ADSL PIMGSSEtUS rad Ae de opt reed 65 ADSL port Statuses ti niet Lente RR ege pte ete ta 65 ALARM cuite oe ce udis 21 54 Index ALM TGM550 alarm snu EZ display
256. hlene Maximum von 40 C berschreitet Um L ftungsverschluf zu verhindern achten Sie darauf da mindestens 15 2 cm lichter Raum um die L ftungs ffnungen herum frei bleibt WARNING Avvertenza Per evitare il surriscaldamento dei router non adoperateli in un locale che ecceda la temperatura ambientale massima di 40 C Per evitare che la circolazione dell aria sia impedita lasciate uno spazio di almeno 15 2 cm di fronte alle aperture delle ventole WARNING Advarsel Unnga overoppheting av eventuelle rutere i Juniper Networks router Disse skal ikke brukes pa steder der den anbefalte maksimale omgivelsestemperaturen overstiger 40 C 104 F S rg for at klaringen rundt lufte pningene er minst 15 2 cm 6 tommer for forhindre nedsatt luftsirkulasjon WARNING Aviso Para evitar o sobreaquecimento do encaminhador Juniper Networks router n o utilize este equipamento numa rea que exceda a temperatura m xima recomendada de 40 C Para evitar a restric o circulac o de ar deixe pelo menos um espaco de 15 2 cm volta das aberturas de ventilac o WARNING jAtenci n Para impedir que un encaminador de la serie Juniper Networks router se recaliente no lo haga funcionar en un rea en la que se supere la Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information temperatura ambiente maxima recomendada de 40 C Para impedir la restriccion de la entrada de aire deje un espacio
257. ho install configure and manage products of Juniper Networks Personnel operating the equipment must be trained and competent must not conduct themselves in a careless willfully negligent or hostile manner and must abide by the instructions provided by the documentation How to Use This Guide J series documentation explains how to install configure and manage J series routers by providing information about JUNOS implementation specifically on J series routers For comprehensive JUNOS information see the JUNOS software manuals listed in Related Juniper Networks Documentation on page xviii Table 1 on page xvi shows the location of J series information by task type in Juniper Networks documentation Table 1 Location of J series Information J series Tasks Location of Instruction Installing hardware and establishing basic connectivity Getting Started Guide for your router Configuring interfaces and routing protocols such as RIP OSPF BGP J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access and IS IS Configuration Guide Configuring advanced features such as virtual private networks VPNs J series Services Router Advanced WAN Access IP Security IPsec multicast routing policies firewall filters and class Configuration Guide of serv ice CoS Managi ng users and operations monitoring performance upgrading J series Services Router Administration Guide software and diagnosing commo
258. ical shock or fire m Avoid spilling liquid onto the Services Router chassis or onto any Services Router component Such an action could cause electrical shock or damage the Services Router m Avoid touching uninsulated electrical wires or terminals that have not been disconnected from their power source Such an action could cause electrical shock In addition observe the warnings and guidelines in the following sections Qualified Personnel Warning A WARNING Only trained and qualified personnel should install or replace the Services Router Waarschuwing Installatie en reparaties mogen uitsluitend door getraind en bevoegd personeel uitgevoerd worden Varoitus Ainoastaan koulutettu ja pateva henkil kunta saa asentaa tai vaihtaa taman laitteen Attention Tout installation ou remplacement de l appareil doit tre r alis par du personnel qualifi et comp tent Warnung Ger t nur von geschultem qualifiziertem Personal installieren oder auswechseln lassen A WARNING Avvertenza Solo personale addestrato e qualificato deve essere autorizzato ad installare o sostituire questo apparecchio Advarsel Kun kvalifisert personell med riktig oppleering ber montere eller bytte ut dette utstyret Aviso Este equipamento dever ser instalado ou substituido apenas por pessoal devidamente treinado e qualificado Atenci n Estos equipos deben ser instalados y reemplazados exclusivamente por personal t cnico adecuadamente pr
259. ical specifications nsn iena e 111 physical requirements replacing idi dete eee usage Warning see erem Declaration of Conformity iea aas default gateway defining Quick Configuration 146 CESCLIDPUOM er de cssc rete EE 154 deleting all configurations with RESCUE CONFIG DUEL OTS e ere 22 55 licenses CDi dpt tttm eese tres 165 licenses J WeD a se else het 164 DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 154 DHCP server after initial configuration 154 before initial configuration eee 154 regaining lost lease after initial configura dunno cdit dere eire e 145 diagnosis CHASSIS eege EELER tdi 209 KE e 209 dial up modem connection See modem connection to router console port DID on line P OFS eege eege bl tope 75 75 78 digital certificate See SSL certificates digital subscriber line See ADSL SHDSL Index DIMMs dual inline memory modules See DRAM modules direct inward dialing on line ports DNS Domain Name System DNS server defining configuration editor 149 defining Quick Configuration 146 TUR GU ip rri espe e dde eei sas 155 documentation set COMMENTS OM css nd ss eet ect EENS een xxi domain MAME rara cas ei 132 defining configuration editort 148 defining Quick Configuration 145 See also DNS server Domain Name SySteM ereere 155 domain search defining configuration editor 149 defining Quick Conftguratont 146 downloadin
260. icense manager 1 2 3 In the J Web interface select Manage Licenses Under Installed Licenses click Add to add a new license key Do one of the following using a blank line to separate multiple license keys m Inthe License File URL box type the full URL to the destination file containing the license key to be added m Inthe License Key Text box paste the license key text in plain text format for the license to be added Click OK to add the license key Go on to Verifying J series License Management on page 166 Deleting Licenses with the J Web Interface To delete one or more license keys from a Services Router with the J Web license manager 1 d Za P In the J Web interface select Manage gt Licenses Select the check box of the license or licenses you want to delete Click Delete Go on to Verifying J series License Management on page 166 Displaying License Keys with the J Web Interface To display the license keys installed on a Services Router with the J Web license manager 1 2 In the J Web interface select Manage gt Licenses Under Installed Licenses click Display Keys to display all the license keys installed on the router A screen displaying the license keys in text format appears Multiple licenses are separated by a blank line Go on to Verifying J series License Management on page 166 Downloading Licenses with the J Web Interface To download the lic
261. igh power tokens for all PIMs to be installed in the chassis c Add the heat dissipation tokens for all PIMs to be installed in the chassis 5 Verify that the total number of low power tokens total number of high power tokens and the total number of heat dissipation tokens do not exceed the maximums permitted for your J series chassis as specified in Table 58 on page 114 Table 57 on page 115 shows the low power consumption high power consumption and heat dissipation represented in non dimensional tokens assigned to each J series PIM and TIM Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications Table 57 J series PIM Power Consumption and Heat Dissipation Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation Name Model Number PIM Abbreviation Tokens Vereen Low Power High Power Heat 1 Port Gigabit JXU SFP S 1xSFP uPIM 8 8 Ethernet uPIM 6 Port Gigabit JXU 6GE SFP S 6xSFP uPIM Ve 15 Ethernet uPIM 8 Port Gigabit JXU 8GE TX S 8xGE uPIM 21 27 Ethernet uPIM 16 Port Gigabit JXU 16GE TX S 16xGE uPIM 58 56 Ethernet uPIM 1 Port Copper JXE 1GE TX S 1xGE Copper 6 7 Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 1 Port SFP Gigabit JXE 1GE SFP S 1xGE SFP 4 4 Ethernet ePIM Dual Port Serial JX 2Serial S 2xSerial 5 6 PIM Dual Port El PIM JX 2E1 RJ48 S 2xE1 6 6 Dual Port TI PIM JX 2T1 RJ48 S 2xT1 6 p 5 Dual Port JX 2CT1E1 RJ45 S 2xCT1E1 PRI 5 5 Channelized
262. iguientes instrucciones mw HI Juniper Networks router debe instalarse en un bastidor fijado a la estructura del edificio a Colocar el equipo en la parte inferior del bastidor cuando sea la nica unidad en el mismo m Cuando este equipo se vaya a instalar en un bastidor parcialmente ocupado comenzar la instalaci n desde la parte inferior hacia la superior colocando el equipo m s pesado en la parte inferior m Si el bastidor dispone de dispositivos estabilizadores instalar stos antes de montar o proceder al mantenimiento del equipo instalado en el bastidor A WARNING Varning F r att undvika kroppsskada n r du installerar eller utf r underh llsarbete pa denna enhet p en st llning m ste du vidta s rskilda Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information forsiktighetsatgarder f r att f rs kra dig om att systemet star stadigt F ljande riktlinjer ges f r att trygga din s kerhet m Juniper Networks router m ste installeras i en st llning som r f rankrad i byggnadens struktur m Om denna enhet ar den enda enheten p st llningen skall den installeras l ngst ned p st llningen m Om denna enhet installeras pa en delvis fylld st llning skall st llningen fyllas nedifr n och upp med de tyngsta enheterna l ngst ned p st llningen w Om st llningen r f rsedd med stabiliseringsdon skall dessa monteras fast innan enheten installeras eller underh lls p
263. ine If the power and heat tokens no longer exceed the maximum the PIMs that were placed offline by J series power management are brought online automatically m Use the set chassis disable power management command to disable J series power management user host set chassis disable power management CAUTION Use extreme caution when disabling J series power management To prevent equipment damage do not install a combination of PIMs that exceeds the power or heat capacity of your router when J series power management is disabled The set chassis disable power management command brings the offline PIMs online automatically To reenable J series power management remove the set chassis disable power management command from the configuration For detailed information about the set chassis fpc offline and set chassis disable power management commands see the JUNOS System Basics Configuration Guide Contacting the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center 212 m If you need assistance while troubleshooting a Services Router open a support case using the Case Manager link at http www juniper net support or call 1 888 314 JTAC within the United States or 1 408 745 9500 from outside the United States For more information see Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware on page 215 Contacting the Juniper Networks Technical Assistance Center Chapter 12 Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware
264. ine and from the Routing Engine across the midplane to the destination PIM J4350 and J6350 Routing Engine Hardware The Routing Engine consists of the following components For more information see Software Overview on page 39 m Processor Creates the packet forwarding switch fabric for the router and runs JUNOS software to maintain the router s routing tables and routing protocols m DRAM Buffers incoming packets and provides storage for the routing and forwarding tables and for other Routing Engine processes To view the amount of DRAM installed on your router issue the show chassis routing engine command m EPROM Stores the serial number of the Routing Engine To view the serial number of the Routing Engine issue either the show chassis routing engine command or the show chassis hardware command m Crypto Accelerator Module Processor card that enhances performance of cryptographic algorithms used in IP security IPSec services The cryptographic algorithms supported include Advanced Encryption Standard AES Data Encryption Standard DES triple DES 3DES Hashed Message Authentication Code Message Digest 5 HMAC MD5 and HMAC Secure Hash Algorithm 1 SHA 1 To determine whether there is a Crypto Accelerator Module installed on your router issue the show chassis hardware command m Compact flash Provides primary storage for software images configuration files and microcode J4350 and J6350 routers ha
265. ing J Web ALM TIM508 alarm 74 SUACUS ss i ole tothe pe don ALM TIM510 alarm uM Kl BEE ALM TIM514 alarm Ke licenses ALM LIMB 1 6 alarm eere tee 77 adding CED Perel teo dete eet Set beet 165 ALM TIM518 alarm eee rtr 79 adding G Web ed Ab Lo ee de 164 ATMXTIMS21 alas iet tete Nae 80 BGP route Feltes apen Ne tede est 162 ASB alternate software bank 72 deletirg CED crebrae ease Zeg ed eeu teris 165 channelized El Orts eet ette n 58 deletirig Weber bd 164 channelized TIPOS usina da 58 displaying GEI cet pta 166 Class 1 product waminmg sessen anas 275 displaying UNE ess bet ipte ads 165 E port Status 2 ee teen genee Eegen ania 57 displaying Usage aadA a 167 ES pott stat s EA 60 downloading Web 164 ETR emergency transfer relay 72 features requiring a license 7 Fast Ethernet port status 4 port ePIM 62 olio Rer rr ERROR CR DERE 165 Fast Ethernet port status dual port PIM 61 infringement Dreventmg 165 G SHDSL PIM status cssssssss di aeaa 66 See also license infringement Gigabit Ethernet port status 25 55 54 sti dia 163 HA ee E 22 34 J Flow traffic analysis 162 ISDN PIM Sta lUS r cto er ra Ri eee 65 JUNGS SOFEWAETE o etie tet tto tete es 162 ISDN pott Status cidad Presso to Pre ptr termes t Cep KEY r E S 162 J4350 power supply See also license keys J6350 power su
266. ing an E in the front panel slot number diagram On J4550 Services Routers the high speed slots are slot 5 and slot 6 On J6350 Services Routers the high speed slots are slots 2 5 5 and 6 Slot 0 is the fixed interface module that contains the built in Ethernet ports Power Button and POWER LED The power button is located on the left side of the front panel see Figure 19 on page 32 You can use the power button to power the Services Router on and off When you power on the router the Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence The POWER LED is located to the upper left of the LED dashboard Table 12 on page 55 describes the POWER LED Color State Description Green On steadily Power is functioning correctly Blinking Power button has been pressed and quickly released and the router is gracefully shutting down Unlit Off Router is not receiving power After the router is powered on status indicators such as LEDs on the front panel and show chassis command output can take up to 60 seconds to indicate that the power supply is functioning normally Ignore error indicators that appear during the first 60 seconds If you need to power off the router after the Routing Engine finishes booting use the J Web interface or the CLI to halt the Services Router first For instructions see the Jrseries Services Router Administration Guide Alternatively you can press and release the power butto
267. inistration Guide NOTE For a list of supported USB storage devices see the J series Services Router Release Notes at http www juniper net J4350 Power System 36 m The 4550 Services Router uses either AC or DC power The autosensing power supply see Figure 14 on page 28 or Figure 16 on page 29 distributes the different output voltages to the router components according to their voltage requirements The power supply is fixed in the chassis and is not field replaceable The AC power supply has a single AC appliance inlet that requires a dedicated AC power feed The DC power supply has a terminal block that provides a single DC input 48 VDC and return and requires a dedicated 15 A 48 VDC circuit breaker The J4350 AC powered chassis has a power switch and does not include a power LED The J4350 DC powered chassis includes a power supply LED located to the upper right of the power supply connector Table 16 on page 57 describes the power supply LED J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview Table 16 Power Supply LED State Description Off No power is flowing to the power supply Green Power supply is connected and power is flowing Yellow Power supply is connected but the router is not powered on For information about site power preparations see Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications on page 107 For information about connec
268. ion 146 during initial configuration eieiei management Interfaces ee management Dote See also management interface address management interfaces management software PrOCESS eee 40 manuals COMMENTS OTI Leto her t ttes xxi memory See compact flash DRAM modules USB trigd DROE oes dtp tete tee eet ee etos 40 m crokernel uq arie epo RE Rr HEN 40 Maple Ee e as 18 51 minor yellow alarms alternative boot device 209 internal compact flashi s 2 dct ete d 209 ROUGNO EADIE karera enaere i ia 210 modem commands abremiote EUR 143 at router EE 142 modem connection to router console port configuring modem at router end 141 configuring modem at user end 145 connecting modem to router OVETVIE Wes ALN AE o Ea Pee rt PEEL Fe Send X monoammonium Dhosphate oooonnnnccciinnccccccccocannnnoos mounting brackets installing on J4350 and enn 123 ON EE E EE 119 multiple routers Sale rack Order muen dete er 119 121 302 m index N NEBS Network Equipment Building System identifying NEBS compliant routers 38 shutdown temperature for NEBS compliant COUTET S vein eee Dooce tte te awl SEET 25 38 network cable pinouts sssssssse erreen 225 Network Equipment Building System See NEBS Network Time Protocol NTP server See NTP server NOTICE ICONS tesa turae tee t aree tcs ass Previa xvii NT1 device provisioning information 115 NTP server defining
269. ions maintain the proper polarity The power source cables might be labeled and to indicate their polarity There is no standard color coding for DC power cables The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply b Verify that a licensed electrician has attached the appropriate power cable lugs to the negative and positive DC source power cables c Usea Phillips screwdriver to remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal block d Within the terminal block remove the two center screws next to the labels 48 VDC and RTN Each screw contains a captive washer to secure a DC source power cable lug to the terminal block e Using one of the removed screws secure the positive DC source power cable lug to the RTN terminal Tighten the screw until snug Do not Connecting Power mm 127 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 128 m overtighten Apply between 8 Ib in 0 9 Nm and 9 Ib in 1 02 Nm of torque to the screw f Using the other removed screw secure the negative DC source power cable lug to the 48 VDC terminal Tighten the screw until snug Do not overtighten Apply between 8 Ib in 0 9 Nm and 9 Ib in 1 02 Nm of torque to the screw g Dress the power cables appropriately h Replace the clear plastic cover over the terminal b
270. is required when you log in to the J Web user interface or the CLI Verify Root Password required Verifies the root password has been typed correctly Retype the password Time Time Zone Identifies the time zone that the router is located in From the list select the appropriate time zone NTP Servers Specify an NTP server that the router can reach to synchronize the system time l o add an IP address type it in the box to the left of the Add button then click Add Fo delete an IP address click on it in the box above the Add button then click Delete Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration m 145 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 61 Set Up Quick Configuration Summary continued Field Function Your Action Current System Time Synchronizes the system time with the NTP server or manually set the system time and date m Toimmediately set the time using the NTP server click Set Time via NTP The router sends a request to the NTP server and synchronizes the system time NOTE If you are configuring other settings on this page the router also synchronizes the system time using the NTP server when you click Apply or OK m Tosetthe time manually click Set Time Manually A pop up window allows you to select the current date and time from lists Network DNS Name Servers Specify a DNS server th
271. keren Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 267 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 268 m m Dejuniper Networks router moet in een stellage worden geinstalleerd die aan een bouwsel is verankerd m Dittoestel dient onderaan in het rek gemonteerd te worden als het toestel het enige in het rek is m Wanneer u dit toestel in een gedeeltelijk gevuld rek monteert dient u het rek van onderen naar boven te laden met het zwaarste onderdeel onderaan in het rek m Als het rek voorzien is van stabiliseringshulpmiddelen dient u de stabilisatoren te monteren voordat u het toestel in het rek monteert of het daar een servicebeurt geeft A WARNING Varoitus Kun laite asetetaan telineeseen tai huolletaan sen ollessa telineessa on noudatettava erityisia varotoimia jarjestelman vakavuuden s ilytt miseksi jotta v ltyt n loukkaantumiselta Noudata seuraavia turvallisuusohjeita m Juniper Networks router on asennettava telineeseen joka on kiinnitetty rakennukseen m Jos telineess ei ole muita laitteita aseta laite telineen alaosaan m Jos laite asetetaan osaksi t ytettyyn telineeseen aloita kuormittaminen sen alaosasta kaikkein raskaimmalla esineell ja siirry sitten sen yl osaan m Jos telinetta varten on vakaimet asenna ne ennen laitteen asettamista telineeseen tai sen huoltamista siin A WARNING Attention Pour viter toute blessure corporelle pendant les op rations de montage ou
272. l voltage associated with the battery circuit and any higher voltages are only to be associated with float voltages for the charging function m Because the router is a positive ground system you must connect the positive lead to the terminal labeled RTN the negative lead to the terminal labeled 48 VDC and the earth ground to the chassis grounding points Power Sources for Redundant Power Supplies If your J6550 Services Router includes an optional redundant DC power supply make sure that the two DC power supplies are powered by dedicated power feeds derived from feed A and feed B This configuration provides the commonly deployed A B feed redundancy for the system Failure to do so makes the router susceptible to total power failure if one of the power supplies fails TREI WR Juniper Networks 21 RIXA TAS HE TRA MERA E EE AN FB Vio PAPEI D E Juniper Networks 15 4 amp Pr Bs Fa 4410 fea SS O Fu Bt TI DC Power Disconnection Warning WARNING Before performing any of the following procedures ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit To ensure that all power is off locate the circuit breaker on the panel board that services the DC circuit switch the circuit breaker to the OFF position and tape the switch handle of the circuit breaker in the OFF position Waarschuwing Voordat u een van de onderstaande procedures uitvoert dient u te controleren of de stroom naar het gelijkstroom circuit uitges
273. liary USB button port port ports Figure 14 Rear of JA350 AC Powered Chassis Protective Power supply AC power AC power earthing terminal fan exhaust appliance inlet switch C NOTE The J4350 AC powered chassis has a power switch and does not include a power supply LED unlike the J6350 AC powered chassis Figure 15 Rear of J6350 AC Powered Chassis Protective Power AC power Power Power supply earthing terminal supply appliance supply fan exhaust ejector inlet LED 28 HW J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview Figure 16 Rear of J4350 DC Powered Chassis FEE ELLE a Protective DC terminal Power Power supply earthing terminal block supply LED fan exhaust Figure 17 Rear of DC Powered J6350 Chassis AS IN Ahh a HAMA A m m DRA RE M m m A d D d Protective Power DC Power Power supply earthing terminal supply terminal supply fan exhaust ejector block LED J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features m 29 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 18 J4350 and J6350 Hardware Components Rear Power Crypto Compact Fans 3 DRAM supply Accelerator flash Module drive oa ips o o HS D H mg Ge p ee T I o Doc Keen
274. llips screwdriver loosen the pan head screws that secure the internal compact flash slot cover Remove the compact flash slot cover Gently grasp the compact flash and slide it out of the compact flash slot see Figure 79 on page 180 Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers m 179 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 79 Removing the J2320 or J2350 Internal Compact Flash Slide internal compact flash out of the compact flash slot PIM card cage Chassis front Place the compact flash on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag With the vendor name and memory size facing up and the arrow pointing towards the router insert the new compact flash into the compact flash slot see Figure 80 on page 180 Figure 80 Inserting the J2320 or J2350 Internal Compact Flash Insert the new compact flash in the internal compact flash slot PIM card cage Chassis front Replace the compact flash slot cover Tighten the pan head screws that secure the compact flash slot cover Slide the chassis cover onto the chassis Replace the chassis cover See Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 176 Replace the power cable Press and release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily 180 Mm Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers Chapter 10
275. llow unencrypted text to be sent directly over a TCP connection without using any additional protocol such as SSH SSL or Telnet Information sent in clear text is not encrypted and therefore can be intercepted For more information about the JUNOScript application programming interface API see the JUNOScript API Guide Basic Connectivity Overview M 135 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Before You Begin 136 m Before You Begin If the router is operating in a Common Criteria environment see the Secure Configuration Guide for Common Criteria and JUNOS FIPS SSH also allows you to connect to the router and access the CLI to execute commands from a remote system However unlike Telnet SSH encrypts traffic so that it cannot be intercepted SSH can be configured so that connections are authenticated by a digital certificate SSH uses public private key technology for both connection and authentication The SSH client software must be installed on the machine where the client application runs If the SSH private key is encrypted for greater security the SSH client must be able to access the passphrase used to decrypt the key For information about obtaining SSH software see http www ssh com and http www openssh com Before you begin initial configuration complete the following tasks m Install the Services Router in its permanent location as described in Installing and Connecting a
276. local alarm The router has detected a failure Unlit Off Offline For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM The Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM Figure 31 on page 57 is a multiflex interface card that allows you to configure a single interface as a channelized T1 interface or a channelized E1 interface You can also configure ISDN PRI services on a channelized T1 or E1 interface The channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI interface supports up to 24 DSO channels on a T1 interface and up to 51 DSO channels on an E1 interface in addition to supporting the features of regular unchannelized T1 and E1 PIMs Each interface can be configured as a single clear channel fractionalized or channelized interface D NOTE You cannot configure a channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI interface through a J Web Quick Configuration page Figure 31 Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM 9002377 The Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM provides the following key features m Onboard network processor m Two port channelization m Interfaces that are software configurable as T1 or E1 channels or ISDN PRI B channels m Clear channel fractional and channelized operation a Lower latency due to the addition of a Freescale processor Field Replaceable PIMS WM 57 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide
277. lock Verify that the power cables do not block access to router components or drape where people can trip on them On 2520 and J2350 routers use the power cable tie as follows to relieve strain on the cable see Figure 65 on page 128 a Wrap the loose end of the tie around the cable and insert it into the opening on the tie b Pullthe end to tighten the tie To release the tie from the cable press down the tab on the tie and loosen it Figure 65 Connecting DC Power to the J2350 Services Router Connecting Power Grounding lug Screw with captive washer Protective earthing point on chassis DC Terminal block Screw with captive washer 9004127 Chapter 6 Installing and Connecting a Services Router Figure 66 Connecting DC Power to the J4350 or J6350 Services Router Screw with captive washer _ Washer Grounding lug Powering a Services Router On and Off TO power on a Services Router press the power button The Routing Engine boots as the power supply completes its startup sequence The POWER LED lights during startup and remains on steadily when the router is operating normally To power off a Services Router you can shut it down in one of the following ways m Graceful shutdown Press and release the power button The router begins gracefully shutting down the operating system and then powers itself off m Immediate shutdown Press the power button and hold it for more t
278. m for temperature You can view the CPU junction temperature using the show chassis routing engine command The CPU temperature runs a few degrees higher than the routing engine temperature displayed on the Monitor Chassis page of the J Web interface NOTE On J4550 and J6550 routers that are not designed to comply with Network Equipment Building System NEBS criteria the temperature at which the system shuts down is 90 C 194 F rather than 105 C 221 F To verify that the system is a NEBS compliant system run the show chassis hardware command A NEBS compliant system displays the term NEBS in the output An additional fan is part of each power supply This fan is not regulated by the operating system J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview Figure 21 Airflow Through the J4350 and J6350 Chassis gt eeceoosoooo 003807 TT Ss T Aa e Software Overview Each J series Services Router runs the JUNOS software on its general purpose processors Designed for the large production networks typically supported by Internet service providers ISPs the JUNOS software includes processes for Internet Protocol IP routing and for managing interfaces networks and the router chassis The JUNOS software runs on the Routing Engine The Routing Engine kernel coordinates comm
279. m is connected for example COM1 Configure the port settings as follows m Bits per second 9600 m Data bits 8 m Parity None m Stop bits 1 m Flow control None In the HyperTerminal window enter AT An OK response verifies that the modem communicates successfully with the COM port on the PC or laptop To dial the modem that is connected to the console port on the router enter ATDT remote modem number For example if the number of the modem connected to the console port on the router is 0013033033030 enter ATDT 0013033033030 The router login prompt appears Log in as the user root No password is required at initial connection but you must assign a root password before committing any configuration settings Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration J Web Quick Configuration allows you to configure basic settings Figure 71 on page 144 shows the Quick Configuration page for basic setup Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration m 143 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 71 Set Up Quick Configuration Page Quick Configuration EDU UL ONT DIE ts set Up Identification HostName froutera F Domain Name labrouternet Root Password ecccccccce Verify Root Password eeeeceeeece Network DNS Name Servers 192 1685 68 172 17 28 101 172 17 28 100 Adal Deko Domain Search lab router net router net Delete
280. mended that you do disallow HTTP access from your WAN interfaces Enable HTTP access v gt Enable HTTP on All Interfaces Y HTTP Interfaces Logical Interfaces HTTP Enabled Interfaces HTTPS Web Access HTTPS access allows secure management of the router via the web interface Communication between the router web server and your browser is encrypted using a session key negotiated using the SSL server certificate Enable HTTPS access HTTPS Certificate Enable HTTPS on All Interfaces HTTPS Interfaces Logical Interfaces HTTPS Enabled Interfaces UNOScript over SSL Configuring SSL access for the JUNOScript XML scripting API access allows securely management of the router Enable SSL JUNOScript access gt JUNOScript SSL Certificate To configure Web access settings in the J Web interface 1 Enter information into the Secure Access Quick Configuration page as described in Table 65 on page 157 2 Click one of the following buttons m To apply the configuration and stay on the Quick Configuration page click Apply m To apply the configuration and return to the Quick Configuration page click OK a To cancel your entries and return to the Quick Configuration page click Cancel 156 1H Configuring Secure Web Access Chapter 8 Configuring Secure Web Access 3 To verify that Web access is enabled correctly connect to the router using one of the following methods m For HTTP access
281. mm 77 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide For more information about the TIM516 see the Avaya manual Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager TIM518 Analog Telephony Interface Module The TIM518 Analog Telephony Interface Module Figure 46 on page 78 also known as the TIM518 analog media module has eight analog telephone lines and eight analog trunk lines Figure 46 TIM518 Analog Telephony Interface Module es NOTE For analog direct inward dialing DID trunks you can use all eight analog telephone lines You can configure eight TIM518 analog telephone lines as described in Table 45 on page 78 Table 45 TIM518 Possible Port Configurations Possible Analog Telephone Port Configurations Possible Analog Trunk Port Configurations Wink start or immed start DID trunk Loop start or ground start central office trunk with a loop current of 18 milliamperes mA to 120 mA Analog tip ring devices such as single line telephones with or Two wire analog outgoing centralized automatic message without LED message waiting indication accounting CAMA emergency E911 trunk for connectivity to the PSTN The TIM518 also provides the following features m Three ringer loads the ringer equivalency number for up to 2 000 ft 610 m for all 16 lines m Upto 16 simultaneously ringing lines m Type 1 caller ID and Type 2 caller ID for line lines m Type 1 caller ID fo
282. n 6 No connection 240 1H Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts TIM508 Connector Pinout The TIM508 Analog Telephony Interface Module uses a B25A unshielded 25 pair amphenol cable Table 95 on page 241 describes the TIM508 connector pinout Table 95 TIM508 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 Tip 2 Tip 3 Tip 4 Tip 5 Tip 6 Tip 7 Tip 8 Tip 26 R Receive 27 Ring 28 Ring 29 Ring 30 Ring 31 Ring 32 Ring 33 Ring TIM510 RJ 45 Connector Pinout The TIM510 Telephony Interface Module uses an RJ 45 cable Table 96 on page 241 describes the TIM510 RJ 45 connector pinout Table 96 TIM510 RJ 45 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 Ring 2 Tip Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules mm 241 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 96 TIM510 RJ 45 Connector Pinout continued Pin Signal 3 No connection 4 R1 Transmit 5 T1 Transmit 6 No connection 7 No connection 8 No connection TIM514 Connector Pinout The TIM514 Telephony Interface Module uses an RJ 11 cable Table 97 on page 242 describes the TIM514 RJ 11 connector pinout information Table 97 TIM514 RJ 11 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 No connection 2 No connection 3 Ring 4 Tip 5 No connection 6 No connection TIM516 C
283. n Este s mbolo de aviso significa peligro Existe riesgo para su integridad f sica Antes de manipular cualquier equipo considerar los riesgos que Definition of Safety Warning Levels Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information entrana la corriente el ctrica y familiarizarse con los procedimientos estandar de prevencion de accidentes A WARNING Varning Denna varningssymbol signalerar fara Du befinner dig i en situation som kan leda till personskada Innan du utf r arbete pa n gon utrustning m ste du vara medveten om farorna med elkretsar och k nna till vanligt f rfarande f r att f rebygga skador Safety Guidelines and Warnings This section lists the following safety guidelines and warnings for installing operating and maintaining a Services Router m General Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 249 m Electrical Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 252 m Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 266 m Laser and LED Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 271 m Maintenance and Operational Safety Guidelines and Warnings on page 275 General Safety Guidelines and Warnings The following guidelines help ensure your safety and protect the Services Router from damage The list of guidelines might not address all potentially hazardous situations in your working environment so be alert and exercise good judgment at all times m Perform only the procedures explicitly described in this manual Mak
284. n hold times and keepalive timers called device control process Forwarding fwdd Responsible for most of the packet transmission through a Services Router The overall process performance of the router is largely determined by the effectiveness of the forwarding process User Interfaces The user interfaces on a Services Router interact with the management process to execute commands and store and retrieve information from the configuration database The user interfaces operate as clients that communicate with the JUNOS software through an application programming interface API The following primary user interfaces are shipped with the router m J Web graphical user interface Includes quick configuration capabilities for performing the minimum required steps to enable a feature plus a built in configuration editor with access to the entire configuration hierarchy to fully configure the router The J Web interface also provides tools for monitoring managing and diagnosing router operation m Command line interface CLI Grants access to the complete JUNOS command and configuration hierarchies to monitor the router diagnose problems and configure it completely Software Overview M 41 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 42 m Software Overview For more information see Services Router User Interface Overview on page 81 Other user interfaces for the Services Router interact wi
285. n the PIM Replacing a PIM 4 Tighten the captive screws on each side of the PIM faceplate 5 Insert the appropriate cables into the cable connectors on the PIM Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components 6 If necessary arrange the cables to prevent them from dislodging or developing stress points m Secure each cable so that it is not supporting its own weight as it hangs to the floor m Place excess cable out of the way in a neatly coiled loop m Use fasteners to maintain the shape of cable loops 7 Pressandrelease the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Replacing PIM Cables Removing and installing PIM cables does not affect Services Router function except that a PIM does not receive or transmit data while its cable is disconnected To replace a PIM cable perform the following procedures m Removing PIM Cables on page 175 m Installing PIM Cables on page 175 Removing PIM Cables To remove a PIM cable 1 Ifyou are removing all cables connected to the PIM issue the following CLI command to take the PIM offline userQ host request chassis fpc slot pim slot offline For example to take the PIM in slot 4 offline enter the following command userQ host request chassis fpc slot 4 offline For more information about the command see the JUNOS System Basics and Services Command Reference 2 Unplug the cable from the cable connector port 5 Detach the cabl
286. n a cardboard carton and secured with foam packing material The carton also contains an accessory box and quick start instructions cS NOTE The router is maximall rotected inside the shipping carton Do not unpack it until you are ready to begin installation To unpack the router pi Move the shipping carton to a staging area as close to the installation site as possible but where you have enough room to remove the router Position the carton so that the arrows are pointing up Open the top flaps on the shipping carton Remove the accessory box and verify the contents against the parts inventory on the label attached to the carton Pull out the packing material holding the router in place Verify the contents of the carton against the packing list included with the router Save the shipping carton and packing materials in case you later need to move or ship the router Unpacking a J series Services Router Chapter 6 Installing and Connecting a Services Router Installing J2320 and J2350 Routers AN WARNING DC powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a restricted access location You can center mount or front mount the J2320 and J2350 Services Routers in a rack In general a center mount rack is preferable to a front mount rack because the more even distribution of weight in the center mount rack provides greater stability Many types of racks are acceptable including four post telco
287. n a typical Web browser interface From the taskbar select the J Web task that you want to perform Selecting the task displays related subtasks in the side pane When you select a subtask related fields are displayed in the main pane By default the system selects the first subtask and displays its related fields in the main pane The side pane and taskbar are available from all pages allowing you to skip from one task or subtask to the other from any page in the interface Using the J Web Interface m 87 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 88 m The path displayed in the top right corner of each page provides a context Use this path to see your location in a configuration hierarchy Clicking any link in the path displays the corresponding page You can easily navigate to most subtasks by selecting them from the side pane On pages where you are required to take an action buttons and links allow you to move to the next or previous page as you perform certain actions Most buttons and links are self explanatory But some buttons have different functions on the Quick Configuration and Edit Configuration J Web configuration editor pages For more information see Navigating the Quick Configuration Pages on page 88 and Navigating the J Web Configuration Editor on page 88 Navigating the Quick Configuration Pages Table 48 on page 88 describes the functions of key Quick Configuration buttons Table
288. n an E1 line to carry network traffic uPIM Universal switching PIM A particular type of PIM such as the Gigabit Ethernet uPIM which can be universally inserted in any slot on a J2320 J2350 J4550 or J6350 Services Router PIM and VoIP Module Terms WM 45 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Field Replaceable PIMs PIMs are removable and insertable only when the Services Router is powered off You can install a PIM into one of the slots in the router chassis If a slot is not occupied by a PIM a PIM blank panel must be installed to shield the empty slot and to allow cooling air to circulate properly through the router This section contains the following topics m J2320 and J2350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary on page 46 m J4350 and J6350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary on page 47 m 1 Port 6 Port 8 Port and 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs on page 49 m 1 Port Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs on page 52 m Dual Port Serial PIM on page 55 m Dual Port T1 or El PIM on page 56 m Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM on page 57 m 73 or E3 PIM on page 59 m Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM on page 60 m 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM on page 61 m 4 Port ISDN BRI PIMs on page 62 m ADSL PIM on page 64 m GSHDSL PIM on page 65 J2320 and J2350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary 46 Table 19 on page 47 provides software release information port numbers and sample interface names for the field replaceable PI
289. n attach the lug on the cable to the chassis grounding point with the screw See Connecting Power on page 124 J2320 J2350 and J4350 Services Routers have a single fixed power supply J6350 Services Routers have one or two field replaceable power supplies For more information about the J series power specifications see Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications on page 107 A WARNING DC powered Services Routers are intended for installation only in a restricted access location Connecting AC Power 124 m The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation The protective earthing terminal on the rear of the chassis is provided to connect the router to ground Additional grounding is provided to an AC powered router when you plug its power supply into a grounded AC power receptacle The AC power cord shipped with the router connects the router to earth ground when plugged into an AC grounding type power outlet The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation For power cord requirements see AC Power Connection and Power Cord Specifications on page 109 To connect AC power to the router 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 2 Use a grounding cable to connect the router to e
290. n between the Parties 9 Termination Any breach of this Agreement or failure by Customer to pay any applicable fees due shall result in automatic termination of the license granted herein Upon such termination Customer shall destroy or return to Juniper all copies of the Software and related documentation in Customer s possession or control 10 Taxes All license fees for the Software are exclusive of taxes withholdings duties or levies collectively Taxes Customer shall be responsible for paying Taxes arising from the purchase of the license or importation or use of the Software 11 Export Customer agrees to comply with all applicable export laws and restrictions and regulations of any United States and any applicable foreign agency or authority and not to export or re export the Software or any direct product thereof in violation of any such restrictions laws or regulations or without all necessary approvals Customer shall be liable for any such violations The version of the Software supplied to Customer may contain encryption or other capabilities restricting Customer s ability to export the Software without an export license 12 Commercial Computer Software The Software is commercial computer software and is provided with restricted rights Use duplication or disclosure by the United States government is subject to restrictions set forth in this Agreement and as provided in DFARS
291. n for 15 seconds or more until the STATUS LED blinks red deletes all configurations on the router including the backup configurations and rescue configuration and loads and commits the factory configuration J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview You can change the default behavior of the RESET CONFIG button For more information see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide Built In Gigabit Ethernet Ports Four built in Gigabit Ethernet ports provide LAN connections over copper interfaces to hubs switches local servers and workstations You can also designate an Ethernet port for management traffic When configuring one of these ports you use the interface name that corresponds to the port s location From left to right on the front panel the interface names for the ports are ge 0 0 0 ge 0 0 1 ge 0 0 2 and ge 0 0 3 For Gigabit Ethernet port pinout information see Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 233 Each port has two LEDs a TX RX LED on the left side and a LINK LED on the right side Table 10 on page 23 describes the built in Ethernet port LEDs Table 10 Gigabit Ethernet Port LEDs Function Color State Description LINK Green On steadily Port is online Unlit Off Port is offline TX RX Green Blinking Port is transmitting or receiving data Unlit Off Port might be online but it is not receiving data
292. n problems Using t he J Web interface J Web Interface User Guide Using t he CLI JUNOS CLI User Guide xvi Typically J series documentation provides both general and specific information for example a configuration overview configuration examples and verification methods Because you can configure and manage J series routers in several ways you can choose from multiple sets of instructions to perform a task To make best use of this information m If you are new to the topic Read through the initial overview information keep the related JUNOS guide handy for details about the JUNOS hierarchy and follow the step by step instructions for your preferred interface m Ifyou are already familiar with the feature Go directly to the instructions for the interface of your choice and follow the instructions You can choose a J Web method the JUNOS CLI or a combination of methods based on the level of complexity or your familiarity with the interface For many J series features you can use J Web Quick Configuration pages to configure the router quickly and easily without configuring each statement individually For How to Use This Guide About This Guide more extensive configuration use the J Web configuration editor or CLI configuration mode commands To monitor diagnose and manage a router use the J Web interface or CLI operational mode commands Document Conventions Table 2 on page xvii
293. n to gracefully shut down the router For more information see Powering a Services Router On and Off on page 129 STATUS LED When the system is powered on the STATUS LED changes from off to blinking green Startup takes approximately 90 seconds to complete If you want to turn the system J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features m 33 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 13 STATUS LED off and on again we recommend waiting a few seconds between shutting it down and powering it back up Table 13 on page 34 describes the STATUS LED Color State Description Green Blinking Router is starting up or performing diagnostics On steadily Router is operating normally Red Blinking Error has been detected ALARM LED Table 14 ALARM LED The ALARM LED lights yellow to indicate a minor condition that requires monitoring or maintenance and lights red to indicate a major condition that can result in a system shutdown When the condition is corrected the describes the ALARM LED ight turns off Table 14 on page 34 Color State Description Red On steadily Major alarm indicates a critical situation on the router that has resulted from one of the following conditions A red alarm condition requires immediate action m One or more hardware components have failed m One or more hardware components have exceeded emperature thresholds m An alarm condition
294. nd command completion on off m Set on to re enable Tab and Spacebar for command completion Your working directory set cli directory path8 cf var home remote Replace path with the directory you want to enter when you log in to the Services Router Minutes of idle time set cli idle time minutes Your session never times out unless your login class specifies a timeout m To enable the timeout feature replace timeout with a value between 1 and 100 000 m To disable the timeout feature replace timeout with O Your session prompt set cli prompt string user host gt Replace string with the prompt you want If the prompt contains spaces or special characters enclose string in quotation marks Restart after upgrade prompt set cli restart on upgrade on off CLI prompts you to restart the Services Router after a software upgrade m Setoffto disable the prompt for the session m Set on to reenable the prompt Number of CLI output line displayed at once set cli screen length length Variable depends on terminal type m To change the number of lines displayed on the screen replace length with a value between 1 and 100 000 m To disable the display of a set number of lines replace length with O This feature can be useful when you are issuing CLI commands from scripts 98 m Using the Command Line Interface Chapter 4 Services Route
295. nd line prompt user host gt Possible completions clear Clear information in the system configure Manipulate software configuration information file Perform file operations help Provide help information monitor Show real time debugging information mtrace Trace multicast path from source to receiver ping Ping remote target quit Exit the management session request Make system level requests restart Restart software process 92 HN Using the Command Line Interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview set Set CLI properties date time craft interface message show Show system information ssh Start secure shell on another host start Start shell telnet Telnet to another host test Perform diagnostic debugging traceroute Trace route to remote host At the top level of operational mode are a number of broad groups of CLI commands that are used to perform the following functions m Control the CLI environment m Monitor and troubleshoot the router m Connect to other systems m Manage files and software images Control software processes m Stop and reboot the router m Enter configuration mode To control the CLI environment see Configuring the CLI Environment on page 97 To enter configuration mode see CLI Configuration Mode on page 95 For information about the other CLI operational mode functions see the J series Services Router Administration Guide CLI Configuration Mode To configu
296. nd name followed immediately by a question mark with no Using the Command Line Interface m 91 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide intervening space you see a list of commands that match the partial name you typed Starting the CLI To start the CLI 1 Establish a connection with the Services Router m To access the router remotely from the network enter the command you typically use to establish a remote connection such as Telnet or ssh using the router hostname m To access the router through a management device attached to the console port start the terminal application m To access the router through the J Web interface select Diagnose gt CLI Terminal in the J Web interface For more information see the J Web Interface User Guide 2 Login using your username and password After you log in you enter a UNIX shell 5 Start the CLI cli user host gt The presence of the angle bracket gt prompt indicates the CLI has started By default the prompt is preceded by a string that contains your username and the hostname of the router To exit the CLI and return to the UNIX shell enter the quit command CLI Operational Mode The CLI has two modes operational and configuration When you log in to the Services Router and the CLI starts you are at the top level of operational mode To view a list of top level operational mode commands type a question mark at the comma
297. ng Services Routers and other network equipment the safety of people is the primary concern Establish procedures for protecting people in the event of a fire emergency provide safety training and properly provision fire control equipment and fire extinguishers In addition establish procedures to protect your equipment in the event of a fire emergency Juniper Networks products must be installed in an environment suitable for electronic equipment We recommend that fire suppression equipment be available in the event of a fire in the vicinity of the equipment and that all local fire safety and electrical codes and ordinances be observed when you are installing and operating your equipment In the event of an electrical hazard or an electrical fire first unplug the power cord For shutdown instructions see Powering a Services Router On and Off on page 129 106 1H Router Environmental Tolerances Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation Then use a Type C fire extinguisher which uses noncorrosive fire retardants to extinguish the fire For more information about fire extinguishers see Fire Suppression Equipment on page 107 Fire Suppression Equipment Type C fire extinguishers which use noncorrosive fire retardants such as carbon dioxide CO and Halotron are most effective for suppressing electrical fires Type C fire extinguishers displace the oxygen from the point of combustion to eliminate the fire For extingui
298. nit in size with a nonredundant AC or DC power supply an external compact flash and two universal serial bus USB ports for external storage and an optional Crypto Accelerator Module J2350 routers ordered with the optional Crypto Accelerator Module come standard with 1 GB of memory while those ordered without the Crypto Accelerator Module come standard with 256 MB of memory The memory on J2350 routers can be 4 W J2350 Services Router Overview Chapter 1 Overview of Services Routers upgraded to 1 GB For instructions on upgrading memory see Replacing DRAM Modules on page 188 Each J2350 chassis contains four built in Gigabit Ethernet ports with link speeds of 10 100 1000 Mbps over a copper interface The chassis also contains five slots for field replaceable Physical Interface Modules PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules providing flexible WAN and voice connectivity options The J2350 Services Router supports the following field replaceable PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules m Gigabit Ethernet uPIM 1 port 6 port 8 port and 1 6 port m Dual Port Serial PIM m Dual Port El PIM m Dual Port T1 PIM m Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM m 4 port ISDN BRI S T or U PIM m ADSL 2 2 Annex A PIM 1 port m ADSL 2 2 Annex B PIM 1 port m GSHDSL PIM 2 ports m TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module m TIM508 Analog Telephony Interface Module 8 ports m TIM510 E1 TI Telephony Interface Module 1 port m TIM514 Analog Telephony Inte
299. no collegati tra punti di alimentazione e massa possono causare ustioni gravi oppure il metallo puo saldarsi ai terminali WARNING Advarsel Fjern alle smykker inkludert ringer halskjeder og klokker fer du skal arbeide pa utstyr som er koblet til kraftledninger Metallgjenstander som er koblet til kraftledninger og jord blir svaert varme og kan for rsake alvorlige brannskader eller smelte fast til polene WARNING Aviso Antes de trabalhar em equipamento que esteja ligado a linhas de corrente retire todas as j ias que estiver a usar incluindo an is fios e rel gios Os objectos met licos aquecer o em contacto com a corrente e em contacto com a ligac o terra podendo causar queimaduras graves ou ficarem soldados aos terminais WARNING jAtenci n Antes de operar sobre equipos conectados a l neas de alimentaci n quitarse las joyas incluidos anillos collares y relojes Los objetos de metal se calientan cuando se conectan a la alimentaci n y a tierra lo que puede ocasionar quemaduras graves o que los objetos met licos queden soldados a los bornes WARNING Varning Tag av alla smycken inklusive ringar halsband och armbandsur innan du arbetar pa utrustning som ar kopplad till kraftledningar Metallobjekt hettas upp nar de kopplas ihop med str m och jord och kan f rorsaka allvarliga br nnskador metallobjekt kan ocks sammansvetsas med kontakterna Lightning Activity Warning WARNING Do
300. nt n cessaires utiliser des douilles terminales homologu es telles que celles circuit ferm ou du type plage ouverte avec cosses rebrouss es Ces douilles terminales doivent tre de la taille qui convient aux fils et doivent tre referm es sur la gaine isolante et sur le conducteur Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 259 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 260 m WARNING Warnung Wenn Litzenverdrahtung erforderlich ist sind zugelassene Verdrahtungsabschl sse z B f r einen geschlossenen Regelkreis oder gabelf rmig mit nach oben gerichteten Kabelschuhen zu verwenden Diese Abschl sse sollten die angemessene Gr e f r die Dr hte haben und sowohl die Isolierung als auch den Leiter festklemmen WARNING Avvertenza Quando occorre usare trecce usare connettori omologati come quelli a occhiello o a forcella con linguette rivolte verso l alto I connettori devono avere la misura adatta per il cablaggio e devono serrare sia l isolante che il conduttore WARNING Advarsel Hvis det er n dvendig med flertr dede ledninger brukes godkjente ledningsavslutninger som for eksempel lukket sloyfe eller spadetype med oppoverbayde kabelsko Disse avslutningene skal ha riktig st rrelse i forhold til ledningene og skal klemme sammen b de isolasjonen og lederen WARNING Aviso Quando forem requeridas montagens de instalac o el ctrica de cabo torcido use termina es de cabo a
301. o ehe toe dete 162 Belore de EE 162 Managing J series Licenses with the J Web Interface 0 00 0 eee 165 Adding New Licenses with the J Web Interface sssssssse 164 Deleting Licenses with the J Web Interface aenninto idien au 164 Displaying License Keys with the J Web Interface 00 0 0 164 Downloading Licenses with the J Web Interface 164 Managing J series Licenses with ec 165 Adding New Licenses with bell 165 Deleting a License with the Cl 165 Saving License Keys with ec 166 Verifying J series License Management 166 Displaying Installed License ini tonada 166 Displaying License Usage sssssssssssss Hee 167 Displaying Installed License bes 167 Maintaining Services Router Hardware Replacing Hardware Components 171 Tools and Parts Required ssssssssssssss e e nnne 171 Replacing the Console Port Cable eite erre teet edes 172 Replacing a PIM de rene tes dete meet ta E UEHEMENTER E 172 REMOVING a BIM i eee edipi Mese theres bene i ed ten dds 172 et te OR 174 Table of Contents W Xi J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Chapter 11 Chapter 12 xii Table of Contents Replacing PIM Cables s erede ert ott beans duel de RD IU EHE deett rade 175 Removing PIM Cables imita aida 175 Installing PIM Cables ci icto tr e EE EIU tad 175 Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers 176 Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J
302. obles helt fra for eliminere strom fra enheten WARNING Aviso Este J6550 dispositivo possui mais do que uma conex o de fonte de alimentac o de energia para poder remover a fonte de alimentac o de energia dever o ser desconectadas todas as conex es existentes WARNING Atenci n Esta J6550 unidad tiene m s de una conexi n de suministros de alimentaci n para eliminar la alimentaci n por completo deben desconectarse completamente todas las conexiones Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information WARNING Varning Denna J6550 enhet har mer an en str mf rs rjningsanslutning alla anslutningar m ste vara helt avlagsnade innan str mtillf rseln OU enheten ar fullstandigt bruten Power Disconnection Warning WARNING Before working on the router or near power supplies unplug the power cord from an AC router WARNING Waarschuwing Voordat u aan een frame of in de nabijheid van voedingen werkt dient u bij wisselstroom toestellen de stekker van het netsnoer uit het stopcontact te halen gt WARNING Varoitus Kytke irti vaihtovirtalaitteiden virtajohto ennen kuin teet mit n asennuspohjalle tai ty skentelet virtal hteiden l heisyydess gt WARNING Attention Avant de travailler sur un chassis ou a proximit d une alimentation lectrique d brancher le cordon d alimentation des unit s en courant alternatif WARNI
303. odule into a J4550 Services Router for the first time proceed directly to Installing a J4550 or j6350 Crypto Accelerator Module on page 204 To remove the Crypto Accelerator Module 1 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface to receive the Crypto Module Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle Remove the screws from the sides and the top of the chassis and slide the cover off the chassis Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components 6 Locate the Crypto Module on the system board see Figure 98 on page 202 7 Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the screw as shown in Figure 99 on page 205 Figure 99 Removing a J4350 or J6350 Crypto Module Screw Release clips Remove screw g003815 washer 8 Pull the white release clips on either side of the Crypto Module out to either side as shown in Figure 100 on page 203 to tilt the Crypto Module upward Figure 100 Removing and Installing a J4350 or
304. odules Four of the six slots slots 2 5 5 and 6 support high speed interfaces ePIMs J6350 Services Router Overview Chapter 1 Overview of Services Routers The J6350 Services Router supports the following field replaceable PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules Gigabit Ethernet uPIM 1 port 6 port 8 port and 1 6 port SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 1 port Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 1 port Dual Port Serial PIM Dual Port El PIM Dual Port T1 PIM E3 PIM 1 port DS3 T3 PIM 1 port Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM 4 port Fast Ethernet ePIM G SHDSL PIM 2 ports 4 port ISDN BRI S T or U PIM ADSL 2 2 Annex A PIM 1 port ADSL 2 2 Annex B PIM 1 port TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module TIM508 Analog Telephony Interface Module 8 ports TIM510 E1 T1 Telephony Interface Module 1 port TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module 4 ports TIM516 Analog Telephony Interface Module 16 ports TIM518 Analog Telephony Interface Module 16 ports TIM521 ISDN BRI Telephony Interface Module 4 ports J series Software Features and Licenses J series Services Routers provide the software features listed in Table 5 on page 7 You must purchase a separate software license to obtain some software features For more information about licenses see Installing and Managing J series Licenses on page 161 Table 5 Summary of J series Features and License Requirements F
305. og Telephony Interface Module The TIM508 Analog Telephony Interface Module Figure 42 on page 73 also known as the TIM508 analog media module has eight analog telephone lines that can be used as trunk ports Figure 42 TIM508 Analog Telephony Interface Module NES CS NOTE All eight analog lines can be configured as analog direct inward DID trunks You can configure TIM508 ports as described in Table 38 on page 73 Table 38 TIM508 Possible Port Configurations Possible Analog Telephone Line Configurations Wink start or immed start DID trunk Analog tip ring devices such as single line telephones with or without LED message waiting indication The TIM508 also provides the following features m Three ringer loads the ringer equivalency number for up to 2 000 ft 610 m for all eight lines Up to eight simultaneously ringing lines m Type 1 caller ID and Type 2 caller ID for lines m Ring voltage generation for a variety of international frequencies and cadences For pinouts of cable connectors for the TIM508 see TIM508 Connector Pinout on page 241 To install or remove an Avaya VoIP module see Replacing a PIM on page 172 Avaya VoIP Modules M 73 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide TIM508 LEDs indicate link status and activity Table 39 on page 74 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 39 LEDs for TIM508 Label Color State Description
306. og Telephony Interface Module 75 TIM510 E1 T1 Telephony Interface Module 74 Chapter 4 Part 2 Chapter 5 Table of Contents TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module 75 TIM516 Analog Telephony Interface Module 76 TIM518 Analog Telephony Interface Module 78 TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module i 79 Services Router User Interface Overview 81 User Interface OVervIeW o cresce Ee Pese pee eee ee e eaa ede EES 81 WED OVERVIEW ai aset de e eee ehe PCI p e EP VE de E dee en 81 e BN e ER Before de EE ER Usingcthe J Web EE enceinte AE dee See 85 Starting the J Web Interface sssssssssss Hee 85 AE A A Leetesttu brote otio toe 85 Elernents of the J Web Interface eset eee o nee enne eden e 84 Top Pane Elements sues cr tony lio tacos 85 M in Pane Elements sisi otra d eee teg er E aee e Ele 85 Side Pane Elements errar italia 86 Navigating the J Web Interface siaii eonia ririn ee 87 Navigating the Quick Configuration Pages sssssssse 88 Navigating the J Web Configuration Editor eccerre 88 Getting J WebHelD siste te etes oi et ttd pa 89 WD SESSIONS i ce f e eve ee te ree M e e qe rd 90 Using the Command Line Interface neneeese e 91 CLT Command Hierarchy ideo ted nee p E ER a ee ERR RES 91 Starting the bla eoe ciodtentoeiuted roses dtt See fete ft eee 92 CLI Operational Mode i ore od 92 Chl Configuration Mode ria Pie et 95 CEI Ee 94 Editing ReystrOR amp S doceo ideo bre ot e testo la de
307. on From the CLI enter the show system license command user router gt show system license License usage Licenses Licenses Licenses Expiry Feature name used installed needed j flow 0 1 O permanent bgp reflection 0 1 O permanent Licenses installed License identifier G03000002223 License version 2 Valid for device JN001875AB Features bgp reflection Border Gateway Protocol route reflection License identifier G03000002225 License version 2 Valid for device JN001875AB Features j flow J FLOW traffic analysis CFLOW reporting Meaning The output shows a list of the license usage and a list of the licenses installed on the Services Router and when they expire Verify the following information 166 Mm Verifying J series License Management Chapter 9 Installing and Managing J series Licenses m Each license is present Licenses are listed in ascending alphanumeric order by license ID m The feature for each license is the expected feature The features enabled are listed by license An all inclusive license has All features listed m All configured features have the required licenses installed The Licenses needed column must show that no licenses are required m The expiration information for the license is correct For J series only permanent licenses are supported Displaying License Usage Purpose Action Meaning Verify that the licenses fully cover the feature configuration on the Services Router From
308. onctionner avec des syst mes d alimentation TN WARNING Warnung Das Ger t ist f r die Verwendung mit TN Stromsystemen ausgelegt WARNING Avvertenza Il dispositivo stato progettato per l uso con sistemi di alimentazione TN WARNING Advarsel Utstyret er utfomet til bruk med TN stremsystemer gt i gt i bib bib b WARNING Aviso O dispositivo foi criado para operar com sistemas de corrente TN Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information WARNING jAtenci n El equipo esta disenado para trabajar con sistemas de alimentaci n tipo TN WARNING Varning Enheten ar konstruerad f r anvandning tillsammans med elkraftssystem av TN typ Telecommunication Line Cord Warning WARNING To reduce the risk of fire use only No 26 AWG or larger UL listed or CSA certified telecommunication line cord WARNING Waarschuwing Om brandgevaar te reduceren dient slechts telecommunicatielijnsnoer nr 26 AWG of groter gebruikt te worden WARNING Varoitus Tulipalovaaran v hent miseksi k yt ainoastaan nro 26 AWG tai paksumpaa tietoliikennejohdinta WARNING Attention Pour r duire les risques d incendie n utiliser que des cordons de lignes de t l communications de type AWG n 26 ou plus larges gt bb bb WARNING Warnung Zur Reduzierung der Feuergefahr eine Fernmeldeleitungsschnur der Gr e 26 AWG oder gr er ver
309. onfiguration and stay in the Set Up Quick Configuration page click Apply m To apply the configuration and return to the Quick Configuration page click OR 144 1m Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity m To cancel your entries and return to the Quick Configuration page click Cancel NOTE After initial configuration is complete the Services Router stops functioning as a DHCP server If you change the IP address of ge 0 0 0 and have the management device configured to use DHCP you lose your DHCP lease and your connection to the router through the J Web interface To reestablish a connection either set the IP address on the management device manually or connect ge 0 0 0 to the management network and access the router another way for example through the console port 5 To check the configuration see Displaying Basic Connectivity Configurations on page 150 Table 61 Set Up Quick Configuration Summary Field Function Your Action Identification Host Name Defines the hostname of the router Type the hostname required Domain Name Defines the network or subnetwork that the machine belongs to Type the domain name Root Password required Sets the root password that user root can use to log in to the router Type a plain text password that the system encrypts NOTE After a root password has been defined it
310. onnector Pinout The TIM516 Analog Telephony Interface Module uses a B25A unshielded 25 pair amphenol cable Table 98 on page 242 describes the TIM516 connector pinout Table 98 TIM516 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 Tip 2 Tip 5 Tip 242 1H Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 98 TIM516 Connector Pinout continued Pin Signal 4 Tip 5 Tip 6 Tip 7 Tip 8 Tip 17 Tip 18 Tip 19 Tip 20 Tip 21 Tip 22 Tip 25 Tip 24 Tip 26 Ring 27 Ring 28 Ring 29 Ring 30 Ring 31 Ring 32 Ring 33 Ring 42 Ring 45 Ring 44 Ring 45 Ring 46 Ring 47 Ring Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules W 243 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 98 TIM516 Connector Pinout continued Pin Signal 48 Ring 49 Ring TIM518 Connector Pinout 244 m The TIM518 Analog Telephony Interface Module uses a B25A unshielded 25 pair amphenol cable Table 99 on page 244 describes the TIM518 connector pinout Table 99 TIM518 Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 Ring 2 Ring 5 Ring 4 Ring 5 Ring 6 Ring 7 Ring 8 Ring 17 Ring 18 Ring 19 Ring 20 Ring 21 Ring 22 Ring 25 Ring 24 Ring 26 Tip 27 Tip 28 Tip Connector Pinouts for Avaya VoIP Modules
311. oopback address as the source address for outgoing packets If you use the J Web Set Up Quick Configuration page you can either set a loopback address of your choice or have the loopback address automatically set to 127 0 0 1 when you click Apply or OK to commit the configuration Built In Ethernet Interface Address The built in Gigabit Ethernet interfaces ge 0 0 0 through ge 0 0 3 on the front panel of the Services Router are the interfaces through which you perform initial router setup The examples in this guide use the ge 0 0 0 interface as the management interface but you can use any built in Ethernet port for management 134 1H Basic Connectivity Overview Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity After the initial configuration is complete you can attach the built in Ethernet port that you are using for management purposes to the management network Before initial configuration when the factory default configuration is active the router attempts to perform autoinstallation by obtaining a router configuration through all its connected interfaces including ge 0 0 0 The Services Router acts as a DHCP client out the built in Ethernet interfaces If the Services Router does not find a DHCP server within a few seconds it sets the address of ge 0 0 0 to 192 168 1 1 24 and becomes a DHCP server out the ge 0 0 0 interface NOTE If the ge 0 0 1 interface is being used it is set to 192 168 2 1 24 With the router tempo
312. oper polarity The power source cables might be labeled and to indicate their polarity There is no standard color coding for DC power cables The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 Using both hands slide the power supply into the chassis until you feel resistance Firmly push the power supply into the chassis until it comes to a stop Make sure that the power supply faceplate is flush with any adjacent power supply faceplate Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal block Within the terminal block remove the two center screws next to the labels 48 VDC and RTN Each screw contains a captive washer to secure a power cable lug to the terminal block Using one of the removed screws secure the positive DC source power cable lug to the RTN terminal Tighten the screw until snug Do not overtighten Apply between 8 Ib in 0 9 Nm and 9 Ib in 1 02 Nm of torque to the screw Using the other removed screw secure the negative DC source power
313. or each country or region listed in Table 56 on page 110 Figure 54 AC Plug Types Y mm er er China Europe Italy Japan North America UK 9001892 gt NOTE Power cords and cables must not block access to router components or drape where people might trip on them 110 HN Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation For information about the AC power supply see J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 13 and J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 26 To connect the power cord during initial installation see Connecting Power on page 124 To replace the AC power cord see Replacing AC Power Supply Cords on page 191 and Replacing DC Power Supply Cables on page 194 DC Power Connection and Power Cable Specifications Each DC power supply has a single DC input 48 VDC and return that requires a dedicated circuit breaker m J2350 routers minimum 15 A 48 VDC m J4350 and J6350 routers minimum 25 A 48 VDC If the J6350 router contains redundant DC power supplies one power supply must be powered by a dedicated power feed derived from feed A and the other power supply must be powered by a dedicated power feed derived from feed B This configuration provides the commonly deployed A B feed redundancy for the system Most sites distribute DC power through a main conduit that leads to frame moun
314. orriente continua cambiar el interruptor autom tico a la posici n de Apagado OFF y sujetar con cinta la palanca del interruptor autom tico en posici n de Apagado OFF Varning Innan du utf r n gon av f ljande procedurer m ste du kontrollera att str mf rs rjningen till likstr mskretsen ar bruten Kontrollera att all str mf rs rjning ar BRUTEN genom att sla AV det versp nningsskydd som skyddar likstr mskretsen och tejpa fast versp nningsskyddets omkopplare i FR N l get Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information DC Power Grounding Requirements and Warning An insulated grounding conductor that is identical in size to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit supply conductors but is identifiable by green and yellow stripes is installed as part of the branch circuit that supplies the unit The grounding conductor must be permanently connected to earth For further information see Chassis Grounding on page 123 and DC Power Connection and Power Cable Specifications on page 111 WARNING When installing the router the ground connection must always be made first and disconnected last Waarschuwing Bij de installatie van het toestel moet de aardverbinding altijd het eerste worden gemaakt en het laatste worden losgemaakt Varoitus Laitetta asennettaessa on maahan yhdist minen aina teht v ensiksi ja maadoituksen irti kytkeminen viimeiseksi At
315. ort er NOTE Most modems have an RS 232 DB 25 connector You must separately purchase an adapter to connect your modem to the RJ 45 to DB 9 adapter and Ethernet cable supplied with the router To connect the dial up modem to the console port on the router 1 2 3 fer E Turn off power to the router Turn off the power to the modem Plug one end of the Ethernet cable supplied with your router into the console port on the router Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter supplied with your router Connect the serial port adapter to a separately purchased DB 9 female to DB 25 male adapter or other adapter appropriate for your modem Plug the modem adapter into the DB 25 connector on the modem Connect the modem to your telephone network Turn on the power to the modem Power on the router by pressing the power button on the front panel Verify that the POWER LED on the front panel turns green Connecting to a Services Router Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity Connecting to the CLI at the User End To remotely connect to the CLI through a dial up modem connected to the console port on the router At your remote location connect a modem to a management device such as a PC or laptop computer On the PC or laptop computer start your asynchronous terminal emulation application such as Microsoft Windows Hyperterminal Select the COM port to which the mode
316. ort ports 3 The components of the front panel from left to right are described in the following sections m Physical Interface Modules PIMs on page 32 m Power Button and POWER LED on page 33 m STATUS LED on page 55 m ALARM LED on page 54 m HA LED on page 54 m RESET CONFIG Button on page 35 m Built In Gigabit Ethernet Ports on page 55 m Console Port on page 56 m AUX Port on page 56 m USB Port on page 56 Physical Interface Modules PIMs Physical Interface Modules PIMs provide the physical connection to various network media types For information about individual PIMs see Field Replaceable PIMs on page 46 For pinouts of PIM cable connectors see Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 225 For PIM replacement instructions see Replacing a PIM on page 172 Each J4350 and J6350 Services Router has six front panel slots for field replaceable PIMs These slots are numbered from top to bottom and from left to right as shown in the slot number diagram on the front panel shown in Figure 20 on page 55 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features Table 12 POWER LED Chapter 2 System Overview Figure 20 Slot Number Diagram on Front Panel SLOT NUMBER SLOT NUMBER A a Wm 3 Naso 9003823 Gigabit Ethernet and 4 port Fast Ethernet ePIMs can be installed in high speed slots only High speed slots are indicated by a black triangle contain
317. ot and manage a Services Router the J Web interface and the JUNOS command line interface CLI This chapter contains the following topics m User Interface Overview on page 81 m Before You Begin on page 82 m Using the J Web Interface on page 85 m Using the Command Line Interface on page 91 User Interface Overview This section contains the following topics m J Web Overview on page 81 m CLI Overview on page 82 J Web Overview The J Web interface allows you to monitor configure troubleshoot and manage the Services Router by means of a Web browser enabled with Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP or HTTP over Secure Sockets Layer HTTPS J Web provides access to all the configuration statements supported by the Services Router so you can fully configure it without using the JUNOS CLI You can perform the following tasks with the J Web interface m Monitoring Display the current configuration and information about the system interfaces chassis routing protocols routing tables routing policy filters and other features m Configuring View the current configurations at a glance configure the Services Router and manage configuration files The J Web interface provides the following different configuration methods a Configure the Services Router quickly and easily without configuring each statement individually m Edita graphical version of the JUNOS CLI configuration statements and hierarchy User Interface Over
318. otocol NTP Protocol that provides a reliable way of synchronizing the system time of a router root user A superuser or system administrator who can perform any task in the file system secure shell SSH Protocol that provides a secured method of logging in to a remote network system Telnet Software that allows a computer to act as a remote terminal ona network system Basic Connectivity Overview To connect your Services Router to the network and establish basic connectivity you enter information about your network This overview contains the following topics m Router Identification on page 132 m Root Password on page 155 m Time Zone and System Time on page 133 m Network Settings on page 155 m Default Gateway on page 154 m Backup Router on page 154 m Loopback Address on page 154 m Built In Ethernet Interface Address on page 134 m Management Access on page 135 Router Identification 132 m The domain name defines the network or subnetwork that the Services Router belongs to The hostname refers to the specific machine while the domain name is shared among all the devices in a given network Together the hostname and domain name identify the router in the network Basic Connectivity Overview Root Password Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity The root user has complete privileges to configure the Services Router and manage files in the router s file system Initiall
319. otos te tiere oe eere 276 DCipower Cables cy i ee REO E 254 DC power dsconpectlon 255 DC power plant and chassis ground 111 DC wiring SEQUENCES ee ee oet ots 257 DC wiring terminations ecciesie t 259 DC powered J4350 and J6350 routers restricted access installation only ocio 108 earthed mains socket Norway and Sweden OMY E 261 electrical E 252 ESD strap to prevent router damage ooo 27 follow lifting guidelines ee 119 121 generalista ii 249 grounded eguipment cee eters 260 installation de 266 jewelry removal sss 277 laser and EE 271 levels defined ta a 247 lightning acti tcs dets 278 maintenance and operational 275 multiple power supply disconnection 262 operating temperature isst emen 279 PETSONME Aas iod base rp diee cas 250 power discOnneCtofri s i n tete qb 265 product disposal ereere 281 rack mounting redulremente occccinccnncccocccconcn nns 267 ramp angle usse ettet destined seta seed tues 271 read installation iNStruCtiONS ono 266 restricted access location for DC powered A eter te 25 57 58 119 120 rotating fans compact flash replacement ios iio eebe 179 182 safe rack order for multiple routers 119 121 telecommunications lines 265 HBK We EE 264 Web access secure See secure access Web browser modifying Internet Explorer for worldwide version of JUNOS software 85 weight EE 17 dE EE uk des at dehet
320. outer a M Modified The configuration statement is added or modified Mandatory The configuration statement must have a value Side Pane Elements The side pane comprises the elements shown in Figure 51 on page 87 86 Mm Using the J Web Interface Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview Figure 51 Side Pane Elements Configuration Chassis Expand all Hide all j H groups y interfaces a i uad s E Eiscripte i Routing Route Information E commit Class of Service BGP Information y OSPF Information Hall Service Sets RIP Information E services Firewall DL SW Information E syslog amp som Configuration hierarchy El protocols J Web subtasks isis Hospt Elarea F1 9 0 0 0 interface EE all fe 009 0 016744 m Subtask Displays options related to the selected task in the J Web taskbar m Configuration hierarchy For the J Web configuration editor displays the hierarchy of committed statements in the Services Router configuration m Click Expand all to display the entire hierarchy a Click Hide all to display only the statements at the top level m Click plus signs to expand individual items m Click minus signs to hide individual items Navigating the J Web Interface The layout of the panes allows you to quickly navigate through the interface You navigate the J Web interface move forward and backward scroll pages and expand and collapse elements as you do i
321. over on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 176 2 Locate the Crypto Module connector on the system board see Figure 97 on page 200 5 Remove the Crypto Module from its electrostatic bag 4 Align the notches in the Crypto Module with the notches in the connector on the system board and push the Crypto Module down flat as shown in Figure 97 on page 200 Figure 97 Installing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module Crypto Accelerator Module M Ed y o o o Connector 5 Insert the three screws and tighten them until snug Do not overtighten 6 Replace the chassis cover See Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 176 7 Replace the power cord or cable 200 1H Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components 8 Press and release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily 9 Verify that the Crypto Module is correctly installed by issuing the show chassis hardware command as shown in the following example user host gt show chassis hardware user host gt show chassis hardware Hardware inventory Item Version Part number Serial number Description Chassis JN1092BAEADB 36350 Midplane REV 03 710 014593 NR2489 System IO REV 01 710 016210 NL3304 JX350 System IO Crypto Module Crypto Acceleration Routing Engine REV 08 710 015273 NM4265 RE J6350 3400 FPC 0 FPC PIC 0 4x
322. ower management POWER Systemic cedo eei R restricted access Installaton 119 Routing Engine hardware EE UO TIMO Ocarina cta IO EE TIMO aet tesis IMS BE ud s ie Me eiie dk LAS a Fere E TMS 2 lias tt o a RE le GE J4350 4 Port Fast Ethernet PIM 0 000 cccccce essences 61 4 Port ISDN BRI STT BIM ttes 62 4 Port ISDN BRI U DIN 62 Index ADS PIM cu ir ax doeet estet 64 air filter replachng n mai e iaa RE RR e 206 Avaya VolP miodules cette 66 A ert roter net es 51 boot SEQUENCE eck zie ete De abad 51 CHASSIS e Eee dM att de e ob ees 27 cooling SVSLeITL enee da eee tdt edet tede 38 Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM 57 Dual Port El PIM 2 e eerte seed 56 Dual Port Fast Ethernet DIN 60 Dual Port Serial PIMs uius per eio reads 55 Dual Port TE PIM leds 56 electrical specfications 109 EE 38 front Er tee te ete teres 32 FRUS replacing acesas dla vete a 171 GSE Deb GE 65 Gigabit Ethernet ePIM screen 52 Gigabit Ethernet UPIMS n Di pret end 49 W 26 hardware Components cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 30 hardware replacing 171 installato tii 120 interfaces supported MET 47 mounting brackets installing 121 J6350 OVETVIEW E eer 5 physical specftcationg csmi iis 50 PIMSOVOEVI W setze dp pee dena e ENDURO atten 46 PIMS Supported ehi rtp et abest ede 47 ports Supported ee ira a e aS 47 power management cese eene eds 112 POWEE S
323. ower supply This fan is not regulated by the Operating system J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features WM 25 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 11 Airflow Through the J2320 Chassis Front 9004139 Rear Figure 12 Airflow Through the J2350 Chassis Front J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features This section contains the following topics m J4350 and J6350 Chassis on page 27 m J4350 and 6550 Midplane on page 51 m J4350 and J6350 Routing Engine Hardware on page 51 m J4350 and J6350 Boot Devices on page 51 m J4350 and J6350 Front Panel on page 32 m J4350 Power System on page 56 26 NW J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview m J6350 Power System on page 37 m J4350 and J6350 Cooling System on page 38 J4350 and J6350 Chassis The J4350 and J6350 chassis is a rigid sheet metal structure that houses all the other router components see Figure 15 on page 28 through Figure 18 on page 50 The chassis can be installed in many types of racks or cabinets For information about acceptable rack types see Rack Requirements on page 104 In addition to the features described in subsequent sections the chassis includes the following features a Mounting brackets One pair of
324. pact flash see the J series Services Router Administration Guide C NOTE Use only compact flash cards purchased from Juniper Networks for your J series platform and model 178 Mm Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Figure 78 Location of J2320 and J2350 Internal Compact Flash Compact flash cover screws 4 Chassis front Internal compact flash cover b GO CJ E d VW 9004121 Internal compact flash To replace the internal compact flash 1 2 Place an electrostatic bag or antistatic mat on a flat stable surface Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 Press and release the power button to power off the router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off Remove the power cable from the power source receptacle Remove chassis cover See Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 176 WARNING If the fans are still rotating wait until they stop before proceeding with the next step With a Phi
325. plug the power cord from the appliance inlet on the power supply faceplate Slide the ejector tab on the power supply faceplate to the right and hold it in place to unlock the power supply Grasp the handle on the power supply faceplate and pull firmly to start removing the power supply Slide it halfway out of the chassis see Figure 91 on page 193 Place one hand underneath the power supply to support it and slide it completely out of the chassis If you are not reinstalling a power supply into the emptied slot install a blank power supply panel over the slot Figure 91 Removing an AC Power Supply Ejector Installing an AC Power Supply in J6350 Routers To install an AC power supply in a J6350 Services Router see Figure 92 on page 194 1 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 Using both hands slide the power supply into the chassis until you feel resistance Firmly push the power supply into the chassis until it comes to a stop Make sure that the power supply faceplate is flush with any adjacent power supply faceplate Insert the appliance coupler end of a power cord into the appliance inlet on the power supply faceplate Insert the power cord pl
326. pply marnaging GEI siiri eee Wily dees ee LAN port Stats eerte e Tie managing J Web TEIN secretius creuit Pap et sor tereti ee OVELVIEW Sy scene link activity 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM preparation for link status 4 port el saving CLI LINK SPEED status Dual Port Fast Ethernet traffic ANALYSIS iie Lo Seabee d ir SEENEN 61 Msz EE ONLINE status ADSL PIM 65 iftinig guidelines eee eee meterse ONLINE status G SHDSL PIM 66 ightning activity Warning eera aenea 278 ONLINE status ISDN BRI PIMS ooiincncononcnccccccos 63 LINE and TRUNK ports on Avaya VoIP TGM550 69 POWER Girt eigene eet eege ei rite 20 55 LINE ports TIMS124 iiec pete delebo recette 75 safety Warnings e sete redet eet 271 ink activity LED 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM 62 serial port Status ues e t detto dd 55 LINK LED ess eatin t d ERAN See era fe 25 55 54 SHDSI Port Status ste seca em eegne see 66 ink status LED 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM 62 SIG signal edt eget fiv eet itd 75 LINK SPEED LED Dual Port Fast Ethernet PIM 61 STATUS router eet Bede dete e een 21 34 ithium battery compliance siei iin 283 ER DOIt Status 1d e e na bed Ae ess 57 IRAN 134 TSH POLUStatus eege eege 60 ocal connection to the router console port 139 TGM550 port status 72 oopback address TIM508 link Status ee ee 74 defining configuration editor 149 MT Dk S
327. pport or call 1 888 314 JTAC within the United States or 1 408 745 9500 outside the United States When you need to return a component 1 Determine the part number and serial number of the component For instructions see Locating Component Serial Numbers on page 215 2 Obtain an RMA number from JTAC 5 Provide the following information m Part number and serial number of component m Your name organization name telephone number fax number and shipping address m Description of the failure The support representative validates your request and issues an RMA number for return of the component 4 Packthe router or component for shipment as described in Packing a Router or Component for Shipment on page 217 Packing a Router or Component for Shipment This section contains the following topics m Tools and Parts Required on page 217 m Packing the Services Router for Shipment on page 218 m Packing Components for Shipment on page 218 Tools and Parts Required To remove components from the router or the router from a rack you need the following tools and parts m Blank panels to cover empty slots m Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat for each component m Electrostatic discharge ESD grounding wrist strap Packing a Router or Component for Shipment mM 217 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Flat blade screwdriver approximately 1 4 in 6 mm Phillips screwdrivers numb
328. provadas tais como termina es de cabo em circuito fechado e planas com terminais de orelha voltados para cima Estas termina es de cabo dever o ser do tamanho apropriado para os respectivos cabos e dever o prender simultaneamente o isolamento e o fio condutor WARNING jAtenci n Cuando se necesite hilo trenzado utilizar terminales para cables homologados tales como las de tipo bucle cerrado o espada con las leng etas de conexi n vueltas hacia arriba Estos terminales deber n ser del tamano apropiado para los cables que se utilicen y tendr n que sujetar tanto el aislante como el conductor WARNING Varning Nar flertr diga ledningar kr vs m ste godkanda ledningskontakter anv ndas t ex kabelsko av sluten eller ppen typ med uppatvand tapp Storleken p dessa kontakter m ste vara avpassad till ledningarna och m ste kunna halla bade isoleringen och ledaren fastklamda Grounded Equipment Warning WARNING The router is intended to be grounded Ensure that the router is connected to earth ground during normal use Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Waarschuwing Deze apparatuur hoort geaard te worden Zorg dat de host computer tijdens normaal gebruik met aarde is verbonden Varoitus T m laitteisto on tarkoitettu maadoitettavaksi Varmista ett is nt laite on yhdistetty maahan normaalik yt n aikana Attention Cet quipement doit tre
329. psulation GRE IP over IP and IP Security IPSec tunnels Advanced Encryption Standard AES 128 192 and 256 bit 56 bit Data Encryption Standard DES and 168 bit 3DES encryption MD5 and Secure Hash Algorithm SHA 1 authentication Replay attack prevention Stateful firewall packet filters Network Address Translation NAT Voice Support Compressed Real Time Transport Protocol CRTP J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Routers support voice over IP VoIP routing with the Avaya IG550 Integrated Gateway which consists of modules that can be installed in the PIM slots High Availability Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP Graceful restart according to IETF standards Redundant interfaces System Management JUNOScope network manager Web browser interface for Services Router configuration and management JUNOScript XML application programming interface API JUNOS command line interface CLI for Services Router configuration and management through the console Telnet SSH or J Web CLI terminal Simple Network Management Protocol version 1 SNMPv1 SNMPv2 and SNMPv5 Traffic Analysis J Flow flow monitoring and accounting License required for J Flow Packet capture PCAP Real time performance monitoring RPM 10 Mm Jseries Software Features and Licenses Chapter 1 Overview of Services Routers Table 5 Summary of J seri
330. r User Interface Overview Table 52 Configuring the CLI Environment continued Environment CLI Command Default Setting Options Feature Number of CLI set cli screen width Variable depends on terminal type To change the number of characters characters displayed width displayed on a line replace width with ona line a value between 0 and 100 000 Your terminal type set cli terminal unknown or set by console Replace terminal type with one of the terminal type following values ansi vt100 small xterm xterm Using the Command Line Interface m 99 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 100 Mm Using the Command Line Interface Part 2 Installing a Services Router m Preparing for Router Installation on page 103 m Installing and Connecting a Services Router on page 117 m Establishing Basic Connectivity on page 131 m Configuring Secure Web Access on page 155 m Installing and Managing J series Licenses on page 161 Installing a Services Router m 101 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 102 Mm Installing a Services Router Chapter 5 Preparing for Router Installation Before installing a J series Services Router make sure that your site has the proper operating environment and equipment Use the checklist at the end of the chapter to help you prepare your site This chapter discusses the following topics General Site Guidelines on pag
331. r does not have routing information for the router sends the packet to the default gateway The default gateway entry is always present in the routing and forwarding tables You can specify a backup router to take over when the routing protocol process of the Services Router is not running usually when the Services Router is booting or if its routing protocol process has failed Packets arriving at a Services Router in this situation are routed to the backup router When the routing protocol process starts up again the address of the backup router is removed from the routing and forwarding tables of the Services Router The backup router must be located on the same subnet NOTE To configure a backup router you must use the CLI or J Web configuration editor You cannot configure a backup router with J Web Quick Configuration Loopback Address The loopback address is the IP address of the Services Router The loopback address ensures that the router provides an IP address to management applications Because it must always be available to hosts attempting to route packets to the router the loopback address resides on an interface that is always active known as the loopback interface 100 0 Setting a loopback address ensures that the router can receive packets addressed to the loopback address as long as the router is reachable though any entry ingress interface In addition applications such as NTP RADIUS and TACACS can use the l
332. r equipment practice document numbers ETS 500 119 1 through 119 4 published by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute http www etsi org The horizontal spacing between the rails in a rack that complies with this standard is usually wider than the router s mounting ears which measure 19 in 48 2 cm from outer edge to outer edge Use approved wing devices to narrow the opening between the rails as required The rack rails must be spaced widely enough to accommodate the router chassis s external dimensions 5 44 in 8 74 cm high 17 44 in 44 5 cm wide and 21 15 in 55 67 cm deep The outer edges of the mounting ears extend the width of either chassis to 19 44 in 48 58 cm and the front of the chassis extends approximately 0 5 in 1 27 cm beyond the mounting ears The spacing of rails and adjacent racks must also allow for the clearances around the router and rack See General Site Guidelines on page 105 A CAUTION If you are mounting the router in a cabinet be sure that ventilation is sufficient to prevent overheating If a front mount rack is used we recommend supporting the back of the router with a shelf or other structure The J4350 and J6550 chassis height of 5 44 in 8 74 cm equals 2 U Each U isa standard rack unit defined in Cabinets Racks Panels and Associated Equipment document number EIA 510 D published by the Electronics Industry Association Connection to Building Structure
333. r rescue conftguration cee 22 55 restart after upgrade Drompt 98 Return Materials Authorization See RMA returning hardware ete te n Ge mte ttu 215 packing a Services Router for shipment 218 packing components for shipment 218 PROCECUTE si decore tools and parts required RJ 11 connector pinouts TGM550 analog ports TIM514 analog DO Sie Heel a ee RJ 45 connector pinouts chiassis console pOott 4 e Totes ehe 254 Fast Ethernet DOT o somos icone nth 239 Gigabit Ethernet port eblMi 234 Gigabit Ethernet port oPlMai 233 TGM550 console Dort et b tta 259 TIMS 10 EITI Dori dei pte e 241 TIM524 ISDN BRI ports ote 245 RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter chassis console port 139 142 TGM550 console pott pete ded ete Ret 70 RJ 48 connector to DB 15 connector crossover PINOUES nicer bert tees bed de noe 297 RJ 48 connector to DB 15 connector straight DIDOULS ctra ebe 237 RJ 48 connector to RJ 48 connector crossover PINOUUS sarta qa rta tt saca 236 RJ 48 connector to RJ 48 connector straight elle LE 236 RMA Return Materials Authorization 213 tf le oe LY packing a Services Router for shipment 218 packing components for shipment 2 NO procedure e ed ede 216 tools and parts required 217 root password at initial local connection one 140 at initial remote connection none 145 characteristics esn egerat e 135 Index
334. r trunk lines m Ring voltage generation for a variety of international frequencies and cadences 78 W Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview For pinouts of cable connectors for the TIM518 see TIM518 Connector Pinout on page 244 To install or remove an Avaya VoIP module see Replacing a PIM on page 172 TIM518 LEDs indicate link status and activity Table 46 on page 79 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 46 LEDs for TIM518 Label Color State Description ALM Red On steadily Alarm A TIM518 failure requires monitoring or maintenance ACT Yellow Blinking Active A device connected to the TIM518 is in use This situation can include a telephone that is off the hook For more information about the TIM518 see the Avaya manual Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module The TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module Figure 47 on page 79 also known as the TIM521 BRI media module has four ports with RJ 45 jacks that can be administered as ISDN Basic Rate Interface BRI trunk connections Each ISDN BRI port has two B channels plus a D channel Up to two TIM521s with 4 BRI trunk ports each can be installed in any of the slots on the Services Router Figure 47 TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module 9003859 For ISDN BRI trunking the TIM521 supports up to four BRI interfaces to the central office at the ISDN T refe
335. ransmission mode is configurable to half or full duplex The 1 port and 6 port SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs cannot be manually configured they are set at 1000 Mbps and full duplex m Autonegotiation m l port and 6 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs use SFP transceivers to allow different connectors to be used on uPIM ports These SFP Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs support Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview 1000Base SX 1000Base LX and 1000Base T SFPs They do not support 1000Base LH SFPs 1000Base SX and 1000Base LX SFP transceivers have the following characteristics m Duplex LC PC connector Rx and Tx m Optical interface support See the J series Services Router Administration Guide m Sport and 16 port Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs and SFPs on the 1 port and 6 port uPIMs support 1000Base T RJ 45 connectors For pinouts of cable connectors for Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs see Gigabit Ethernet uPIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 255 Limitations Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs have the following limitations m Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs do not support SNMP m Gigabit Ethernet uPIM interfaces can be configured up to a maximum MTU size of 9014 bytes Installation Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs can be inserted in any slot on J2320 J2350 J4350 or J6350 Services Routers Throughput for a uPIM is higher when it is inserted in a high speed slot High speed slots are slots 5 and 6 on the J4350 router and slots 2 5 5 and 6 on the
336. rarily acting as a DHCP server you can manually configure it with the J Web interface Any DHCP client host for example a PC or laptop computer directly connected to ge 0 0 0 receives an address on the 192 168 1 1 24 network eS NOTE The DHCP functionality for initial setup is different from the configurable DHCP server functionality of the Services Router during operation To configure the Services Router as a DHCP server see the J series Services Router Administration Guide Once you connect your laptop or PC to ge 0 0 0 you can use a Web browser to visit the address 192 168 1 1 24 access the J Web Set Up Quick Configuration page and complete the initial configuration of the router After you perform the initial configuration and commit it by clicking Apply or OK on the Set Up page the configured router can no longer act as a DHCP server Therefore in order to continue using it as a management interface you should configure the IP address of the interface as part of the initial configuration Management Access Telnet allows you to connect to the Services Router and access the CLI to execute commands from a remote system Telnet connections are not encrypted and therefore can be intercepted Telnet access to the root user is prohibited You must use more secure methods such as SSH to log in as root If you are using a JUNOScript server to configure and monitor routers you can activate clear text access on the router to a
337. rdered without the Crypto Accelerator Module come standard with 256 MB of memory The memory on J2320 routers can be upgraded to 1 GB For instructions on upgrading memory see Replacing DRAM Modules on page 188 Each J2320 chassis contains four built in Gigabit Ethernet ports with link speeds of 10 100 1000 Mbps over a copper interface The chassis also contains three slots for field replaceable Physical Interface Modules PIMs and Avaya voice over IP VoIP modules providing flexible WAN and voice connectivity options The J2320 Services Router supports the following field replaceable PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules m Gigabit Ethernet uPIM 1 port 6 port 8 port and 16 port m Dual Port Serial PIM m Dual Port El PIM m Dual Port T1 PIM m Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM m 4 port ISDN BRI S T or U PIM m ADSL 2 2 Annex A PIM 1 port m ADSL 2 2 Annex B PIM 1 port m G SHDSL PIM 2 ports m TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module m TIM508 Analog Telephony Interface Module 8 ports m TIM510 E1 TI Telephony Interface Module 1 port e m TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Module 4 ports p a TIM516 Analog Telephony Interface Module 16 ports f m TIM518 Analog Telephony Interface Module 16 ports m TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module 4 ports J2350 Services Router Overview The J2350 Services Router is primarily designed for regional or branch offices It has a chassis that is 1 5 U rack u
338. re Features on page 26 For site wiring and power system guidelines requirements and specifications see the following sections m Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines on page 108 m Router Power Requirements on page 109 m AC Power Connection and Power Cord Specifications on page 109 m DC Power Connection and Power Cable Specifications on page 111 m Planning for Power Management on page 112 Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications W 107 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Site Electrical Wiring Guidelines 108 m A WARNING Certain ports on the router are designed for use as intrabuilding within the building interfaces only Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR 1089 CORE Issue 4 and require isolation from the exposed outside plant OSP cabling To comply with NEBS requirements and protect against lightning surges and commercial power disturbances the intrabuilding ports must not be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring The intrabuilding ports on the router are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling only The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection for connecting these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring WARNING DC powered J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Routers are intended for installation only in a restricted access location When planning the electrical wiring at
339. re the Services Router including system parameters routing protocols interfaces network management and user access you must enter configuration mode In configuration mode the CLI provides commands to configure the router load a text ASCII file that contains the router configuration activate a configuration and save the configuration to a text file You enter configuration mode by entering the configure operational mode command The CLI prompt changes from user host gt to user host To view a list of configuration mode commands type a question mark at the command line prompt You do not need to press Enter after typing the question mark userQhost Possible completions Enter Execute this command activate Remove the inactive tag from a statement annotate Annotate the statement with a comment commit Commit current set of changes copy Copy a statement deactivate Add the inactive tag to a statement delete Delete a data element edit Edit a sub element exit Exit from this level help Provide help information Using the Command Line Interface m 93 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide CLI Basics 94 insert Insert a new ordered data element load Load configuration from ASCII file quit Quit from this level rename Rename a statement rollback Roll back to previous committed configuration run Run an operational mode command save Save configuration to ASCII file set Set a
340. reli la terre S assurer que l appareil h te est reli la terre lors de l utilisation normale Warnung Dieses Ger t mu geerdet werden Stellen Sie sicher da amp das Host Ger t wahrend des normalen Betriebs an Erde gelegt ist WARNING Avvertenza Questa apparecchiatura deve essere collegata a massa Accertarsi che il dispositivo host sia collegato alla massa di terra durante il normale utilizzo Advarsel Dette utstyret skal jordes Forviss deg om vertsterminalen er jordet ved normalt bruk Aviso Este equipamento dever estar ligado terra Certifique se que o host se encontra ligado terra durante a sua utiliza o normal jAtenci n Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra Asegurarse de que el equipo principal est conectado a tierra durante el uso normal Varning Denna utrustning ar avsedd att jordas Se till att vardenheten ar jordad vid normal anvandning Warning Statement for Norway and Sweden WARNING The equipment must be connected to an earthed mains socket outlet Advarsel Apparatet skal kobles til en jordet stikkontakt Varning Apparaten skall anslutas till jordat natuttag In Case of Electrical Accident If an electrical accident results in an injury take the following actions in this order 1 Usecaution Be aware of potentially hazardous conditions that could cause further injury 2 Disconnect power from the Services Router 5 lf possible send another person to get medical ai
341. rence point Information is communicated on each port in two ways m Over two 64 Kbps B channels called B1 and B2 that can be circuit switched simultaneously Avaya VoIP Modules m 79 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide NOTE The TIM521 does not support BRI stations or combining both B channels together to form a 128 Kbps channel m Over a 16 Kbps channel called the D channel that is used for signaling The TIM521 occupies one time slot for all four D channels The circuit switched connections have an a law or mu law option for voice operation The circuit switched connections operate as 64 Kbps clear channels transmitting data For pinouts of cable connectors for the TIM521 see TIM521 Connector Pinout on page 245 To install or remove an Avaya VoIP module see Replacing a PIM on page 172 TIM521 LEDs indicate link status and activity Table 47 on page 80 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 47 LEDs for TIM521 Label Color State Description ALM Red On steadily Alarm A TIM521 failure requires monitoring or maintenance ACT Yellow On steadily Active A trunk connected to the TIM521 is in use For more information about the TIM521 see the Avaya manual Hardware Description and Reference for Avaya Communication Manager 80 1 Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 4 Services Router User Interface Overview You can use two user interfaces to monitor configure troublesho
342. rface Module 4 ports m TIM516 Analog Telephony Interface Module 16 ports m TIM518 Analog Telephony Interface Module 16 ports m TIM521 ISDN BRI Telephony Interface Module 4 ports J4350 Services Router Overview The 4550 Services Router is designed primarily for regional or branch offices It has a chassis that is 2 U rack units in size with a nonredundant AC or DC power supply and a universal serial bus USB port for external storage J4350 routers ordered with the optional Crypto Accelerator Module come standard with 1 GB of memory while those ordered without the Crypto Accelerator Module come standard with 256 MB of memory J4550 routers can contain between 256 MB and 2 GB of memory For instructions on adding memory see Replacing DRAM Modules on page 188 Each J4350 chassis contains four built in Gigabit Ethernet ports with link speeds of 10 100 1000 Mbps over a copper interface and six slots for field replaceable Physical Interface Modules PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules Two of the six slots slots 5 and 6 support high speed interfaces ePIMs J4350 Services Router Overview M 5 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide The J4350 Services Router supports the following field replaceable PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules m Gigabit Ethernet uPIM 1 port 6 port 8 port and 16 port m SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 1 port m Copper Gigabit Ethernet ePIM 1 port m Dual Port Serial
343. rical Safety Guidelines The following electrical safety guidelines apply to a DC powered router m ADC powered router is equipped with a DC terminal block that is rated for the power requirements of a maximally configured router To supply sufficient power terminate the DC input wiring on a facility DC source capable of supplying at least 8 A 48 VDC Incorporate an easily accessible disconnect device into the facility wiring Be sure to connect the ground wire or conduit to a solid office earth ground A closed loop ring is recommended for terminating the ground conductor at the ground stud m Inthe United States a restricted access area is one in accordance with Articles 110 16 110 17 and 110 18 of the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information NOTE Primary overcurrent protection is provided by the building circuit breaker This breaker should protect against excess currents short circuits and earth faults in accordance with NEC ANSI NFPA70 m Ensure that the polarity of the DC input wiring is correct Under certain conditions connections with reversed polarity might trip the primary circuit breaker or damage the equipment m For personal safety connect the green and yellow wire to safety earth ground at both the router and the supply side of the DC wiring m The marked input voltage of 48 VDC for a DC powered router is the nomina
344. rm condition requires monitoring or maintenance m ndicates a noncritical condition on the router that if eft unchecked might cause an interruption in service or degradation in performance m A missing rescue configuration or software license generates an amber system alarm Unlit Off No alarms 22 m For information about alarm conditions and corrective actions see Chassis Alarm Conditions on page 209 For additional information see the J series Services Router Administration Guide HA LED The HA high availability LED is for future use The LED lights when the router starts but otherwise remains unlit RESET CONFIG Button Use the RESET CONFIG button to return the router to either the rescue configuration or the factory default configuration The button is recessed to prevent it from being pressed accidentally To press this button insert a small probe such as a straightened paper clip into the pinhole on the front panel see Figure 8 on page 19 and Figure 9 on page 19 For example if someone inadvertently commits a configuration that denies management access to a Services Router you can delete the invalid configuration and replace it with a rescue configuration by pressing the RESET CONFIG button You must have previously set the rescue configuration through the J Web interface or the CLI The rescue configuration is a previously committed valid configuration CAUTION Pressing and holding the RESET CONFIG butto
345. rminal Power AC power Power supply cable tie appliance inlet fan exhaust g004101 Figure 4 Rear of J2350 AC Powered Chassis External compact Protective Air filter flash cover earthing terminal screw Power AC power Power supply cable tie appliance inlet fan exhaust 9004123 J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features m 15 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 5 Rear of J2350 DC Powered Chassis External compact Protective Air filter flash cover earthing terminal screw Ke Power DC terminal Power supply y cable tie block fan exhaust Figure 6 J2320 Hardware Components front Physical Interface Internal compact Midplane Module PIM flash cover EA f A E p 3 5 Fans 5 3 E 3 jms i T GE DRAM 2 pairs Crypto External Power Accelerator compact supply Module flash Rear 16 Mm J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview Figure 7 J2350 Hardware Components Front Physical Interface Internal compact Midplane Module PIM flash cover yo I Fans 4 C JC
346. rns solid green Connecting to a Services Router m 137 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 7 Turn on the power to the management device The router assigns an IP address to the management device within the 192 168 1 0 24 subnetwork if the device is configured to use DHCP 8 From the management device open a Web browser and enter the IP address 192 168 1 1 in the address field The Set Up Quick Configuration page appears 9 Configure basic settings for your router as described in Configuring Basic Settings with J Web Quick Configuration on page 143 C NOTE You must manually configure the IP address for the management port you are using before you save your initial configuration When you save the configuration for the first time you will lose the connection to the router if you have not manually configured the IP address If you lose connection through the management interface you must connect through the console port Figure 67 Connecting to the Gigabit Ethernet Port on J2320 and J2350 Routers RJ 45 cable 9004137 138 HN Connecting to a Services Router Chapter 7 Establishing Basic Connectivity Figure 68 Connecting to the Gigabit Ethernet Port on J4350 and J6350 Routers RJ 45 cable Connecting to the CLI Locally If you plan to use the CLI to configure the router you must connect through the console port as shown in Figure 69 on pa
347. rt and Returning Hardware J series Requirements and Specifications Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Index Index Abbreviated Table of Contents XV 13 43 81 103 117 131 153 161 171 209 213 223 247 291 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide vi m Table of Contents Part 1 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 About This Guide xv EELER XV AUIGIEN CE ck xt hs dt rd tr edo led Ed XV Howto Use TAIS Guide 1 2 etd HT ede eh EE T xvi Document CONVENTIONS i eiecti db ett deter reed eegend SS xvii Related Juniper Networks Documentation sssss xviii Documentation Feedback xu iie eet te be bere io xxi Requesting Technical Support i eot eoe ees Poet ted ga a anit xxi J series Overview Overview of Services Routers 3 2520 Services Router OVEFVIEW Js deser ree a RR e n i o a gea 5 2350 Services Router OVERVIEW enee cem fp e ed estate e eite Dei ee deg 4 J4350 Services Router Overview sssssssssssss emen 5 J6350 Services Router OVerVleW sanering pedet tic e den o P pe e ao ade ae 6 J series Software Features and Licenses sssssssssss nano nnnnnnos 7 System Overview 13 J2320 and 2550 Services Router Hardware Features 15 12320 4nd J2 350 EEN 15 2320 and 2350 Midplane s ot dad elei unes 18 J2320 and J2350 Routing Engine Hardware 18 2320 and 2350 Beer DEVICES i e le aep eie t
348. rtain ports on the router are designed for use as intrabuilding within the building interfaces only Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR 1089 CORE Issue 4 and require isolation from the exposed outside plant OSP cabling To comply with NEBS requirements and protect against lightning surges and commercial power disturbances the intrabuilding ports must not be metallically connected to interfaces that connect to the OSP or its wiring The intrabuilding ports on the router are suitable for connection to intrabuilding or unexposed wiring or cabling only The addition of primary protectors is not sufficient protection for connecting these interfaces metallically to OSP wiring CAUTION To comply with intrabuilding lightning and surge requirements intrabuilding wiring must be shielded and the shield for the wiring must be grounded at both ends CAUTION Before removing or installing components of a router attach an ESD strap to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around your bare wrist Failure to use an ESD strap could result in damage to the router Safety Guidelines and Warnings Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information Install the Services Router in compliance with the following local national or international electrical codes m United States National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70 United States National Electrical Code m Canada Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 CSA C22 1
349. s on page 176 6 Locate the Crypto Module on the system board see Figure 95 on page 198 7 Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the three screws from top of the Crypto Accerator Module as shown in Figure 96 on page 199 Figure 96 Removing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Module Crypto Accelerator Module Remove screws 3 Gentle lift here to remove the card from the connector 004114 8 Gently lift the Crypto Module to disengage it from the connector on the system board as shown in Figure 96 on page 199 9 Place the Crypto Module on the antistatic mat or in the electrostatic bag Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers m 199 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Installing a J2320 or J2350 Crypto Accelerator Module To install a Crypto Accelerator Module 1 Take the following steps if you have not already done so a Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 b Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router Wait for the POWER LED to turn off c Unplug the power cord or cable from the power source receptacle d Remove the chassis cover See Removing and Replacing the Chassis C
350. s a female 9 pin or 25 pin connector demand circuit Interface configured for dial on demand routing backup In OSPF the demand circuit reduces the amount of OSPF traffic by removing all OSPF protocols when the routing domain is in a steady state dial backup Feature that reestablishes network connectivity through one or more backup ISDN dialer interfaces after a primary interface fails When the primary interface is reestablished the ISDN interface is disconnected dial in Feature that enables J series Services Routers to receive calls from the remote end of a backup ISDN connection The remote end of the ISDN call might be a service provider a corporate central location or a customer premises equipment CPE branch office All incoming calls can be verified against caller IDs configured on the router s dialer interface See also callback 44 m PIM and VoIP Module Terms Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Table 18 PIM and VoIP Module Terms continued Term Definition dialer filter Stateless firewall filter that enables dial on demand routing backup when applied to a physical ISDN interface and its dialer interface configured as a passive static route The passive static route has a lower priority than dynamic routes If all dynamic routes to an address are lost from the routing table and the router receives a packet for that address the dialer interface initiates an ISDN backup connection and
351. s ensure safe dissipation of static electricity in all situations m ESD point One electrostatic discharge ESD point a banana plug receptacle at the front of the chassis minimizes the risk of electrical discharge in potentially hazardous environments A CAUTION Before removing or installing components of a functioning router attach an ESD strap to an ESD point and place the other end of the strap around your bare wrist Failure to use an ESD strap could result in damage to the router The router must be connected to earth ground during normal operation The protective earthing terminal on the rear of the chassis is provided to connect the router to ground see Figure 3 on page 15 Additional grounding is provided to an AC powered router when you plug its power supply into a grounded AC power receptacle For additional safety information see Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information on page 247 Figure 1 Front of J2320 Chassis Console Physical Interface port Modules PIMs g004100 Power Auxiliary LAN USB Blank ESD button port ports ports PlMpanel point 14 m J2320and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features Chapter 2 System Overview Figure 2 Front of J2350 Chassis Console Physical Interface port Modules PIMs g004122 Power Auxiliary LAN USB Blank ESD button port ports ports PIM panels point Figure 3 Rear of J2320 Chassis External compact Protective flash cover earthing te
352. s of the GateD software copyright 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Portions of the GateD software copyright 1991 D L S Associates This product includes software developed by Maker Communications Inc copyright 1996 1997 Maker Communications Inc uniper Networks the Juniper Networks logo NetScreen and ScreenOS are registered trademarks of Juniper Networks Inc in the United States and other countries JUNOS and JUNOSe are trademarks of Juniper Networks Inc All other trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks are the property of their respective owners uniper Networks assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies in this document Juniper Networks reserves the right to change modify transfer or otherwise revise this publication without notice Products made or sold by Juniper Networks or components thereof might be covered by one or more of the following patents that are owned by or licensed to Juniper Networks U S Patent Nos 5 473 599 5 905 725 5 909 440 6 192 051 6 333 650 6 359 479 6 406 312 6 429 706 6 459 579 6 493 347 6 538 518 6 538 899 6 552 918 6 567 902 6 578 186 and 6 590 785 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Release 9 2 Copyright 2008 Juniper Networks Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA Revision History August 2008 Revision 1 The information in this document is curr
353. s the component For instructions see Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware on page 213 This chapter contains the following topics Tools and Parts Required on page 171 Replacing the Console Port Cable on page 172 Replacing a PIM on page 172 Replacing PIM Cables on page 175 Removing and Replacing the Chassis Cover on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 176 Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 178 Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers on page 181 Replacing External Compact Flashes on page 184 Replacing USB Storage Devices on page 186 Replacing DRAM Modules on page 188 Replacing Power System Components on page 191 Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J2320 and J2350 Routers on page 198 Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers on page 201 Replacing Air Filters on J2350 Routers on page 205 Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers on page 206 Tools and Parts Required To replace hardware components you need the tools and parts listed in Table 69 on page 172 Tools and Parts Required Mm 171 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 69 Tools and Parts Required Tool or Part Components Electrostatic bag or antistatic mat All Electrostatic discharge ESD All grounding wrist strap Flat blade screw blade screwdriver PIM approximately 1 4 in 6 mm Phillips screwdri
354. s ut dee societe even dea tbe i aee Aot des R oet etes 37 4350 and J6350 Cooling System i aree eer ne ven Ee 38 Software OVSEVIeW ipee e eee did o Sege 39 Routing Engine and Packet Forwarding Engine eccerre 40 Leet ae Microkernel srt ea da detesta ot lor De olas Ep 40 JUNOS Software Processes sis cett ri terei tor o atte o a e edu t 40 USer Iritetfaees cao moo n EH E e ECHO e ERR ER ttr acted 41 PIM and VoIP Module Overview 43 PIM and VoIP Module TEMS ger cemere o tee oe ee ere ere ege dede cut 45 Field Beplaceable PIMs acini ttp e c be t Ends 46 J2320 and J2350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary ier 46 J4350 and J6350 Field Replaceable PIM Summary sss 47 1 Port 6 Port 8 Port and 16 Port Gigabit Ethernet UPIMS inn 49 I Port Gigabit Ethernet ePIMS on resin RR E RR 52 Dual Port Serial PIM agudo ite te e ete eee dee e dg p 55 Dual Port T1 or EPM ui ettet her tete ele eti ttt 56 Dual Port Channelized T1 E1 ISDN PRI PIM sssse 57 O 59 Dual Port Fast Etliernet PIM ENNEN t ie uide ce hide e 60 4 Port Past EtherrieePIM iei ene et t aa pt E t tee etse tee 61 4 PortISDN BRIPIMS iia tet vec pest eqs rp te Er co Rn veo aee dien 62 ADSI PIM echtes e eene c atte i dar etui A ote 64 G SHDSEARIM tu cem pce eit tete a e E Toe eed pec eve gets 65 Avaya VOIP Module Sats iet ues ertet tse reb dot uestes sott a hd ats cote 66 Avaya VoIP Module Summary sssssss eee 67 TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module 69 TIM508 Anal
355. shing fire on or around equipment that draws air from the environment for cooling use this type of inert oxygen displacement extinguisher instead of an extinguisher that leave residues on equipment Do not use multipurpose Type ABC chemical fire extinguishers dry chemical fire extinguishers near Juniper Networks equipment The primary ingredient in these fire extinguishers is monoammonium phosphate which is very sticky and difficult to clean In addition in minute amounts of moisture monoammonium phosphate can become highly corrosive and corrodes most metals NOTE To keep warranties effective do not use a dry chemical fire extinguisher to control a fire at or near a Juniper Networks router If a dry chemical fire extinguisher is used the unit is no longer eligible for coverage under a service agreement Power Guidelines Any equipment in a room in which a chemical fire extinguisher has been discharged is subject to premature failure and unreliable operation The equipment is considered to be irreparably damaged We recommend that you dispose of any irreparably damaged equipment in an environmentally responsible manner Requirements and Specifications All Services Routers are available with AC power J2350 J4350 and J6550 routers are also available with DC power For information about each router s power system see J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features on page 15 and J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardwa
356. sing the J Web Interface m 85 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 50 Main Pane Elements Events n as regress Help About Logout Configuration gt Quick Configuration gt IPSec aod e Path to current task Quick Configuration Current task IPSec Tunnels Add an IPSec Tunnel Diagnose Manage Tunnel Information Help icon Help information Local Tunnel Endpoint Remote Tunnel Endpoint gt Externally routable IP address that is the local endpoint of the IKE Secret Key le IPSec tunnel Verify IKE Secret Key Private Prefix List 11510 10 10 24 y Red asterisk required field D m Help icon Displays useful information when you move the cursor over the question mark This help displays field specific information such as the definition format and valid range of the field 9016742 m Red asterisk Indicates a required field m Path to current task Shows the successive J Web tasks and subtasks you selected to display the current main and side panes Click a task to return to it m Icon Legend For the Edit Configuration subtask J Web configuration editor only explains icons that appear in the user interface to provide information about configuration statements a C Comment Move your cursor over the icon to view a comment about the configuration statement m Inactive The configuration statement does not affect the Services R
357. sis having a single processing unit or as many chassis or processing units for which Customer has paid the applicable license fees provided however with respect to the Steel Belted Radius or Odyssey Access Client software only Customer shall use such Software on a single computer containing a single physical random access memory space and containing any number of processors Use of the Steel Belted Radius software on multiple computers requires multiple licenses regardless of whether such computers are physically contained on a single chassis C Product purchase documents paper or electronic user documentation and or the particular licenses purchased by Customer may specify limits to Customer s use of the Software Such limits may restrict use to a maximum number of seats registered endpoints concurrent users sessions calls connections subscribers clusters nodes realms devices links ports or transactions or require the purchase of separate licenses to use particular features functionalities services applications operations or capabilities or provide throughput performance configuration bandwidth interface processing temporal or geographical limits In addition such limits may restrict the use of the Software to managing certain kinds of networks or require the Software to be used only in conjunction with other specific Software Customer s use of the Software shall be subject to all such limitations and purchase of all applicabl
358. ss box type the address of the DNS al server for example 10 148 2 32 Sap name sener 10148 3532 5 Click OK Add each domain that the 1 Next to Domain search click Add New Entry Set the domains to be searched For router belongs to example 8 2 In the Value box type the name of the domain in P which the router is located for example lab router net set domain search lab router net 5 Click OK i set domain search router net 4 Next to Domain search click Add New Entry 5 Inthe Value box type the name of another domain that the router belongs to for example router net 6 Click OK Define the backup router to be used when the router is booting or the routing protocol processes are not running In the Backup router section next to Address type the IP address of the backup router for example 192 168 2 44 Set the address for the backup router For example set backup router address 192 168 2 44 Define the IP address for 100 0 In the configuration editor hierarchy next to Interfaces click Configure or Edit In the Interface table locate the loO row and click Unit In the Unit table click 0 and in the Family section next to Inet click Configure or Edit To delete the existing IP address click the Discard button Select the Delete Configuration Below This Point option button from the next display Next to Address click Add new entry In the Source box type the address and prefix
359. system license keys G03000002223 aeaqea qkjjhd ambrha 3tkqkc ayareb zicik6 nv6jck btlxao 2trfyq 65cdou r5tbbb xdarpg Displaying License Usage m 167 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 168 m qq53lu G03000002224 aeaqea nv6jck 7rokz7 G03000002225 aeaqea nv6jck Imqgqj Meaning The output shows a list of the license keys qcx4vm qkjjhd btlxao wgdocl qkj jhd btlxao ouzq5a ydakcs ambrha 2trfyq r4q32p ambrha 2trfyq aiokdn t3yyh2 3tkqkc 65cdou 2wu4zf 3tkqkc 65cdou 4tr4u2 that each expected license key is present Displaying Installed License Keys v5mq ayargb zicik6 r5tbof 14uon5 zrxa ayarab zicik6 r5tbiu jr6ui2 wmcq installed on the Services Router Verify Part 3 Maintaining Services Router Hardware m Replacing Hardware Components on page 171 m Troubleshooting Hardware Components on page 209 m Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware on page 215 Maintaining Services Router Hardware m 169 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 170 1m Maintaining Services Router Hardware Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Because many of the Services Router s hardware components are field replaceable units FRUs you can remove and replace them yourself When you need to replace a router component contact your customer support or sales representative to order the field replaceable unit FRU that contain
360. t ePIMs in slots 5 and 6 m j6550 Install up to four Gigabit Ethernet ePIMs in slots 2 5 5 and 6 Field Replaceable PIMs WM 53 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide ES NOTE High speed slots are labeled with an E on the front panel slot number diagram To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 172 Interface LEDs The LINK and TX RX LEDs indicate link status and activity Table 25 on page 54 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 23 Gigabit Ethernet Port LEDs Function Color State Description LINK Green On steadily Port is online Unlit Off Port is offline TX RX Green Blinking Port is transmitting or receiving traffic Unlit Off Port might be online but it is not receiving traffic For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide Optical Interface Support Table 24 on page 54 describes the optical interface support on the SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM over single mode fiber optic SMF and multimode fiber optic MMF cables Table 24 Optical Interface Support for SFP Gigabit Ethernet ePIM Parameter 1000Base SX Transceiver 1000Base LX Transceiver Maximum distance 500 m 1640 ft on 50 125 um 10 km 6 2 mi on 9 125 um SMF MME cable cable 200 m 656 ft on 62 5 125 um 550 m 1894 ft on MMF cable MMF cable Transmitter wavelength 830 nm through 860 nm 1270 nm
361. t is a part of popular Web browsers Secure Sockets Layer SSL Protocol that encrypts security information before transmitting data across a network SSL requires two keys to encrypt data a public key known to everyone and a private or secret key known only to the recipient of the message and an authentication certificate Most popular Web browsers support SSL SSL certificate Secure electronic identifier conforming to the X 509 standard definitively identifying an individual system company or organization In addition to identification data the digital certificate contains a serial number a copy of the certificate holder s public key the identity and digital signature of the issuing certificate authority CA and an expiration date Secure Web Access Overview Before You Begin A Services Router uses the Secure Sockets Layer SSL protocol to provide secure management of Services Routers through the Web interface SSL uses public private key technology that requires a paired private key and an authentication certificate for providing the SSL service SSL encrypts communication between your router and the Web browser with a session key negotiated by the SSL server certificate An SSL certificate includes identifying information such as a public key and a signature made by a certificate authority CA When you access the router through HTTPS an SSL handshake authenticates the server and the client and begins a secur
362. t serial number labels 215 214 cover replacing 2320 and J2550 176 DIMENSION iia tad 12 30 environmental tolerances 106 S IER 123 heat dissipation ete e br die 112 J2320 EE 13 A hod a ss dui der RO eo 13 DEE 27 JOR 27 lifting EE 266 PIM slot n rbers z4 petere proc ree 20 52 power CONSUMIDO siii aaa re SEENEN 112 power management planning 112 power management troubleshooting 210 rack requirements iesi sb sot eet etie 104 Wer Seo s MD AA LN E E 17 50 Chassis SoftWare DOE geren ipee a 40 chassisd PTOCESS e 40 checklist for site preparation 115 clear operation RESET CONFIG button 22 55 cleartext access cus bei hae debe 155 le 103 CLI See JUNOS CLI CLI configuration editor basic setting Se Lube tb ehe EES 147 iritial ConfguratiOn sci deae si ete edt 147 secure access COnflguration 158 statement tVD6Ss se edt bees ves 94 CLI terminal See JUNOS CLI command completion description us LAU Ld e d beetle gd 95 setting omand Off stehe enee 98 command hierarchy dass etae cies sae petri i 91 Index m 293 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide command prompts CHANGING EE 98 configuration mode 1 93 operational mode Gi 92 command line interface See CLI configuration editor JUNOS CLI comments in configuration statements xviii Commit DUTON dedere rei ert dee nth e ipai 89 committed configuration root p
363. ta Set Ready 7 RTS gt Request To Send 8 CTS lt Clear To Send 9 RING lt Ring Indicator E1 and T1 RJ 48 Cable Pinouts The E1 and T1 PIMs use an RJ 48 cable which is not supplied with the PIM CAUTION To maintain agency approvals use only a properly constructed shielded cable E1 and T1 RJ 48 Cable Pinouts WM 235 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 87 on page 236 through Table 90 on page 237 describe the RJ 48 connector pinouts Table 87 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Straight Pinout RJ 48 Pin RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 PIM Data Numbering Data Numbering Form Form Signal 1 1 RX Ring 2 2 RX Tip 4 4 TX Ring 5 5 TX Tip 3 3 Shield Return Ground 6 6 Shield Return Ground 7 No connect No connect 8 No connect No connect Table 88 RJ 48 Connector to RJ 48 Connector Crossover Pinout RJ 48 Pin RJ 48 Pin on T1 E1 PIM Data Numbering Data Numbering Form Form Signal 1 4 RX Ring lt gt TX Ring 2 5 RX Tip TX Tip 4 1 TX Ring lt gt RX Ring 5 2 TX Tip lt gt RX Tip 5 5 Shield Return Ground 6 6 Shield Return Ground Y No connect No connect 8 No connect No connect 236 Mm ElandT1R 48 Cable Pinouts Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts Table 89 RJ 48 Connector to DB 15 Connector Straight Pinout
364. te link status and activity Table 30 on page 62 describes the meaning of the LEDs Table 30 LEDs for 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM Label Color State Description Link status upper Green On steadily Port is online left Off Port is offline Link activity upper Green Blinking Port is transmitting or receiving right data Off Port might be online but it is not ransmitting or receiving data For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide 4 Port ISDN BRI PIMs The 4 port ISDN BRI PIMs have four physical ports that support the ISDN BRI S T Figure 56 on page 62 or ISDN BRI U Figure 57 on page 65 interface type Figure 36 ISDN BRI S T PIM 002335 62 1H Field Replaceable PIMs Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Figure 37 ISDN BRI U PIM E o PORTI 9002336 ISDN BRI PIMs provide the following key features Onboard network processor Bandwidth on demand Dial backup Dial on demand routing backup floating static and dialer watch For pinouts of cable connectors for ISDN PIMs see ISDN RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 259 To install or remove a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 172 ISDN LEDs indicate PIM and port status Table 51 on page 65 describes the meaning of the LED states Table 31 LEDs for ISDN BRI S T and U PIMs Label Color State Description
365. ted DC power distribution panels one of which might be located at the top of the rack that houses the router A pair of cables one input and one return connects each set of terminal studs to the power distribution panel CAUTION You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity The power source cables might be labeled and to indicate their polarity There is no standard color coding for DC power cables The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply WARNING Power plant ground and chassis ground must be connected to the same building ground CAUTION Before router installation begins a licensed electrician must attach a cable lug to the grounding and power cables that you supply A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the router Each DC power cable 48 VDC and return must be 14 AWG single strand wire cable or as permitted by the local code Each lug attached to the power cables must be a ring type vinyl insulated TV14 6R lug or equivalent Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications MW 11411 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide NOTE Power cords and cables must not block access to router components or drape where people might trip on them For information about the DC power supply see
366. tempts to boot from the external compact flash if it is installed If the external compact flash is not present or fails the router attempts to boot from the USB storage device J2320 and J2350 Front Panel The front panel of a J2320 or J2350 Services Router see Figure 8 on page 19 and Figure 9 on page 19 allows you to install or remove PIMs view router status LEDs access the console port and perform simple control functions Figure 8 Front of J2320 Chassis POWER CONFIG Console Physical Interface PIM blanks LED LED port Module PIM Juniper J2320 2 Ji vo E deis X o Shale Wf 3i aS l LED g sm cone rZ SUIT NUMBER ls e 3 BARS d CONDE E qz m E 1 Q 3 ALARM LED ESD HA LED Power RESET Auxiliary LAN USB point button CONFIG port ports ports button Figure 9 Front of J2350 Chassis POWER CONFIG Auxiliary Physical Interface PIM blanks LED LED port Module PIM J Ge Juniper J235 0 des e 1 D n e as E STATUS PX Ae gi l 7 a LED S a CONFIG DO a e a ES nm SB Td Como Ak a O e LED N HA LED Po
367. tention Lors de l installation de l appareil la mise la terre doit toujours tre connect e en premier et d connect e en dernier Warnung Der Erdanschlu amp mu bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuerst hergestellt und zuletzt abgetrennt werden Avvertenza In fase di installazione dell unit eseguire sempre per primo il collegamento a massa e disconnetterlo per ultimo Advarsel Nar enheten installeres ma jordledningen alltid tilkobles f rst og frakobles sist Aviso Ao instalar a unidade a liga o terra dever ser sempre a primeira a ser ligada e a ltima a ser desligada jAtenci n Al instalar el equipo conectar la tierra la primera y desconectarla la ltima Varning Vid installation av enheten m ste jordledningen alltid anslutas f rst och kopplas bort sist DC Power Wiring Sequence Warning WARNING Wire the DC power supply using the appropriate lugs When connecting power the proper wiring sequence is ground to ground RTN to RTN then 48 V to 48 V When disconnecting power the proper wiring sequence is 48 V to 48 V RTN to RTN then ground to ground Note that the ground wire should always be connected first and disconnected last Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 257 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 258 m WARNING Waarschuwing De juiste bedradingsvolgorde verbonden is aarde naar aarde RTN naar RTN en 48 V naar 48 V De juiste b
368. ter ee 129 TXIBX BEE 23 35 54 Type C EE E E 107 types of configuration statements 94 U U port See ISDN BRI ports United States compliance statements ee 287 universal serial bus See USB UNPACKING the rTOULer suu a tee Eege yan ed 118 uPIMs Gigabit Ethernet See Gigabit Ethernet uPIMs URLs datasheet iarciet nente reme bot ead 45 PIM information and datasheets release MOLES was s tec ORT eS Motta xv return and repair Polities eee 217 SUP POL GE 212 USB universal serial bus storage device installing 187 storage device removing sssssssseese 186 storage device replacing 186 USB DOR the ettet teta Tat 24 56 user interfaces J Web graphical user interface GUI 41 See also J Web interface JUNOS command line interface CLD 41 See also JUNOS CLI JUNOScope application 42 OVGIVIGW c sd eh dite tte Miata ien ts 81 preparatiotiss A uud UM Bk hd E Ie Nae 82 SRE Ap US e EE 42 V V335 DCE Gable pinouts i ts t ett 251 V 55 DTE able DitioUts iiu inae ertt eee 250 Ventilation requirements ettet utem 105 verification active LICENSES ie eco e a ettet ect eat 166 basic connectivity 150 license usage i eene tene 167 CASES sete Eee er teh e tpe t eee 166 Secure access x ep ied ie ret reda 159 Version license kV otr des 163 voice over IP See Avaya VoIP modules VoIP See Avaya VoIP modules Index W warnings Dattery Wandin v
369. ter Tray Align the air filter edge with the first hook and loop fastener strip Air filter tray Air filter 6 Press down on the filter until it is firmly seated against the bottom of the tray 7 Hold the filter tray with the thumbscrew so that its sheet metal side faces the power supply fan exhaust The air filter tray is designed to prevent it from being inserted incorrectly see Figure 103 on page 206 Figure 103 Inserting the Air Filter Tray on J2350 Routers 9004117 Air filter tray 8 Slide the tray fully into the air filter opening 9 Tighten the thumbscrew to the chassis Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers The front panel of J4350 and J6350 Services Routers contains an air intake grid with a protective cover and a filter as shown in Figure 104 on page 207 206 1H Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components Figure 104 Attaching Air Filter and Filter Cover Air filter Filter cover 9003819 Cover latches We recommend changing the filter every 6 months However the optimal filter replacement interval can vary depending on the environment where the router is located If temperature alarms appear inspect the air filter To replace the air filter 1 Ov GBs Sa Remove the filter cover by squeezing the plastic tabs on either side of the filter cover Pull the filter cover away from the chassis Remove the old filter
370. ter is installed on a wall or rack have one person support the weight of the router while another person unscrews and removes the mounting screws Place the router in the shipping carton Cover the router with an ESD bag and place the packing foam on top of and around the router Replace the accessory box on top of the packing foam Securely tape the box closed Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking Packing Components for Shipment To pack and ship individual components follow these guidelines 218 1H Packing a Router or Component for Shipment Chapter 12 Contacting Customer Support and Returning Hardware m When you return components make sure they are adequately protected with packing materials and packed so that the pieces are prevented from moving around inside the carton m Use the original shipping materials if they are available m Place individual boards in electrostatic bags m Write the RMA number on the exterior of the box to ensure proper tracking CAUTION Do not stack any of the router components Packing a Router or Component for Shipment mM 219 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 220 1H Packing a Router or Component for Shipment Part 4 J series Requirements and Specifications m Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 225 m Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information on page 247 J series Requir
371. terface or the CLI The rescue configuration is a previously committed valid configuration CAUTION Pressing and holding the RESET CONFIG button for 15 seconds or more until the STATUS LED blinks red deletes all configurations on the router including the backup configurations and rescue configuration and loads and commits the factory configuration You can change the default behavior of the RESET CONFIG button For more information see the J series Services Router Basic LAN and WAN Access Configuration Guide Built In Gigabit Ethernet Ports Four built in Gigabit Ethernet ports provide LAN connections over copper interfaces to hubs switches local servers and workstations You can also designate an Ethernet port for management traffic When configuring one of these ports you use the interface name that corresponds to the port s location From left to right on the front panel the interface names for the ports are ge 0 0 0 ge 0 0 1 ge 0 0 2 and ge 0 0 3 For Gigabit Ethernet port pinout information see Gigabit Ethernet ePIM RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 234 Each port has two LEDs a TX RX LED on the left side and a LINK LED on the right side Table 15 on page 35 describes the built in Ethernet port LEDs Table 15 Gigabit Ethernet Port LEDs Function Color State Description LINK Green On steadily Port is online Unlit Off Port is offline TX RX Green Blinking Port is transmitting or receiving
372. teway Module TGM and at least one telephony interface module TIM is required No more than four TIMs of any kind can be installed on a single chassis Table 34 J2320 and J2350 Avaya VoIP Module Summary Software Release for Slot and Port Maximum Number on a Sample Interface Name PIM Also Called This PIM Numbering Chassis type pim 0 port TGM550 m TGM550 JUNOS 8 4 and later m J2320 Slots One required vp 3 0 0 Telephony Gateway 1 through 3 Gateway Module m J2350 Slots lf more than one See the interface Module m TGM550 1 through 5 TGM550 is installed naming conventions only the one in the in the J series Services lowest numbered slot is Router Basic LAN and enabled For example if WAN Access TGM550s are installedin Configuration Guide slots 2 and 3 only the one in slot 2 is enabled TIM508 m TIM508 JUNOS 8 5 and later m J2320 Slots One on J2320 Analog media 1 through 3 Telephony module m J2350 Slots Three on J2350 See Interface m TIM508 1 through 5 Planning for Power Module Management on page 1 12 Avaya VoIP Modules m 67 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 34 J2320 and J2350 Avaya VoIP Module Summary continued Software Release for Slot and Port Maximum Number on a Sample Interface Name PIM Also Called This PIM Numbering Chassis type pim 0 port TIM510E1 T1 m TIM510 J
373. th the management process through the common API interface These interfaces are designed to facilitate the configuration of one or in some cases many routers on the network Among the supported interfaces are the JUNOScope and Session and Resource Control SRC applications For more information about these products see the JUNOScope Software User Guide and the SRC PE Getting Started Guide Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview J series Services Routers accept Physical Interface Modules PIMs and Avaya VoIP modules in the slots on the front of the chassis A CAUTION PIMs and VoIP modules are not hot swappable You must power off the Services Router before removing or inserting a PIM or VoIP module Ensure that the PIMs and VoIP modules are installed in the router chassis before booting up the system A Physical Interface Module PIM is a network interface card that is installed on a J series Services Router to provide physical connections to a LAN or a WAN The PIM receives incoming packets from the network and transmits outgoing packets to the network Each PIM is equipped with a dedicated network processor that forwards incoming data packets to the Routing Engine and receives outgoing data packets from the Routing Engine During this process the PIM performs framing and line speed signaling for its medium type For a complete list of supported PIMs see Field Replaceable PIMs on page 46 Avaya VoIP modules are install
374. the configuration on the router If a feature license exists and that feature is configured the icense is considered used Licenses Installed umber of licenses installed on the router for the particular feature Licenses Needed umber of licenses required for legal of use the feature Usage is determined by the configuration on the router If a feature is configured and the license for that feature is not installed a single license is needed Installed Licenses ID Unique alphanumeric ID of the license State Valid The installed license key is valid Invalid The installed license key is not valid Version Numeric version number of the license key Group If the license defines a group license this field displays the group definition If the license requires a group license this field displays the required group definition NOTE Because group licenses are currently unsupported this field is always blank Enabled Features Name of the feature that is enabled with the particular license Expiry Expiration information for the license is correct For J series only permanent licenses are supported If a license has expired it is shown as invalid m 163 Managing J series Licenses with the J Web Interface J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Adding New Licenses with the J Web Interface To add a new license key on a Services Router with the J Web l
375. the POWER LED to turn off 4 Ensure that the voltage across the DC power source cable leads is 0 V and that the cable leads cannot become active during installation 194 1H Replacing Power System Components Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components A CAUTION You must ensure that power connections maintain the proper polarity The power source cables might be labeled and to indicate their polarity There is no standard color coding for DC power cables The color coding used by the external DC power source at your site determines the color coding for the leads on the power cables that attach to the terminal studs on each power supply 5 Remove the power cable from the DC power source 6 Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the clear plastic cover protecting the terminal block 7 Within the terminal block remove the screw that fastens the power cable lug to the terminal block 8 Carefully move the power cable out of the way 9 Using the removed screw secure the replacement power cable see 1 to the appropriate terminal Tighten the screw until snug Do not overtighten The screw contains a captive washer used to secure the power cable lug to the terminal block ES NOTE Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated DC power feed For information about connecting to DC power sources see Connecting Power on page 124 10 Dress the power cable appropriately 11 Replace the clear plastic cover over
376. the configuration by entering the commit command Configurations on page 150 Table 63 Configuring Basic Settings To check the configuration see Displaying Basic Connectivity Task J Web Configuration Editor CLI Configuration Editor avigate to the System evel in the configuration hierarchy 1 In the J Web interface select Configuration gt View and Edit gt Edit Configuration 2 Next to System click Configure or Edit From the edit hierarchy level enter edit system Define the hostname of he router In the Host name box type the hostname of the router for example routera Set the hostname For example set host name routera ame the domain in which the router is ocated In the Domain name box type the domain name of the router for example lab router net Set the domain name For example set domain name lab router net Allow SSH remote access 1 Inthe Nested configuration section next to Services click Configure or Edit 2 Next to Ssh click Configure or Edit 5 Click OK 4 Click OK a second time to return to the System level in the configuration editor hierarchy Set remote access for SSH Set services ssh Define root authentication for access to the router NOTE For readability the entire key is not shown 1 Inthe Nested configuration section next to Root authentication click Configure or Edit 2 Next to Ssh rsa click Add New
377. tic bag and insert it into the socket Push the Crypto Module down flat against the main board until the release clips click into place as shown in Figure 100 on page 203 Insert the standoff washer under the Crypto Module Insert the screw and tighten it until snug Do not overtighten Slide the cover onto the router and replace and tighten the cover screws Replace the power cord or cable Press and release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Verify that the Crypto Module is correctly installed by issuing the show chassis hardware command as shown in the following example user host gt show chassis hardware Hardware inventory Item Version Part number Serial number Description Chassis JN1092BAEADB 36350 Midplane REV 03 710 014593 NR2489 System IO REV 01 710 016210 NL3304 JX350 System IO Crypto Module Crypto Acceleration Routing Engine REV 08 710 015273 NM4265 RE J6350 3400 FPC 0 FPC PIC 0 4x GE Base PIC FPC 6 REV 00 750 015152 FPC PIC 0 6x GE SFP uPIM Xcvr 0 NON JNPR PC14DP3 SFP SX Xcvr 2 NON JNPR PC21M3E SFP SX Power Supply 0 Replacing Crypto Accelerator Modules on J4350 and J6350 Routers Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components If Crypto Module appears in the output the Crypto Accelerator Module is installed correctly Replacing Air Filters on J2350 Routers The cooling fans on J2350 routers draw air through vents along the left side of the chassis and e
378. ting the router to power and ground see Connecting Power on page 124 NOTE You cannot mix DC and AC power supplies in the same chassis WARNING DC powered Services Routers are intended for installation only ina restricted access location J6350 Power System The J6350 Services Router uses either AC or DC power You can install one or two autosensing load sharing power supplies on the system board at the bottom of the chassis as shown in Figure 15 on page 28 or Figure 17 on page 29 The power supplies distribute the different output voltages to the router components depending on their voltage requirements When two power supplies are installed and operational they automatically share the electrical load For full redundancy two power supplies are required If a power supply stops functioning for any reason the second power supply instantly begins providing all the power the router needs for normal functioning It can provide full power indefinitely Each power supply has an LED located to the upper right of the power supply connector Table 16 on page 37 describes the power supply LED For information about site power preparations see Power Guidelines Requirements and Specifications on page 107 For information about connecting the router to power and ground see Connecting Power on page 124 Power supplies on J6350 Services Routers are hot removable and hot insertable You can remove and replace a red
379. tions xviii square in configuration statements xviii BRI media module See TIM521 browser interface See J Web interface BTUS per Tour ede vanes ere etd 106 built in Ethernet ports See Gigabit Ethernet ports buttons Apply Quick Configuration 88 Cancel J Web configuration editor 89 Cancel Quick Conftguratton ee 88 Commit J Web configuration editor 89 OK J Web configuration editor 88 OK Quick Configuration 88 jo cM CES 20 55 c cables AC power See AC power cords ADSL RJ 1 T pirio ts teta 258 arranging for safety 175 Avaya VoIP 10 AWG replacement grounding Cabl8 sid tts iie eet beet eebe 66 chassis console port DB 9 connector Joao 255 chassis console port RJ 45 connector Elle EE 254 connecting to network media 125 console port cable chassis A opene EEEE 139 142 console port cable chassis replacing 172 DC cables See DC power cables disconnecting PIM cables 175 EIRJ 48 pIDolts cheer tione tt 255 Ethernet cable connecting 137 159 142 Fast Ethernet RJ 45 connector pinout 255 Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 connector pinouts CPIM Zeie erer e pe tete iets 254 Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 connector pinouts UP IMS g t meos ttr te nh halt tps tite pe uaa 255 grounding auecscsteoiD as 125 ISDN RJ 45 pin outs xin ret ttt EE 239 PIM installirig u deri as hd eee
380. to Select and deselect interfaces by clicking the direction Interfaces enable HTTP access arrows m To enable HTTP access on an interface add the interface to the HTTP Interfaces list m Todisable HTTP access on an interface add the interface to the Logical Interfaces list HTTPS Web Access Enable HTTPS Access Enables HTTPS access on interfaces To enable HTTPS access select the Enable HTTPS access check box HTTPS Certificate Specifies SSL certificates to be used for encryption This field is available only after you have created an SSL certificate To specify the HTTPS certificate select a certificate from the HTTPS Certificate list for example new Configuring Secure Web Access M 157 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Table 65 Secure Access Quick Configuration Summary continued Field Function Your Action Enable HTTPS on All Enables HTTPS on all interfaces at one To enable HTTPS on all interfaces select the Enable Interfaces time HTTPS on All Interfaces check box HTTPS Enabled Allows you to specify interfaces on which Select and deselect interfaces by clicking the direction Interfaces you want to enable HTTPS access arrows m Toenable HTTPS access on an interface add the interface to the HTTPS Interfaces list m To disable HTTPS access on an interface add the interface to the Logical Interfaces list JUNOScript over SSL Enabl
381. to the slot and press down as shown in Figure 84 on page 183 Figure 84 Inserting the J4350 or J6350 Compact Flash 9003834 ES NOTE On some Services Routers the compact flash is in a horizontal position If the compact flash connection is horizontal lay the compact flash behind the slot and slide it forward until it clicks into place 10 Slide the cover onto the chassis 11 Replace and tighten the screws on the sides and top of the chassis that secure the cover to the chassis Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers 8 183 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 12 Replace the power cord or cable 13 Press and release the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Replacing External Compact Flashes 184 m The external compact flash is an optional component on J2320 and J2350 Services Routers It provides secondary storage for the router and can accommodate software images configuration files and microcode If the internal compact flash fails on startup the router boots from the external compact flash For information about configuring the external compact flash see the J series Services Router Administration Guide NOTE Depending on your configuration the Services Router might not have an external compact flash If no external compact flash is installed proceed directly to Step 10 to install the compact flash
382. tomeist re o e RE ERE t eee tea tae efte 115 Site Pr paration Checklist ec en te P e E etie e tae duda 115 Installing and Connecting a Services Router 117 Before de WE testet m reda ent o e UE TRU RE M e ERR ee 117 Unpacking a J series Services Bouter 00ooocccccccccccccooannnnnnncccnccncononana nn nn nc nncnnnns 118 Installing J2320 and ECH RoU tets rie tt tt t ae d tede 119 Installing J4350 and J6550 Routers sssssssssss nana nnnnnnnnnns 120 Connecting Interface Cables to Services Routers i c 125 Chassis Grounding i eter Du eret et be rer o eese E eR Ue rede dE 125 Connecting POWER gesteet et EEN edet iui ect ba Ad 124 Corinecting AC POWER reine ec ane e ret ed ot 124 Connecting e WEE 126 Powering a Services Router On and Off sssssssssssss s 129 Establishing Basic Connectivity 131 Basic Connectivity TELS sd me D tette 151 Basic Connectivity OVERVIEW te eee ise ee v EEN 152 Router TderitificatiOn a ee one eMe xod e tr RR e ctae RO She 152 Root PAsSWOF zt at siet phu etia ec aste ese toit e onde aed ebd dee 155 Time Zone and Systerd Times ee raten Waals ree deo ana 155 Network Setting Sos sei er o eet cons e qe op te tede eg EA 155 Default Gateway 1 cedo ie n De Yee e s I NEE 154 Backup Router oes een telaten da 154 Eoopbach Addtess i e oed mot aol wives d bester D ede eig eee edes 154 Built In Ethernet Interface Address tiurie noni a eE 154 Management ACCESS eie ecd p ere RCM pad 155 Before You BEGIN EE 15
383. traffic 4 Port Fast Ethernet For alarms see the configuring and monitoring alarms information in the J series Services Router Administration Guide ePIM You can install 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIMs in any of the high speed slots as follows m J4350 Install up to two 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIMs in slots 5 and 6 m J6350 Install up to four 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIMs in slots 2 5 5 and 6 NOTE For 4 port Fast Ethernet ePIMs if you apply a CoS scheduler map on outgoing egress traffic the router does not divide the bandwidth appropriately among the CoS queues As a workaround configure enforced CoS shaping on the ports The 4 Port 10 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet ePIM shown in Figure 55 on page 61 has four physical Fast Ethernet ports Figure 35 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM The 4 Port Fast Ethernet ePIM provides the following key features m Full duplex and half duplex modes m Autonegotiation through medium dependent interface MDI and MDI crossover MDI X support Field Replaceable PIMs m 61 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide For pinouts of cable connectors for Fast Ethernet ePIMs see Fast Ethernet RJ 45 Connector Pinout on page 233 NOTE 4 port Fast Ethernet ePIMs support a maximum frame size of 1514 bytes Jumbo frames are not supported For information about installing and removing a PIM see Replacing a PIM on page 172 Fast Ethernet LEDs indica
384. truction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense FCC Part 15 Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures m Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna m Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver m Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected m Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or TV technician for help FCC Part 68 Statement This equipment complies with Part 68 of the Federal Communications Commission FCC rul
385. ubringen ist Wird das Gestell mit Stabilisierungszubeh r geliefert sind zuerst die Stabilisatoren zu installieren bevor Sie die Einheit im Gestell anbringen oder sie warten WARNING Avvertenza Per evitare infortuni fisici durante il montaggio o la manutenzione di questa unit in un supporto occorre osservare speciali precauzioni per garantire che il sistema rimanga stabile Le seguenti direttive vengono fornite per garantire la sicurezza personale Il Juniper Networks router deve essere installato in un telaio il quale deve essere fissato alla struttura dell edificio Questa unit deve venire montata sul fondo del supporto se si tratta dell unica unit da montare nel supporto Quando questa unit viene montata in un supporto parzialmente pieno caricare il supporto dal basso all alto con il componente pi pesante sistemato sul fondo del supporto Se il supporto e dotato di dispositivi stabilizzanti installare tali dispositivi prima di montare o di procedere alla manutenzione dell unit nel supporto WARNING Advarsel Unnga fysiske skader under montering eller reparasjonsarbeid pa denne enheten nar den befinner seg i et kabinett V r n ye med at systemet er stabilt Felgende retningslinjer er gitt for verne om sikkerheten Juniper Networks router ma installeres i et stativ som er forankret til bygningsstrukturen Denne enheten ber monteres nederst i kabinettet hvis dette er den eneste enheten i kabinettet
386. uct warranty information visit http www juniper net support warranty m JTAC Hours of Operation The JTAC centers have resources available 24 hours a day 7 days a week 565 days a year Self Help Online Tools and Resources For quick and easy problem resolution Juniper Networks has designed an online self service portal called the Customer Support Center CSC that provides you with the following features m Find CSC offerings http www juniper net customers support m Search for known bugs http www2 juniper net kb m Find product documentation http www juniper net techpubs m Find solutions and answer questions using our Knowledge Base http kb juniper net m Download the latest versions of software and review release notes http www juniper net customers csc software m Search technical bulletins for relevant hardware and software notifications https www juniper net alerts m Join and participate in the Juniper Networks Community Forum http www juniper net company communities m Open a case online in the CSC Case Manager http www juniper net cm To verify service entitlement by product serial number use our Serial Number Entitlement SNE Tool located at https tools juniper net SerialNumberEntitlementSearch Opening a Case with JTAC You can open a case with JTAC on the Web or by telephone m Use the Case Manager tool in the CSC at http www juniper net cm m Call 1 888 314 JTAC 1 888 514
387. ug into an AC power source receptacle Replacing Power System Components m 193 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide CS NOTE Each power supply must be connected to a dedicated AC power feed For information about connecting to AC power sources see Connecting Power on page 124 6 Verify that the power cord does not block access to router components or drape where people might trip on it 7 Pressandrelease the power button to power on the router Verify that the POWER LED lights steadily Figure 92 Installing an AC Power Supply Replacing DC Power Supply Cables To replace a power cable for a DC power supply 1 Locate a replacement power cable and a lug that meet the specifications defined in Chassis Grounding on page 125 and DC Power Connection and Power Cable Specifications on page 111 A CAUTION A licensed electrician must attach a cable lug to the power cable that you supply A cable with an incorrectly attached lug can damage the router for example by causing a short circuit 2 Attach an electrostatic discharge ESD grounding strap to your bare wrist and connect the strap to the ESD point on the chassis or to an outside ESD point if the router is disconnected from earth ground For more information about ESD see Preventing Electrostatic Discharge Damage on page 251 3 Press and release the power button to power off the Services Router Wait for
388. unctionality and features Quick Configuration wizards simplify basic configuration and minimize the risk of operator error m JUNOS command line interface A Juniper Networks command shell that runs on top of a UNIX based operating system kernel The CLI is a straightforward command interface On a single line you type commands that are executed when you press the Enter key The CLI provides command Help and command completion For an introduction to the J Web and CLI interfaces see Services Router User Interface Overview on page 81 For more information see the J Web Interface User Guide and the JUNOS CLI User Guide This chapter contains the following topics m J2320 Services Router Overview on page 3 m J2350 Services Router Overview on page 4 m J4350 Services Router Overview on page 5 m J6350 Services Router Overview on page 6 m J series Software Features and Licenses on page 7 J2320 Services Router Overview The J2320 Services Router is primarily designed for remote or branch offices It has a small chassis that is 1 U rack unit in size with a nonredundant AC power supply J2320 Services Router Overview M 3 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide an external compact flash and two universal serial bus USB ports for external storage and an optional Crypto Accelerator Module J2320 routers ordered with the optional Crypto Accelerator Module come standard with 1 GB of memory while those o
389. undant power supply without powering down the router or disrupting the routing functions To avoid electrical injury carefully follow the instructions in Replacing Power System Components on page 191 NOTE You cannot mix DC and AC power supplies in the same chassis J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features M 37 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide A WARNING DC powered Services Routers are intended for installation only ina restricted access location J4350 and J6350 Cooling System 38 m The cooling system includes three fans at the rear of the chassis The airflow produced by these fans keeps router components within the acceptable temperature range see Figure 21 on page 39 The speed of the fans is adjusted automatically according to the current temperature An air filter protects the air intake opening at the front of the chassis and must be replaced periodically For instructions see Replacing Air Filters on J4350 and J6550 Routers on page 206 The Routing Engine monitors the temperature of the router components If the maximum temperature specification as measured at the CPU junction is exceeded and the router cannot be adequately cooled the Routing Engine shuts down the hardware components When the CPU temperature reaches 80 C 176 F a yellow alarm is triggered When the CPU temperature reaches 105 C 2219 F the system shuts down There is no red alar
390. unication among the JUNOS software processes and provides a link to the Packet Forwarding Engine With the J Web interface and the command line interface CLI you configure the routing protocols that run on the Services Router and set the properties of its network interfaces After activating a software configuration use either user interface to monitor the protocol traffic passing through the router manage operations and diagnose protocol and network connectivity problems This section contains the following topics m Routing Engine and Packet Forwarding Engine on page 40 m Kernel and Microkernel on page 40 m JUNOS Software Processes on page 40 m User Interfaces on page 41 Software Overview M 39 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Routing Engine and Packet Forwarding Engine A Services Router has two primary software processing components m Routing Engine The Routing Engine provides three main functions m Creates the packet forwarding switch fabric for the Services Router providing route lookup filtering and switching on incoming data packets then directing outbound packets to the appropriate interface for transmission to the network a Maintains the routing tables used by the router and controls the routing protocols that run on the router m Provides control and monitoring functions for the router including controlling power and monitoring system status m Packet Forwarding Engine
391. ve Clock A 45 8 Local Loopback 58 9 57 Request to Send B 9 20 Data Terminal Ready A 4 25 Signal Ground 5 24 6 Terminal Timing A 26 to 25 B gt 30 to 29 gt Serial PIM Cable Specifications m 229 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide V 35 DTE Cable Pinout Table 78 V 35 DTE Cable Pinout LFH 60 Pin M 34 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 A Frame Ground 57 B Signal Ground 48 E Request to Send 37 D Clear to Send 9 E Data Set Ready 13 F Received Line Signal Detector 33 H Data Terminal Ready 41 K Test Mode 60 P 59 Transmit Data A 1 R 2 Receive Data A 59 S 60 Transmit Data B 2 T 1 Receive Data B 52 U 51 Terminal Timing A 5 V 6 Receive Timing A 51 W 52 Terminal Timing B 6 X 5 Receive Timing B 56 Y 55 Transmit Timing A 55 AA 56 Transmit Timing B 22 to 21 26 to 25 Za 18 to 17 si 230 HN Serial PIM Cable Specifications V 35 DCE Cable Pinout Table 79 V 35 DCE Cable Pinout Chapter 13 Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts LFH 60 Pin M 34 Pin LFH 60 Pairing Description 15 A Frame Ground 57 B Signal Ground 37 G Request to Send 48 D Clear to Send 33 E Data Set Ready 13 F Received Line Signal Detector 9 H Data Terminal Ready 45 K Test
392. ve a slot on the motherboard for an internal compact flash For information about replacing the compact flash see Replacing Internal Compact Flashes on J4350 and J6350 Routers on page 181 J4350 and J6350 Boot Devices The 4550 and 6550 Services Routers can boot from two devices m Internal compact flash m USB storage device Normally the J4350 or J6350 Services Router boots from the internal compact flash If the compact flash fails the router attempts to boot from the USB storage device J4350 and J6350 Services Router Hardware Features BN 321 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide J4350 and J6350 Front Panel 32 m The front panel of the Services Router see Figure 19 on page 32 allows you to install or remove PIMs view router status LEDs access the console port and perform simple control functions Figure 19 Front of J4350 and J6350 Chassis POWER STATUS RESET CONFIG Physical Interface Modules PIMs LED LED button al v E amp i e J J d JL n JL J k i P o ll igi I EP i s i D omo og o al 004 omo O i aus PORTO PORT STATUS sms PORT 1 STATUS N se Poor of mn 7 EZ SLOT NUMBER _ AE BSS ary y t ALARM HA Power LAN ports Console Auxiliary USB ESD point S LED LED button port p
393. ver number 1 and number 2 Chassis cover Compact flash Crypto Accelerator Module DRAM modules PIM Power system components Replacing the Console Port Cable Replacing a PIM Removing a PIM The RJ 45 port labeled CONSOLE on the Services Router s front panel allows you to connect the router to an external management device such as a laptop or a terminal server For cable specifications see Chassis Console Port Pinouts on page 234 To replace the console port cable 1 Locate an appropriate replacement cable and connector 2 Plugthe Ethernet connector at either end of the cable into the console port on the front panel see Figure 69 on page 140 and Figure 70 on page 141 5 Plug the connector at the other end of the cable into the external management device If you are connecting to a DB 9 serial port use the provided RJ 45 to DB 9 serial port adapter To remove or install field replaceable Physical Interface Modules PIMs in a Services Router you must first power off the router This section contains the following topics m Removing a PIM on page 172 m Installing a PIM on page 174 The PIMs are installed in the front of the Services Router A PIM weighs less than 1 Ib 0 5 kg 172 Mm Replacing the Console Port Cable Chapter 10 Replacing Hardware Components A CAUTION Do not hot swap PIMs Failure to power off the router before removing m or installing a PIM might result in damage to the hardware
394. view M 81 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide CLI Overview Before You Begin 82 1H Before You Begin m Edit the configuration in a text file a Upload a configuration file The J Web interface also allows you to manage configuration history and set a rescue configuration m Diagnosing Diagnose routing problems by running the ping or traceroute diagnostic tool The diagnostic tools also allow you to capture and analyze control traffic on the routers m Managing Manage log temporary and core crash files and schedule reboots on the J series routers On J series routers you can also manage software packages and licenses and copy a snapshot of the system software to a backup device a Configuring and monitoring events Filter and view system log messages that record events occurring on the router You can configure files to log system log messages and also assign attributes such as severity levels to messages Configuring and monitoring alarms On J series routers only monitor and diagnose the router by monitoring active alarms that alert you to the conditions on a network interface You can also set the conditions that trigger alarms on an interface For more information about the J Web interface see Using the J Web Interface on page 85 The CLI is a straightforward command interface in which you type commands on a line and press Enter to execute them The CLI provides command h
395. ving or inserting a PIM or VoIP module Ensure that the PIMs and VoIP modules are installed in the router chassis before booting up the system CAUTION The grounding cable for J series routers must be at minimum 14 AWG cable For more information see Chassis Grounding on page 123 66 Avaya VoIP Modules Chapter 3 PIM and VoIP Module Overview Avaya VoIP modules are described in the following sections Avaya VoIP Module Summary on page 67 TGM550 Telephony Gateway Module on page 69 TIM508 Analog Telephony Interface Modu e on page 75 TIM510 E1 T1 Telephony Interface Module on page 74 TIM514 Analog Telephony Interface Modu TIM516 Analog Telephony Interface Modu TIM518 Analog Telephony Interface Modu e on page 75 e on page 76 e on page 78 TIM521 BRI Telephony Interface Module on page 79 Avaya VoIP Module Summary Table 54 on page 67 and Table 55 on page 68 provide the module names software release information slot and port numbers maximum number allowed on a chassis and sample interface names where applicable for the Avaya VoIP modules A CAUTION Do not install a combination of PIMs in a single chassis that exceeds the maximum power and heat capacity of the chassis If J series power management is enabled PIMs that exceed the maximum power and heat capacity remain offline when the chassis is powered on On each J series Services Router with Avaya VoIP a single TGM550 Telephony Ga
396. wenden WARNING Avvertenza Per ridurre il rischio di incendio usare solo un cavo per linea di telecomunicazioni di sezione 0 12 mm2 26 AWG o maggiore WARNING Advarsel Bruk kun AWG nr 26 eller telekommunikasjonsledninger med storre dimensjon for redusere faren for brann gt bib WARNING Aviso Para reduzir o risco de inc ndio utilize apenas terminais de fio de telecomunica es N 26 AWG ou superiores Safety Guidelines and Warnings m 265 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide A WARNING jAtenci n Para reducir el riesgo de incendios usar s lo l neas de telecomunicaciones de calibre No 26 AWG o m s gruesas A WARNING Varning For att minska brandrisken skall endast Nr 26 AWG eller st rre telekommunikationsledning anv ndas Installation Safety Guidelines and Warnings 266 m Observe the following guidelines and warnings before and during Services Router installation m Chassis Lifting Guidelines on page 266 m Installation Instructions Warning on page 266 m Rack Mounting Requirements and Warnings on page 267 m Ramp Warning on page 271 Chassis Lifting Guidelines The weight of a fully populated chassis is approximately 15 9 lbs 7 2 kg for aJ2320 Services Router 18 2 lbs 8 5 kg for a J2350 Services Router 25 3 lbs 11 5 kg for a J4350 Services Router and 30 7 Ib 13 9 kg for a J6350 Services Router Observe the following guidelin
397. wer RESET Console LAN USB ESD button CONFIG port ports ports point button The components of the front panel are described in the following sections m Physical Interface Modules PIMs on page 20 m Power Button and POWER LED on page 20 J2320 and J2350 Services Router Hardware Features m 19 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide 20 m m STATUS LED on page 21 m ALARM LED on page 21 m HA LED on page 22 m RESET CONFIG Button on page 22 m Built In Gigabit Ethernet Ports on page 23 m Console Port on page 25 m AUX Port on page 23 m USB Port on page 24 Physical Interface Modules PIMs Physical Interface Modules PIMs provide the physical connection to various network media types For information about individual PIMs see Field Replaceable PIMs on page 46 For pinouts of PIM cable connectors see Network Cable Specifications and Connector Pinouts on page 225 For PIM replacement instructions see Replacing a PIM on page 172 The J2320 front panel has three slots and the J2350 front panel has five slots for field replaceable PIMs These slots are numbered from top to bottom and from left to right as shown in Figure 10 on page 20 Slot O is a fixed interface module that contains four built in Gigabit Ethernet ports For more information see Built In Gigabit Ethernet Ports on page 23 Figure 10 Slot Number Diagram on J2320 and J2350 J2320 J2350 SLO
398. xhaust it through vents on the right side of the chassis For more information see J2320 and J2350 Cooling System on page 25 On J2350 routers that comply with Network Equipment Building System NEBS criteria the air intake grid contains a filter To verify that the system is a NEBS compliant system run the show chassis hardware command A NEBS compliant system displays the term NEBS in the output We recommend changing the filter every 6 months However the optimal filter replacement interval can vary depending on the environment where the router is located If temperature alarms appear inspect the air filter To replace the air filter 1 Loosen the filter tray thumbscrew at the rear of the J2350 chassis 2 Hold the screw firmly and pull it away from the chassis until you have pulled the attached filter tray out of the chassis see Figure 101 on page 205 Figure 101 Removing the Air Filter Tray g004116 Air filter tray 3 Hook and loop fasteners on the base of the filter tray hold the air filter inside the tray Grasp the air filter with your fingers and gently pull it away from the filter tray 4 Set the old air filter aside 5 Place the new filter so that its edge aligns with the first hook and loop fastener as shown Figure 102 on page 206 Replacing Air Filters on J2350 Routers m 205 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Figure 102 Placing the Air Filter on the Air Fil
399. y the root password is not defined on the router To ensure basic security you must define the root password during initial configuration If a root password is not defined you cannot commit configuration settings to take effect on the router If you use a plain text password the router displays the password as an encrypted string so that users viewing the configuration cannot easily see the password The root password must meet the following conditions m The password must be at least 6 characters long m You can include most character classes in a password alphabetic numeric and special characters except control characters m Valid passwords must contain at least one change of case or character class For Common Criteria environments only the password must be between 10 and 20 characters long and must include at least three of the five character classes uppercase letters lowercase letters punctuation marks numbers and other special characters Control characters are not recommended For more information see the Secure Configuration Guide for Common Criteria and JUNOS FIPS Time Zone and System Time Network Settings You define the time zone for the location where you plan to operate the Services Router by using a designation that consists of the following information for the location m Name of the continent or ocean For example America or Atlantic m Name of the major city or other geographic feature in the time
400. y be particularly important in rural areas Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements Chapter 14 Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information European Community iy Juniper NETWORKS Declaration of Conformity Juniper Networks Inc 1194 N Mathilda Ave Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA declares that under our sole responsibility the product s Services Router Model J2320 J2350 SSG 320 5G 350 are in conformity with the provisions of the following EC Directives including all amendments and with national Legislation implementing these directives Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EFC EMC Directive 89 336 EEC and that the following harmonized standards have been applied EN 60950 1 2001 411 EN 60825 1 19M4 41 A2 EN 300 336 V1 3 3 2005 EN 55024 1998 Al A2 EN 61000 3 2 EN 61000 3 3 EN 55022 1998 A 1 2000 A 2003 Class A EN 61000 4 2 EN 61000 4 3 EN 61000 4 4 EN 61000 4 6 EN 61000 4 5 EN 61000 4 11 5 and 11 AC only I J Ledo Place E Date Sunnyvale CA John Lockwood 06 20 2007 Compliance Statements for EMC Requirements m 285 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide Juniper LS NETWORKS Declaration of Conformity Juniper Networks Inc 1194 N Mathilda Ave Sunnyvale CA 94089 USA declares that under our sole responsibility the product s Internet Router Model J4350 J6350 are in conformity with the provisions of th wing EC Directives meluding all amendments
401. yez conscient des dangers pos s par les circuits lectriques et familiarisez vous avec les proc dures couramment utilis es pour viter les accidents WARNING Warnung Dieses Warnsymbol bedeutet Gefahr Sie befinden sich in einer Situation die zu einer K rperverletzung f hren k nnte Bevor Sie mit der Arbeit an irgendeinem Ger t beginnen seien Sie sich der mit elektrischen Stromkreisen verbundenen Gefahren und der Standardpraktiken zur Vermeidung von Unf llen bewu t WARNING Avvertenza Questo simbolo di avvertenza indica un pericolo La situazione potrebbe causare infortuni alle persone Prima di lavorare su qualsiasi apparecchiatura occorre conoscere i pericoli relativi ai circuiti elettrici ed essere al corrente delle pratiche standard per la prevenzione di incidenti WARNING Advarsel Dette varselsymbolet betyr fare Du befinner deg i en situasjon som kan f re til personskade F r du utf rer arbeid p utstyr m du vare oppmerksom p de faremomentene som elektriske kretser inneb rer samt gj re deg kjent med vanlig praksis n r det gjelder unng ulykker WARNING Aviso Este s mbolo de aviso indica perigo Encontra se numa situa o que Ihe poder causar danos f sicos Antes de come ar a trabalhar com qualquer equipamento familiarize se com os perigos relacionados com circuitos el ctricos com quaisquer pr ticas comuns que possam prevenir poss veis acidentes WARNING jAtencio
402. ypes Supported iori te 47 LINE and TRUNK on Avaya VoIP TGM550 69 LO ORO esi x av metre te eie tern A RE saw 154 serial See serial ports SHDSL See SHDSL ports T1 See T1 ports T3 See T3 ports telephone and trunk on Avaya VoIP TGM550 69 PME eier eeoa d b Per rat e 69 OR LO 74 OR LO 75 IMS 2 degt dech 79 A bans shag Seat dete deans 24 36 Index m 303 J2320 J2350 J4350 and J6350 Services Router Getting Started Guide power AC power See AC power applying DUTTON Ee EE e IEN 124 consumption PlMs cece ee eeeeeeee A 112 DC power See DC power grounding regdiremMenti e irnak nee 123 EE 20 33 managing un sre aesti erede ote Neen 112 power cables See DC power cables power cords See AC power cords power supplies See power supplies power system See power system ele VE 129 requltermerntsz tr s 109 troubleshooting 210 poWer DUEtOTr ste eie reegt eessen 20 33 power cables See DC power cables power cords See AC power cords POWERLED inuenio aia deet eng der gedreet 20 33 power management Pai odian troubleshooting power supplies EE 24 EE 24 EE EE 36 J6350 See power supplies J6350 LED SCALES i onte oec tos 56 power supplies J6350 blank panel required in empty alot 191 dedicated AC power feed requirement 194 dedicated DC power feed requirement 197 GESCHPUOMN it e seen rettet ett ette qe et ed Guess 37 stalling AC sc obere caters PAD

Juniper Networks J6350 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents